AFTER WE DIE, WHAT THEN?

This book forever rends the veil between Earth and what has been
called heaven or paradise, by opening the door on the development of
what may be man’s ultimate electronic communication system.

It is far from being fantasy or science fiction. Actually, its report of

findings from sixteen years of world-wide interdisciplinary research
into the basic nature of man correlates with the emerging projections of
quantum physics. And it provides, as no other book has ever done, con-
firmation that the individual mind, memory banks, personality and soul
survive death and the disintegration of the physical body. It shows why
the reader cannot die, even by suicide or atomic holocaust.

The original manuscript was submitted for critical review to a

panel of twenty-two ministers, scientists, priests, physicians, rabbis,
educators and psychiatrists from Winnipeg to Capetown and from
Tokyo to Zurich. Their unqualified endorsements have been confirmed
by many thousands of readers. Translations of the first edition have
been well-received in Japan, South America and India.

Although confirming the validity of the world’s great religions, it

does not preach any new gospel, dogma, creed, religion or “ism”. It is
as scientifically accurate as is possible at this stage of man’s evolution.

Perhaps its greatest contribution is to show why and how the life
we live TODAY determines the quality of life we each will live AFTER
we “die”.

The book is written in simple and easy-to-understand language. It

uses 42 pictures and diagrams to make it possible to treat this complex
and mind-expanding subject in less than 200 pages.

i
 Other Books by George W. Meek:

From Seance to Science, 1972

From Enigma to Science, 1973
Healers and the Healing Process, 1977
Collapse and Comeback, 1979
As We See It From Here, 1980
The Spiricom Technical Manual, 1982
The Magic of Living Forever, 1982

Books About George W. Meek:

The Ghost of 29 Megacycles, by John G. Fuller, 1985

This book does not attempt to preach any new gospel, dogma, creed,
religion or “ism”. It does not attempt to convert you to the concepts it
discusses. If any portions ring true to your “still, small inner voice”,
fine. If not, reject them!

ii
AFTER
WE DIE,
WHAT THEN?
Evidence You Will Live Forever!

GEORGE
W. MEEK

Expanded Edition

ARIEL PRESS
Atlanta, Georgia

iii
AFTER WE DIE, WHAT THEN?
Evidence You Will Live Forever!
Copyright © 1987 by George W. Meek

All Rights Reserved. No part of this book may be used or repro-

duced in any manner whatsoever without written permission,
except in the case of brief quotations embodied in reviews or
articles. Printed in the United States of America. Direct inquiries
to: Ariel Press, 88 North Gate Station Drive, #106, Marble Hill,
GA 30148.

Visit our web site at: http://lightariel.com

ISBN 0-08904-099-X
Library of Congress Card Catalog Number: 79-0909
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. Am I Both Caterpillar and Butterfly?

1 Not Back to School.................................................................................. 7

2 The Mind and the Jelly Mold.............................................................. 17
3 All Packed and Ready to Fly!............................................................. 31
Summary ................................................................................................ 33

II. What Evidence for Survival is There?

4 Historical and Religious Writings...................................................... 37

5 Deathbed, Near-Death and Out-of-Body Experiences ................... 39
6 Apparitions, Hauntings and Ghosts.................................................. 44
7 Obsession and Spirits........................................................................... 48
8 “Spirit Doctors”.................................................................................... 55
9 Spirit Photographs............................................................................... 58
10 Materialization ................................................................................... 63
11 Reincarnation ....................................................................................... 72
12 Space-Time Relationships................................................................... 75
13 Conservation of Matter and Energy.................................................. 78
14 Communications through Mediums & Telepathic Channels ....... 80
Summary................................................................................................. 85

III. A Blueprint of Immortality

15 A Tour of Many Mansions.................................................................. 89

v
 IV. Specific Questions and Specific Answers

16 Unraveling the Mysteries .................................................................... 99

V. The Certainty of Living Forever

17 Perspectives, Predictions and Parallels........................................... 143

18 History in the Making........................................................................ 147
19 History Repeats Itself......................................................................... 153
20 Questions—Questions—Questions ................................................. 167
21 Unlimited Horizons............................................................................ 172

Appendices

A A Prophecy by Dr. George Jeffries Mueller.................................... 178

B Nature of Time in the Spirit World by Dr. W.F.G. Swann .......... 180
C Notes on Reincarnation by Robert R. Leichtman, M.D ................ 184
D The Role of Subtle Energies............................................................... 186
E How to Die........................................................................................... 187
Bibliography ........................................................................................ 193
Index by Names................................................................................... 200
Index by Subject.................................................................................. 202

vi
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Subject Page

1 Evolutionary development of man’s physical systems ......................... 8

2 Photo of a normally invisible life form
and a transparent physical body.................................................................. 9
3 Human embryo suspended in sea of water............................................. 12
4 Water content of human body................................................................... 12
5 The brain is not the mind(s)....................................................................... 15
6 American Indian and Polynesian concepts
of the three levels of being........................................................................... 16
7 Magnetic lines of force passing through blood,
flesh and bones.............................................................................................. 18
8 Energy fields around a bar magnet........................................................... 18
9 Interaction between energy field of magnetized
compass needle and freshly plucked plant leaf....................................... 19
10 Acupuncture meridians.............................................................................. 20
11 Stream of healing energy............................................................................ 22
12 Diagram of chakra energy centers............................................................ 23
13 Head chakra energies.................................................................................. 24
14 Multiple image (body) concept................................................................. 26
15 Man’s multiple levels of being.................................................................. 26
16 The invisible levels of being....................................................................... 27
17 The real, the everlasting “I”........................................................................ 28
18 The programmer of the electro-biochemical mechanism
we call the physical body............................................................................. 28
19 Figure 18 presented in a different form................................................... 29
20 Figure 18 presented in a different form................................................... 31
21 Symbolic survival of bodily death............................................................ 32

vii
22 Photograph of a live ghost.................................................................. 46
23 Typical early 19th century spirit photography................................ 60
24 Sir Arthur Conan Doyle shortly before his death............................ 61
25 Photograph of Doyle produced at his request by
spirit helpers two months after his death.......................................... 61
26 Medium securely fastened in enclosure before trance 65
27 Medium in trance with ectoplasmic formations
beginning to issue from left ear........................................................... 65
28 Materialized figure ready to hold the Bible...................................... 66
29 Materialized figure holding the Bible and starting
to pass through the steel bars.............................................................. 67
30 Close-up of fully materialized figure showing cloth-like
nature of veil, beaded head ornament and crucifix......................... 68
31 Fake materialized figure captured in total darkness with
infrared film........................................................................................... 70
32 Interpenetrating levels of life and consciousness............................ 92
33 The next stop for all people now living on planet earth .............. 102
34 The proven path for individual soul development....................... 103
35 Interplane communications.............................................................. 109
36 The original “recycling plant”.......................................................... 129
37 Giovanni Battista/Magnetism......................................................... 145
38 Samuel F.B. Morse/Telegraph......................................................... 145
39 Alexander Graham Bell/Telephone................................................ 145
40 Thomas Edison/Voice Recording................................................... 145
41 William J. O’Neil................................................................................ 161
42 Dr. George Jeffries Mueller............................................................... 162

viii
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
It would not have been possible to assemble the information pre-
sented here without the cooperation, of four of the outstanding tele-
pathic channels I have discovered during a sixteen-year global search
for such rare talent: Sarah Gran Heironymus, Shirley Shultz, Patricia
Ann Faxon, and R.B., who asks to remain anonymous.
Each of the following, in his or her own way, has contributed to the
sixteen years of research on which this book is based:

Gilbert Anderson Marcus and Marika McCausland

Hernani Andrade Lucille McNames
Raymond Bayless Robert N. Miller
Itzhak Bentov Dennis Milner
William and Maria Brown Pat Mitchell
Hana Bushbeck Raymond Moody
Ken Carey Carl Munters
Willard Cerney Henry and Diane Nagorka
Trevor James Constable Mary Alice O’Neil
Grace and Ivan Cooke Leslie Price
Robert Crookall Constantine Raudive
Joaquin Cunanan Marilyn and John Rossner
Bruce Dapkey Theodor Rudolph
Harry Edwards Lillian Scott
Jule Eisenbud Mary Scott
David Ellis Franz Seidl
Sarah Estep Sigrun Seutemann
Leslie Flint Ernst Senkowski
JoAnn Floyd Richard Sheargold
Jerry Gross Harold and Martha Sherman
Bertha Harris Donald Shultz
Robert Jeffries George Singer
Anna Jeffries Ted Smart
David and Ann Jevons Alfred Stelter
Paul Jones Mary Swainson
Friedrich Jurgensen Attila von Szalay
Shafica Karagulla William Tiller
Robert Kesselring Paul Trovillo
Hans Otto Konig Norbert Unger
Robert Laidlaw Walter and Mary Jo Uphoff
Peter Leggett Mary Van Meer
Robert R. Leichtman, M.D. Robert Ward
Lawrence LeShan William A. Welch
Judy Luckwell Ruth White
Henry and Mary Mandel Olga and Amborse Worrall

ix
 (The individuals just listed may or may not agree with all opinions
and concepts expressed in this book.)
The following persons in seven countries read the preliminary
manuscript and made valuable suggestions and criticisms:

Margaret Hamilton Bach Rev. Robert E. Miller

Joaquin Cunanan Dr. Dennis Milner
Rabbi Simon Friedman Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama
Glen Forrester Hamilton, M.D. Hans Naegeli-Osjord, M.D.
Hans Heckmann Father Neff
H.T.E. Hertzberg Leslie Price
Dr. Robert Jeffries Jeanne Rindge
Dr. D.M.A. Leggett Don and Shirley Shultz
Robert R. Leichtman, M.D. Sir Kelvin Spencer
M.C.F. Leisher Rev. T.N. Tiemeyer
Albert Mevi Hazel Topps

Special thanks are due John White for extensive editorial sugges-
tions and to Jorge Rizzini for permission to use the materialization
photographs in Chapter 11.
My research colleague William J. O’Neil deserves the primary
credit for the historical breakthrough reported in Chapters 15 and 16.
History may show his accomplishment has done as much to rend the
veil between this life and the afterlife as any event in the last 2,000
years.
The many years of hard and frustrating work of Erland Babcock
and Hans Heckmann are bringing us even closer to the goal of inter-
ference-free, two-way instrumental communication with dwellers on
the mental-causal-celestial planes of consciousness.
And of course, this book would never have come into being without
the 52 years of loving and capable collaboration of Jeannette D. Meek.

x
 DEDICATION

This book is lovingly dedicated to

these Earth-plane dwellers:

prophets,
sages,
holy men,
mystics,
mediums,
telepathic channels,
electronic technicians,
scientists, and

all enlightened dwellers

on higher planes of consciousness

who collectively helped to construct the

composite picture of life-without-end
as presented in this book.

xi
AFTER WE DIE, WHAT THEN?
 What This Book is About
All of us, regardless of education, race, sex, color, or creed, and
regardless of wealth or social status, have three things in common:
We have survived the birth process;
We are now alive;
We will die.
Each of us is traveling a road which has a funeral at its end. We
cannot help shying away from the very thought of what must come, if
we are honest with ourselves. We must find satisfying answers to such
questions as:
Is death really the end?
After doing my best to struggle through this life, am I blotted out
forever, as materialists say?
Do I lose my personal identity and become some formless non-entity,
absorbed in a great unconscious?
Can I believe the Biblical and accumulated religious lore about life
after death?
Will I, and my body, lie in a cold dark grave until some far-off and
uncertain judgment day?
Is there truth about purgatory, and about a hell with fire and brim-
stone?
Is all this talk about a loving and compassionate God just utter
nonsense?
Why hasn’t my minister, priest or rabbi answered these questions for
me?
I was born with an inquiring mind and am a natural skeptic. I have
spent more than half a century trying to resolve the enigma of life and
afterlife. Quite frankly, most of what I read and what I was told was
either conflicting or just didn’t “make sense”. It just didn’t “add up”.
So I took my quest to the far corners of the globe, making inquiry of
the wisest ones I could find in any country to which I traveled. I
pressed deeply into independent research, engaging the help of trained
investigators. Finally I gave up a professional career to spend the
remainder of my life, if need be, in the focused endeavor to find
convincing answers and to put them into a comprehensive pattern
which would resolve these uncertainties. I wanted answers to ques-
tions that have plagued all thinking persons since man became the
thinking creature he is.
Sixteen years have been spent in self-financed, intensive travel to
most parts of the globe. I sought and found kindred souls in twenty
countries—medical doctors, psychiatrists, physicists, biochemists, psy-
chologists, hypnotherapists, physiologists, psychics, healers, parapsy-
chologists, ministers, priests and rabbis. And gradually, as the years
slipped by, I found the answers I sought.

3
 Fortunately, in just the last twenty-five years we have learned more
about the life we will be living after we shed our physical bodies, than
was known in all of the earlier periods of recorded history!
Our research resulted in the building of an instrumental system of
communication which permitted more than twenty hours of conversa-
tion with persons who died and were buried but who are today still
alive and able to tell us fascinating details of life after death.
This book is the first to provide details on developments which
will have a profound effects on civilization as did the invention of the
telegraph, telephone, radio, television, the first airplane or the pro-
ject that launched mankind into outer space.
It is written in simple language. It makes use of a question-and-
answer format and easily understood diagrams and photographs to
convey its message.

George Meek

4
 PART ONE

Am I Both Caterpillar and Butterfly?

Does doubt within him rise and grow,

As he spins his cocoon?
Is this the end of all he knows?
Has darkness come too soon?
Does he cry out to God in fear
Of losing all he holds most dear?
“Lord, why must I become as dust,
and leave the world I love and trust?
Ah, my Creator, now I see:
It’s this cocoon which sets me free!”
—Joyce M. Fox

5
 We are all familiar with the seeming magic depicted in the drawing
on the previous page, where a wet, squishy caterpillar spins himself a
burial robe and later emerges into a new world as a beautiful, colorful
and vibrantly alive butterfly. This sounds like sheer magic, and is, but I
assure you that in creating you, the Master Magician has perfected his
“tricks” still more. In your case, you will shed your wet, squishy body
and, eliminating the step shown here as the chrysalis, emerge
immediately into a new world with your mind, your memory banks and
your personality intact.

6
 CHAPTER 1

Not Back to School

In writing this book, I have set for myself a most difficult task. I
want to show you why it is not possible for you to die, even if you com-
mit suicide or are a victim of an atomic holocaust.
I want to answer the dozens of questions you have about what hap-
pens after you leave your physical body—about what can be a glorious
or a distressing experience.
I want to answer questions which are unanswered—and probably
not even considered—by books you read in school or the reading you
have done in the Bible, the Talmud, the Koran or other holy books.
In fact, I want to answer questions for which you would not find
answers today in the best scientific libraries.
I want to share knowledge with you that will be the subject of more
exhaustive treatment in books not yet written—books available ten to
twenty years from now.
So it is obvious that this material could not be obtained by going
back to school, nor—as present matters stand—by further study of the
so-called hard sciences. In the pages which follow we are going far
beyond the current restrictions of chemistry, physics, microbiology,
neurophysiology, brain research, psychiatry and the findings of our
best medical internists.
Skilled surgeons have been dissecting the body and brain for the
last 150 years. No dissection has located the “spirit” or “soul”. No
surgeon has been able to isolate the mind from the brain, to throw light
on the question of survival of the individual mind, personality and soul.
There is a vast contribution to be made by science—as you will see
later in Part II—but it is still so new, so poorly understood and so nar-
rowly recognized by scientists themselves that the majority cannot tell
you what will be happening after you leave the caterpillar-like body.
This does not mean that they won’t get the answers eventually. Dr.
Fred Hoyle, the eminent British cosmologist, has said: “When science
begins the study of nonphysical phenomena, it will make more progress
in one decade than in all the centuries of its experience”.
Science, however, may not make quite as rapid progress as Dr. Hoyle
predicts. Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama made an interesting observation
when he, as one of the reviewers of the early draft of this manuscript,
read Dr. Hoyle’s statement. Dr. Motoyama, himself a scientist with an
international reputation, is also a Shinto priest and psychic deeply
schooled in spiritual matters. He is founder and president of The
International Association for Religion and Parapsychology in Tokyo,

7
 Fig. 1. Evolutionary development of man’s physical systems

Japan. Dr. Motoyama remarked, “In one sense the research will be more
difficult than Dr. Hoyle anticipates. Science has limited means for its
contact with and search of spiritual things”.
But we need not wait ten, twenty, or thirty years! The material
assembled in this book will help give you many of the answers right now.
First, it is necessary to recognize the physical body for what it is: an
electro-biochemical mechanism of truly magnificent conception and
design. It has evolved (Fig. 1) over the many millions of years since life
first came ashore from the primordial seas. Think of its many
“systems”: the skeleton, the blood circulation, the nerves, etc. Think
also of its many important organs, such as the brain, heart, lungs,
pancreas, kidneys, liver, genitals, large and small intestines, etc.; the
two to three square yards of skin which make up the body’s all-enclos-
ing envelope; and the organs that provide our five senses. Individually,
each of these is fantastically complex and perfected to an awesome
degree. And, unlike any manmade mechanism or machine that must go
into the repair shop for even a minor malfunction, the electro-bio-
chemical mechanism that is the physical body is endowed by its
Creator with a built-in capability to maintain and even repair itself.
Most of what we know about our surroundings is a result of the
working of man’s five senses—touch, taste, smell, sight, and hearing. In
fact, almost everything we think we know about our world and the
universe has come to us through one or more of these sense organs. We
feel quite content in our belief that we can rely on these sense organs to
give us a completely factual, dependable, and highly accurate picture of
the universe in which we are each immersed. But this is a false belief!
Consider the sense of sight. Our eyes can see the merest fraction of
what is going on all around us. They can detect only matter which
reflects light in the very narrow band of wavelengths we call the visible
spectrum. Laboratory research has shown that there is much going on
all around us in wavelengths that our limited sense organs cannot detect.

8
 Supersensible Sight
In our laboratory at Metascience Corporation, I can filter out all
visible light so that as far as the eyes can tell, it is dark. But special
photographic color films will record wavelengths of light from objects
that the eyes cannot detect. Such color films record pictures of some
very strange living forms that baffle my scientific friends. Fig. 2 is an
example.
When Fig. 2 was taken, the room was dark except for certain wave-
lengths of light beyond the range of normal human vision. No flash was
used. But when the film was developed, the unique object at the left
was photographed in lovely shades of blue, pink, peach, red and violet.
(This small black-and-white reproduction does not show the delicate
inner workings or “organs” of this strange and normally invisible life
form. They are much more apparent in the color enlargements.)
What is mind-bending is that such objects occupy space in our
windowless laboratory and seemingly pass instantaneously through the
“solid” brick walls. Such objects also pass through my body as if it were
transparent—which, as a matter of fact, it is!

Fig. 2. Photo of a normally invisible life form and a transparent physical body

9
 When the color negative of Fig. 2 was used to make color enlarge-
ments we were astonished to see that the film had recorded in good
detail the back, seat and front legs of the chair on which I was sitting. It
was even possible to see and count the upholstery tacks hidden behind
my trouser-covered leg, as well as the chair back, which was concealed
behind eight inches of flesh, blood and bone!
Well, naturally I was shocked. Such a thing cannot happen in the
world of our five senses. I showed this photo to scientists and photo
specialists* throughout the United States and abroad. They were at a
loss to explain it. But there is a saying to the effect that “if you find even
one white crow, that proves forever that not all crows are black”.
Science, quite rightly, makes a fetish of “replication”. By this,
scientists mean that it is necessary to be able to repeat a phenomenon
under controlled laboratory conditions. Hence, we persevered in our
search for “white crow number two”. Many months and more than
4,000 color photos later, we again succeeded in photographing the
transparency of the human body. Those who are unfamiliar with the
trials and tribulations of research may naturally wonder why it took
more than 4,000 photos before the next white crow was captured. I will
explain.
Thomas Alva Edison was one of the world’s greatest inventive
geniuses. For forty-four winter seasons he operated a research labora-
tory in Ft. Myers, Florida, where our laboratory was formerly located.
When Edison was trying to perfect the filament for the electric light
bulb, his assistants became very discouraged. One of them said, “Mr.
Edison, in trying to find a filament which will be satisfactory, you have
tried more than 9,000 different materials. It is obvious you’re
attempting the impossible”. To which Mr. Edison is said to have
replied, “Well, we now know 9,000 materials which will not work. Let’s
get busy and find the one which will work”.
Pioneering on the edge of the unknown—whether it be to
encapsulate light in a little glass bulb or capture spirit entities on
film—is a slow and sometimes discouraging job. Nature does not give
up her secrets easily. (This laboratory work is still progressing, but at a
slow rate.)

* If you are scientifically or photographically oriented, it is almost a mathematical cer-

tainty that you already have not one but several ideas for “explaining” the strange effects
in Fig. 2. But consider these three points. First, I am not a photographic novice. I
acquired my first 35 mm camera 53 years ago, and in the following half-century, I have
used practically every type of camera and am familiar with all stages of the photographic
process. Second, all qualified critics who have examined the color photographic blowups
have found no error upon the closest of examination. Third, as I pointed out on the
opening page, this is a nontechnical book. Documentation of our research will be the
subject of later releases.

10
 Supersensible Hearing
A similar situation exists with respect to what our ears are able to
tell us about what we call “reality”. The most acute hearing in an adult
covers only the range of 20 to 16,000 cycles per second. A dog has a
wider range of auditory perception. We are familiar with the “silent”
whistle for calling dogs, the one which emits sound waves at vibratory
frequencies beyond the range of the human ear.
In the past few years, scientific research in our laboratory and that
of a colleague has been aimed at exploring phenomena beyond the
sensory ability of our auditory system to detect. Just as we are pioneer-
ing beyond the capability of our sense of sight, we are also exploring
beyond our sense of hearing.
We were initially motivated to do this because of our research with
healers. We became intrigued by the many healers encountered in our
worldwide studies who said they “heard voices of departed spirits” who
guided them in their healing work. As I explained in Healers and the
Healing Process,* this subject has been referred to for thousands of
years in literature, both religious and secular.
We felt that the time had come to take a serious scientific look at the
subject. After all, at least some souls have been today locked behind
bars in mental hospitals all over the world because they committed the
sin of “hearing voices” that no sane person could hear. Ipso facto, there
are no such voices and the person is obviously quite crazy.
Well, Virginia, there are such voices, although few persons can
hear them. Your auditory system can pick up the sound of your
mother’s voice as she asks you to help on some household chore. But
that auditory system, marvel of perfection that it is, does not tell you
that the room in which you are standing is filled with hundreds of
voices being carried on the air waves of radio and television stations.
Nor does it tell you that the room is also filled with the voices of spirit
entities who once lived in physical bodies just like yours. Their voices
are at wavelengths or frequencies much much higher than even the
radio and television signals which you cannot hear.
Everything in our world, this universe and the Cosmos, results from
energy, and energy manifests as vibration at some specific frequency.
The sound energy imparted to the molecules of air from a spoken
word is at a very low frequency—from a few hundred to a few thousand
per second. Our radios receive waves of energy which vibrate at
hundreds of thousands of cycles per second. Our telephone conversa-
tions are carried across the country, across the oceans or to an
astronaut in a spacecraft by energy with a vibrational frequency of
millions of cycles per second. Light waves, with which we are able to

* Published in 1977 by Theosophical Publishing House, Wheaton, Illinois.

11
see, have a frequency of roughly 12,000,000,000,000 cycles per second.
That’s twelve trillion! Soft x-rays, hard x-rays, gamma rays, etc., vibrate
at progressively higher frequencies.
Just as it was necessary to supplement our hearing capability by in-
venting the radio to send and receive energy at higher frequencies than
airborne audio sounds, man must invent new devices that will allow
him to “tune in” to the still higher frequencies of the voices of, say, the
discarnate spirit doctors who are working with healers. Thus, Virginia,
this is a parallel to our work in developing photographic “seeing” capa-
bility to go beyond the energy wavelengths our visual system can
detect. This means using magnetic tape to capture sounds (voices) we
never knew existed and photographic film to see things that we never
knew existed.
All of this knowledge is teaching us that we know very little about
important aspects of our body, mind and spirit. Our ignorance of what
we know about the “solid”, everyday, “material” world can be described
in one word: colossal. As will be shown later, these normally invisible
sights and unheard sounds have a most important bearing on the ques-
tion of life after death.

A Wet, Squishy Body

Just as the caterpillar has a soft squishy body, so do you and I. Each
of us is born in a sea of water (Fig. 3) and when we step on the scales,
most of what we are weighing is water. As we see in Fig. 4, more than
60 percent of the young woman’s weight is water. It would take at least

Fig. 3. Human embryo suspended in sea Fig. 4. Water content of human body
of water

12
nine gallon jugs to hold an equivalent amount, and her brain is at least
80 percent water by weight.
Since we are embarked on a search to see what part of us survives
the death of our physical bodies, it would seem we can narrow our
search. Obviously the water will dry out after the person dies—it will
evaporate. So whatever survives must be in the part which makes up
less than 40 percent of the physical body.

A Body Filled With “Empty” Space

Furthermore, the soft, wet, plastic mass which we are talking about
is found to be “empty”! By this I refer to the fact that our present-day
insights into the nature of matter show us that most of the space taken
up by the human body is 99⅓ percent void (leaving aside the possibility
of the so-called ether or equivalent). Andrew Glazewski, the late scien-
tist-priest of Britain, explains it thus:
“To illustrate this, imagine borrowing an atom from, for example, a
hand. For the sake of convenience let us accept the Bohr model of the
atom, magnified so that the nucleus is the size of an apple—where
would the next atom be? Between 1,000 to 2,000 miles away! Looking
upon our bodies on this scale we would see a vast universe containing
many millions of trillions of atoms forming billions of galaxies. If the
nuclei of those atoms were shining, as they are centres of energy, we
would confront a vast, celestial, starry sky of unimaginable spaces. So
you see, our body, of which we have only a statistical perception when
using our senses, is actually a great “void” with little centres of energy
in forms of atoms dispersed at enormous distances. One biological cell
contains many millions of galaxies of atoms”.
Now we can begin to understand why it was possible, as I reported
a few pages earlier, for a camera to look right through the flesh, blood,
organs and bones in my chest and record a picture of the chair’s back.
Like you, I am a wet, squishy mass largely filled with “empty” space.

How Much Does A Soul Weigh?

Since we would like to identify that portion of the individual person
which survives death of the physical body, it would seem we can now
narrow our search even further. Obviously the water portion will
evaporate during the days, weeks and months after death. Yet as we
will see later, there is rather solid proof that the essence—that is, the
mind, personality and soul—depart the physical body within a period of
minutes to a maximum of three days. Thus, although Biblical writings
are replete with references to “the water and the spirit”, it does not seem
that water as such is the carrier for mind, personality and soul.
There have been a few serious attempts to measure the loss of
weight that takes place at the instant of death. One piece of research
stands out. While this work was done a long time ago, there has never

13
been serious question of the methodology, the integrity of the scientist
who did the research or the quality of the findings.* McDougall found
the instantaneous weight loss at death varied between ½ and ¼ ounce.
The research of McDougall seems to have been replicated in the
work of five physicians at a Massachusetts hospital.† These men built a
large and very delicate balance. On one platform they would lay a
person who was at the very point of death, while on the other platform
they would place counterweights so as to bring the large pointer into a
balanced condition. At the moment the heart stopped beating, the
doctors said, “With startling suddenness the pointer moved, indicating a
weight loss from the now dead patient’s body. The amount of the
weight loss which we encountered over such tests in a six-year period
varied between one-half and one ounce”.
Over the years, most of us familiar with these finding have found it
difficult to believe that it could be possible to put the mind, personality
and soul into such a small package. Recently, however, with the
advances in solid state physics, we have had dramatic indication of
how man himself is able to put a vast amount of information into a very
small package. A small crystalline chip weighing less than 20 percent
of the above-mentioned weight loss can store 100,000,000 “bits” of
information. So it no longer seems so preposterous that our Creator has
devised an infinitely more compact and efficient method of “packaging”
the individual human mind, personality and soul.
Thus we have arrived at the point where we see that the body and
the brain are largely made up of water and that, in reality, both are
largely “void” of any “solid matter”. Physicists have now come to the
conclusion that even atoms are not solid at all, but are disturbances in
some nonphysical continuum. Moreover, there seems to be a possibility
that the surviving mind, personality and soul may be “contained” in a
very small and perhaps almost weightless “package”.
These considerations have tremendous importance for us in trying to
track down just what part of the caterpillar-like body it is that might have a
chance to survive through eternity. But at this point it is only sensible for
you to ask: How can anyone answer my questions about life after death
in a scientific way when medical science has not even proven that man
has a mind or spirit? Since medical science has not proven that the brain
is anything more than a collection of perishable cells (which are 80
percent water), how can my mind possibly survive the death of my
physical body?

* Carrington, H., Dr. McDougall’s Experiments, Archives of the American Society for
Psychic Research, Vol. 1, 1907. The later work of Crookall (see Bibliography) provided
good correlation with the McDougall data.
† John Langone, Vital Signs—The Way We Die in America, 1974, Little Brown, New York.

14
 Your Brain Is NOT Your Mind
Certainly one of the greatest blocks modern man has in understand-
ing life after death stems from having been told that the brain and mind
are synonymous. However, a different picture emerges for those
serious researchers into the nature of man who can look beyond con-
ventional notions. For such scientists it has become increasingly
obvious that the brain and mind are not the same thing.

Fig. 5. The brain is not the mind(s)

One of the most conclusive pieces of evidence was provided by the

research of the eminent Canadian neurosurgeon, Dr. Wilder Penfield.
He was considerably surprised at how large a piece of the brain he
could surgically remove with little or no effect on the ability of the
patient to carry on living as usual. To use a now out-of-date analogy
comparing the brain with a telephone switchboard, it was almost as
though several of the “operators” went out for lunch, but as long as even
one was still on duty, the calls could come in and go out much as usual.
In this same connection, it must be noted that neither Penfield nor
any other brain surgeon has been able to identify any specific brain cells
or regions of the brain as being what psychoanalysts refer to as the id,
ego, and superego; neither could the psychologist identify the brain’s site
for conscious, subconscious, or superconscious states of mind. Yet con-
cepts attributing three levels or aspects to the human mind existed hun-
dreds of years before psychiatry and psychology came into existence.
For example, both the native peoples of the Pacific and American
Plains Indians recognized three levels of mind and represented them in
their tribal totem poles. The totem pole shown at the right of Fig. 5 and
in Fig. 6 was carved by a Cherokee Indian. It shows wings adjacent to
the topmost level of the Indian’s self. Years ago, the Indian knew that
the highest level of his mind and spirit would leave the physical body at
death, and like a butterfly, fly on to a higher level of existence. Only
today is the white man discerning a scientific basis for much of the
knowledge of the “primitive”.
In this age of the computer, we find another analogy for helping to

15
 higher self

Fig. 6. American Indian and Polynesian

concepts of the three levels of being
middle self

lower self

understand how the mind functions and can even operate as an entity
distinct from the body and its brain. Like the computer programmer,
the mind works through the brain but is not the brain.
We know that the brain controls all aspects of the body that it serves.
We can say that the body, the “bio-electrical mechanism”, is controlled by
its computer, the brain. We can go further and say that the brain is
infinitely more sophisticated than the most advanced computer yet built
by man. But we also must say that the brain, like even the fanciest
computer, is totally useless unless there is a programmer—some
intelligence separate and distinct from the computer itself. It is only in the
last three decades—a mere instant in humanity’s long evolutionary
climb—that science has given us a valuable tool which enables us to
understand that the mind is the programmer, that it interpenetrates the
“empty space” in our wet, squishy, physical body; and that it can control
every single action of the more than 60,000,000,000,000 cells that make
up the physical body.
What is this mysterious and magical tool?

16
 CHAPTER 2

The Mind and the Jelly Mold

A wise old fellow who wrote about death in the Bible, perhaps
thirty centuries ago, used a beautifully poetic description for which
only the most recent scientific research gives basis for understanding.
The writer of the 12th chapter of the book of Ecclesiastes said: “...or
ever the silver cord be loosed (severed) or the golden bowl be broken...”.
He was referring to the departure of the mind and soul from the bowl
(skull). The separation involves the severing or cutting of the tenuous
connection by which the mind and soul have been attached to the brain
while cradled in the bowl or skull. To understand more fully the role
the silver cord plays in life after death, let us consider the following
analogy.

Jelly Molds and Energy Fields

If a cook wants to mold gelatin into an attractive shape for a salad
or dessert, he or she must resort to the use of a mold made of plastic,
metal or paper. The cook looks at the mold and knows what shape the
watery, jelly-like material will assume when it cools and hardens. If the
mold is battered and bent, the molded product will be shaped accord-
ingly. Energy fields behave like jelly molds.
In beginning physics courses, there is an experiment in which a
magnet is placed beneath a piece of paper on which iron filings are
randomly sprinkled. The invisible energy field of the magnet becomes
visible as the filings are molded into the pattern of the lines of magnetic
force. Thus the iron filings are molded into a shape by an invisible field
of magnetic energy. You can see a jelly mold, but your limited eyesight
cannot see an energy field. Yet the invisible energy field of the magnet
is just as real as the metal or plastic jelly mold.
In Fig. 7, I show how a powerful magnet will send its energy field
through the cells and bones of a hand, and still organize iron filings.
Even after passing through the hand, the energy field is so strong that it
can overcome gravity and hold thousands of small pieces of steel in a
precise pattern.
In Fig. 8, I performed a more modern experiment and placed a bar
magnet in front of a color television screen. In brilliant colors a
fascinatingly complex picture of energy fields around the magnet
became visible to the eye and was captured on color film.
The reader may be inclined to think, “Yes, these ‘fields’ may surround
and penetrate magnets and other material objects, but what about living
objects such as plants and people? Do these have energy fields?”

17
 Fig. 7. Magnetic lines of force passing through blood, flesh and bones

Historically, the credit for answering this question goes to Dr.

Harold Saxton Burr and F.S.C. Northrop, both of Yale University School
of Medicine. In 1935 they published a paper, “The Electro-Dynamic
Theory of Life”. This pioneering work fully documented the existence of
invisible but dynamic fields of energy interpenetrating and surrounding
all living matter. This work went largely unnoticed for forty years
because it just did not fit with accepted scientific attitudes about the
nature of matter.
In the period between 1940 and 1960, the Kirlians, a husband and
wife team of Russian scientists, refined an old technique of electro-

Fig. 8. Energy fields around a bar magnet

18
 photography pioneered by Bardouc of France at the beginning of the
20th century. They were able to record on photographic film the
otherwise invisible energy fields extending beyond the skin of men and
animals. And in the late 1970’s, a young British scientist, Rupert
Sheldrake, had the temerity to hypothesize the existence of what he
called anthropomorphic fields as a formative force in living bodies and
tissues. His book, A New Science of Life, was held up to ridicule by the
most prestigious British science magazine, Nature. The reviewer,
probably frightened by the far-reaching implications for many fields of
science, labeled it “a book fit for burning”.
Also in the late 1970’s, following the path pioneered by Burr, North-
rop and the Kirlians (but with no knowledge of the work of Rupert
Sheldrake), I may have been the first to capture on photographic film
the beautifully-colored energy fields of my own etheric body,
momentarily projected into the space at the right of my physical body
as shown in Fig. 2 (page 9).
Simultaneously with the work of Sheldrake and Meek, two British
scientists, Dennis Milner and Edward Smart, were doing pioneering
work with electro-photography. The illustration in Fig. 9 shows the
energy fields around a freshly plucked leaf and the magnetized needle
from a compass. Notice that the energy field surrounding the leaf is
attracted or drawn to the field which exists around the magnetic pole of
the compass needle.
Thus, for the first time in the history of man, these various research
projects have begun to provide insights suggesting that in some way
man’s energy fields might provide a clue for the understanding of the

Fig. 9. Interaction between energy field of magnetized compass needle

and freshly plucked plant leaf

19
 Anterior meridians Posterior meridians
Cranial meridians

Fig. 10. Acupuncture meridians

nature of consciousness. To a “dreamer” such as the author, there

comes a “hunch” that man’s invisible energy fields might ultimately
provide the key to solve the mystery of the survival of the human mind,
memory banks, personality and soul. The latter chapters of this book
will report on the extent to which this hunch has been verified.
When I talk about “energy fields”, you naturally ask, “What kind of
energy?” I will try to answer this question as nontechnically as possi-
ble. First, you should know that the physical body utilizes electricity.
The cells have the ability to generate electricity, using as fuel the food
we eat. Some of this electricity flows through a network of nerves just
as the electricity in your house or apartment flows through the electri-
cal wiring system. Second, there is a very subtle type of energy that the
Chinese discovered more than 3,000 years ago. It seems to flow pri-
marily on and near the surfaces of the body along what are called acu-
puncture meridians (Fig. 10). The Chinese made such drawings of
these energies centuries before the time of Christ.
Shortly after writing the above paragraphs, I was traveling in The
Peoples Republic of China. In the museum in Soochow I stood before a
large bronze figure of a man—taller than my six-foot-three frame—and
learned how two hundred years ago the medical students were trained
to insert acupuncture needles at the proper locations. A very small hole
had been drilled through the hollow bronze casting at the precise
location of each acupuncture point. The bronze figure was then

20
 covered with a thick wax and filled with water. A student instructed to
insert a needle for a particular malady would know he had not hit the
right place unless he was greeted by a spurt of water.
Traveling on to Nanking, I got dramatic proof of the efficacy of acu-
puncture when used as an anesthetic. A small group of which I was a
member visited the Nanking General Hospital. The general adminis-
trator, after giving us a talk on their use of acupuncture, took us on a
tour of the out-patient and recovery wards and four operating rooms.
Wearing surgical gowns and face masks, we proceeded to watch four
operations, all major, in which acupuncture was the only anesthetic. I
will describe one of these to give you a better understanding of the
reality of these energies which I am discussing and about which our
modern science knows very little.
The patient, a 40-year-old man, was being operated on for an
ulcerated stomach condition which had not responded to treatment. A
few hours before the operation he was given orally a very mild tranquil-
izer to ease the perfectly normal fear of the dangers which might lie
ahead once he was wheeled out of his room and into the operating room.
Upon arrival in the operating room, a nurse inserted three small
needles into the periphery of the patient’s left ear. Each needle had a
small wire extending to a nearby instrument—about the size of a small
tape recorder. This instrument supplied a six-volt direct current to each
needle. These three needles provided the only anesthetizing effect.
Extending up from the patient’s throat area was a cloth screen
about one foot square which prevented the patient from observing the
actions of the surgeons. However, we could see the patient’s face as
well as all the actions of the surgeons. With the hospital administrator
serving as translator, we were able to converse with the patient at all
stages of the operation.
The two surgeons, standing on each side of the operating table,
made the incision. Gradually they progressed to the point where they
took the patient’s stomach and lifted it up so that they could carefully
inspect it. The condition they found apparently warranted their
decision that it was necessary to remove fully sixty percent of the
stomach. This they did. Then they completed the many details and
closed the incision. At no time did the patient experience discomfort.
He apparently had no knowledge of what was going on.
One of our group was an American surgeon in his sixties. Knowing
nothing about the subtle and invisible energy systems and related
energy fields of the human body, he was totally mystified. I observed
him standing aside and through his face mask mutter, “Incredible. Ab-
solutely incredible! There is just no anatomical basis for this
nonsense”. How right he was! None of the present day medical texts
on anatomy discusses the invisible—but very real—energy systems such
as the acupuncture meridians.

21
 In the post-operative ward, we talked to patients who had had major
operations in the preceding days. Most of them—providing their
digestive tracts had not been operated on—were able to enjoy a full meal
a few hours after the operation. Within 24 hours most were able to get
out of bed and walk. Few needed to stay more than two or three days.
Further evidence on the new vistas opened for medical treatment
through a growing understanding of the invisible acupuncture meri-
dians and the part they play in the functioning of our bodies was given
when I stopped off in Tokyo to get up to date on the scientific research
of Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama, the parapsychologist and Shinto priest I
mentioned earlier. Dr. Motoyama has used his knowledge of acupunc-
ture to devise an electronic system for making a medical diagnosis of a
person in fifteen minutes that would otherwise take days of detailed
and costly hospital tests. These diagnostic machines are now in daily
use in 22 large hospitals in Japan.
While studying healers living in the rice fields of a northern part of
the Philippines, we were fortunate enough to capture on film a red-
orange stream of healing energy (Fig. 11). Josefina Sisson is just start-
ing to treat the eye of a patient who has come from the out-back area of
Australia. This momentary blast of healing energy was invisible to the
members of the five-man team of specialists we had with us, but it was
detected and recorded by the emulsions on the photographic film.
Ancient writings speak of still another type of energy as being

Fig. 11. Stream of healing energy

22
 Fig. 12. Diagram of chakra energy centers

involved in human life and have called it by names such as prana, od,
odic force, ki, baraka, etc. This subtle energy from the cosmos enters
the body through whirling energy vortexes known as chakras, located
roughly as indicated in Fig. 12. Only recently have an American scien-
tist, Itzhak Bentov of Boston, Massachusetts, and the Japanese scien-
tist, Dr. Motoyama, invented equipment which can prove that these
normally invisible energy centers actually do exist.
I have revised this edition of the book to include the foregoing com-
ments on acupuncture as they have a very direct bearing on our search
for evidence of life after death. Since no surgeon has ever opened the
body and found a soul, we have to assume that the soul is not of the
same material as the physical body and, if it exists, it must be invisible.
Since it is hard—almost impossible—for any of us to believe something
unless we can see it, we can sympathize with my surgeon friend who
could not even believe what he saw in the four operations, because in a
lifetime of surgical practice no one had taught him about the reality of
the energy fields of man.
As of now, no dependable means exists for photographing or
instrumentally detecting the subtle cosmic energies that activate and
flow through the chakra system—a very important part of your physical
body. On rare occasions the energies present in a very gifted psychic

23
person are so intense, so powerful, that they can affect the emulsion of
photographic film, as they did in Fig. 13.
This photo is of an American scientist, who wishes to remain anony-
mous, and his small son. The father and son are highly psychic, as is his
eight-year-old daughter, who snapped this extremely rare photo with a
simple instamatic-type camera with a built-in flash. It shows the energy
stream bursting upward from the crown chakra of the boy and blending
with the energy shooting upward from the father’s crown chakra.

Fig. 13. Head chakra energies

I have introduced you to the subject of these normally invisible and

hard-to-detect energy fields for a very important reason. Without such
knowledge you could not understand how it is that the most significant
parts of you—your mind, personality and soul—must survive the death of
your physical body.
I said in the opening pages that I would “keep it simple” and present
concepts largely through photos and diagrams. I feel sure that enough
has been presented to make it clear that the brain is not the mind, that the
mind(s) are energy fields, and that these normally invisible energy fields
shape, control and animate all matter.*
Now we are ready to face up to a seemingly preposterous statement.

We Live on Seven Levels and in Two Worlds

We have examined at some length the fantastically wonderful and
complicated physical body. We have discovered that it is largely empty

* For the technically-inclined reader, one of the most interesting scientific pieces of brain-
mind research is the development of the holographic model by K. Pribram and D. Bohm.
(See M. Ferguson, Brain-Mind Bulletin, July 4, 1977.) However, this new model does not
recognize that the mind is something distinct from the brain and will survive and function
normally long after the brain has returned to dust.

24
 space. We have learned that energy fields can and do penetrate the
physical body as though it were transparent and had little substance.
We have learned that the brain is not the mind. We have learned that
the body is electrically powered and that it also utilizes two other
anciently-postulated energy systems of which twentieth-century sci-
ence knows very little.
Hence it will not come as a great surprise that interpenetrating our
physical body there is another “body” made up of a large number of
energy fields, each of which collects and organizes cells into shapes or
organs precisely the same way the magnet in Fig. 7 organizes the
thousands of iron filings into a specific pattern.
In fact, there is an energy field for every major organ and bone in the
physical body, and these control all of the individual cells. They pro-
vide what we might call the intelligence which builds the organ in the
first place, provides it with the life force, keeps it running in harmony
with the other parts of the body, and repairs and maintains the organ or
bone.
For centuries occult literature has called this vast collection of
energy fields the “etheric body”. Western scientists have been very slow
to investigate this body because up to now it has been invisible and
could not be weighed. (Science is largely dependent on the ability to
observe and measure whatever it is that is being studied. Moreover,
most scientists have been conditioned to pay attention only to those
things which they measure and weigh and observe which fit in with
their expectations—i.e., within the framework of thought of contem-
porary science.) Russian scientists have been more ready than Western
scientists to undertake research on the etheric body of man. They have
become convinced of its reality and have coined their own name for it—
the bioplasmic body.
The physical body operates primarily on electricity. The bio-
plasmic body utilizes the energy systems which are involved in acu-
puncture meridians and the chakras.
But once we have started to take man apart and have found that he
is actually living on two levels of being, this is not the end of the matter.
There are actually five additional levels of being!
How can we possibly picture in our minds seven levels of being?
Well, we are certainly familiar with the physical body. Now that we
have learned that it is largely empty space, we can even imagine there is
another energy occupying the same space as the physical body. So,
since we can think of “bodies”, let us just imagine there are five
additional bodies. After all, when we look at an onion, we have no
trouble discerning that there are many layers making up that onion. Or
let us recall an experience most of us have had when we were purchas-
ing a new dress or a new suit of clothes. We put the garment on and
then stood between mirrors arranged so we could see over our shoulder

25
Fig. 14. Multiple image
(body) concept

in order to check the fit of the back of the garment. At the same time,
we could also see our image repeated several times, each image looking
a bit smaller and farther away behind our back. Note the arrangement
in Fig. 14—an extension of a common experience.
Our next step is to identify these levels of being.
We have already identified the physical body and its interpenetrat-
ing bioplasmic body. Then we come to the mind. From our earlier dis-
cussion of the mind, you will recall that long before the writings of Dr.
Sigmund Freud of Vienna, Austria, the American Plains Indians and
the Polynesians knew about and utilized their knowledge of the three
levels of mind.
Now it is quite appropriate for us to think of these three minds as
being three separate bodies. This is not as fanciful as it might seem.
Only in the last few years, it has been discovered that most of the many
millions of cells in the physical body have what the scientists call
“communication capability”. This means that the cells can receive and
send messages. We are also learning that the cells go beyond this func-

Fig. 15. Man’s multiple levels of being

26
tion; it is almost as though each cell has a mind of its own. Now we can
begin to understand that not only is “the brain not the mind”, but that
the mind function extends throughout the entire body.
Also it seems that since the beginnings of the human race almost all
religions on all continents have taught that man has a soul. Since we
need some means of creating a picture of the soul, let us use just one
more invisible body to represent the invisible soul.
But—and this is extremely important, as we will see shortly—nature
has put the soul and the levels of mind in a nice neat package. For the
last few centuries occult and esoteric literature has called this
“package” the “astral body”. So now let us put it all together and arrive
at Fig. 15.
As of now, our scientific instrumentation is such that we can detect
and measure energy relating directly to only the physical and the
bioplasmic bodies. The other so-called bodies or energy fields are
“invisible”, as indicated in Fig. 16. That is, we do not have instruments
that will measure them. Actually, this is not the serious barrier it might
appear to be. Modern physics includes many concepts that even today
are not confirmed by anything more solid than informed speculation.

Fig. 16. The invisible levels of being

Please note that in some of the diagrams I use the word “spirit” and
in some I use the word “soul”. I do this because for most readers the
terms are interchangeable. Properly speaking, however, the word
“spirit” distinguishes the nonphysical portions of our being from the
physical body, whereas “soul” relates to that individualized portion of
the Creator which resides in each of us. Indeed, the soul might be
defined as that individualized spark or portion of spirit energy which

27
originated in and emanated from what man has called The Creator,
God, The Godhead, Cosmic Consciousness, Universal Mind, etc., and
which manifested downward into the denser realms of spirit, where it
is involved in working, learning, loving and growing back to the Divine
source from which it came. The soul already resides in and will always
continue to reside in what I will later refer to as “the worlds of spirit”.
This concept of multiple bodies gives us a method of visualizing
how parts of the individual person—the real, the everlasting “I”—might
survive death. This is portrayed in Fig. 17.

INDESTRUCTIBLE
REALITY

THE REAL
THE EVERLASTING

‘|’

Fig. 17. The real, the everlasting “I”

If the minds and spirit or soul of the individual person are nonphysi-
cal, it is not such a strain on the imagination to conceive of this portion
surviving the death of the physical body. Recalling the brain-computer
analogy, the computer may be damaged or even destroyed, but the intelli-
gence that acted as programmer for the computer is still very much alive.

COMPUTER PROGRAMMER

PHYSICAL BIO-PLASMIC ASTRAL MIND SOUL

Fig. 18. The programmer of the electro-biochemical mechanism we call the physical body

28
 In Fig. 18, I have separated the two sets of bodies to help you
further visualize this process. This begins to suggest the mechanism by
which a good clairvoyant sees what, since Biblical times, has been
called “the silver cord” (marked by the letter “c” in the diagram). Litera-
ture is full of accounts of how a good clairvoyant observes the gradual
loosening and then the separating of the silvery energy cord as a person
is dying.
This multiple body analogy also begins to help parapsychologists
visualize how it is that while the physical body of a sensitive is relaxing
and lying peacefully in bed, his consciousness can travel far and des-
cribe scenes en route. In other words, this helps you to understand the
mechanism of the out-of-body experience, or OBE, to use parapsycho-
logical terminology. This is what has been known for thousands of
years in occult literature as astral travel. Notice particularly that term
“astral travel”. It is a marvelous clue to the reality of life after death.

Fig. 19. Figure 18 presented in a different form

Fig. 19 sums up these ideas in a slightly different way. Just as the

skin covers all of the internal organs and skeleton of our physical body,
the astral body functions as a skin or covering for the three levels of
mind and soul. It contains them and makes a unit of them. This
package or bundle is the real you. It contains the more enduring parts
of your memory banks, your emotional patterns, your personality and
your soul.
This is the “programmer”, of which I wrote earlier.
It is connected to and works through your physical brain—that
quart or so of water which is your personal computer.
It is still “material”, but not in the sense of matter as you know it. It

29
is of such a fine, rapidly vibrating energy that it is similar to what you
think of as light rays.
Normally it stays well within the confines of the physical and bio-
plasmic bodies. But at night when you are in deep sleep, it can leave
your body and travel. During life in the physical body, it always
remains connected to your physical body by an invisible elastic web-
like “wiring harness” that is attached to the brain—the so-called silver
cord.
Now, just as we have bodies interpenetrating each other, some
scientists tell us that we can have interpenetrating worlds. (The term
they prefer is “space-time systems”.) But for our purposes in discussing
life after death, let’s just say there is an astral world that occupies the
same space as our physical world. And—wonder of wonders—our
physical body lives in the physical world while our astral body lives and
functions in the interpenetrating astral world.
In Part III, you will see how this knowledge of the astral world
makes it very easy to explore the mystery of life after death.

30
 CHAPTER 3

All Packed and Ready To Fly!

Perhaps your mind is still reeling from all the theories about seven
bodies and the statement that you live in two worlds at the same time.
With so many problems and so much strife, all of us frequently feel like
the person who called out, “Stop the world, I want to get off”. But it
really isn’t so complicated as it might first seem. We now have pro-
gressed to the point where we can think in terms of:
the the the the
physical (plus) bioplasmic (plus) astral (containing) levels of
body body body mind and soul

Perhaps it will help to recall how as a child you took scissors, folded
a sheet of paper back and forth on itself three times and then cut out a
paper doll. Now that you are older and a bit more creative, it is no prob-
lem for you to cut out dolls and label them as I’ve done in Fig. 20.

YOU

MIND(S) SOUL

PHYSICAL BIOPLASMIC ASTRAL

Fig. 20. Figure 18 presented in a different form

When we are born, we are all “folded” into one nice neat package.
As we progress through life we continue to stay largely within the con-
fines of the physical body, the package which also contains our bio-
plasmic and astral bodies. But every man, woman and child on the
planet shares the same fate. At some time the package breaks open. At
some time, sooner or later, the physical body reaches the end of its use-
fulness. From illness, violent accident, suicide, homicide, death in war,
or just plain old age, our physical body becomes inoperative. It dies.
What happens to the bioplasmic body when the physical body dies?
Well, that body also dies. But usually it stays around for just a little

31
while, sometimes only for a few hours. In the majority of cases, it will
have disintegrated completely within three days. It is reabsorbed into
the great cosmic supply of the energies, normally invisible to people,
which activated the acupuncture and chakra systems. The etheric body
has served its purpose of molding matter into the many organs used to
form the physical body and served to channel the cosmic energies
which were required to keep the body operational.
And what happens to the astral body? Aha! This is the crucial ques-
tion. It is completely alive and functional after the death of both the
physical body and the etheric body. It continues to live in the same
“second world” in which it has always lived—the astral world which
completely interpenetrates and occupies the same space that the
physical world does. This is symbolically portrayed in Fig. 21.

PHYSICAL BIOPLASMIC ASTRAL

Fig. 21. Symbolic survival of bodily death

This individual astral body contains all of the memory banks, emo-
tional patterns, personality and soul that it had before it departed from
the physical body. These are all neatly contained in one “package”.
When you someday find yourself without your physical body, you will
find that your personal baggage is all neatly packed and that you—like
the butterfly—are ready to fly. You have left behind your caterpillar-like
body. Unlike the caterpillar, you need not waste time spinning a
cocoon. There is no need for you to spend a season or two before you
can split your cocoon and emerge as a beautiful creature ready to enter
on flights of exploration. In making man, our Creator surpassed even
His handiwork in making the caterpillar and butterfly.
You are all packed and ready to fly!

32
 Summary of Part I

If this were the conventional “how to” book, this space would
contain a list of the 10 most important points brought out in these three
short chapters. Actually, these chapters are so short that you can
review and summarize them by glancing at the subheadings in each.
I will merely point out that we have faced up to and suggested
possible answers to these two questions:
How can anyone answer my questions about life after death when
medical science has not even proved that man has a mind or spirit?
Since medical science has not proved that the brain is anything more
than a collection of perishable cells (which are 80 percent water), how can
my mind possibly survive death of my physical body?
As a welcome change from all of the serious and semi-technical
jargon in these three chapters—and with a promise that I will not return
to such investigations in the remainder of this book—consider the poem
on the following page. It provides a whimsical summary in poetic
language.

33
 A Butterfly
by G. Eustace Owen

A butterfly rested upon a flower,

Gay was he and light as a flake.
And there he met a caterpillar
Sobbing as though his heart would break;
It hurt the happy butterfly
To see a caterpillar cry.
Said he, “Whatever is the matter?”
And may I help in any way?”
“I’ve lost my brother”, wept the other,
“He’s been unwell for many a day;
Now I discover, sad to tell,
He’s only a dead and empty shell”.
“Unhappy grub, be done with weeping,
Your sickly brother is not dead;
His body’s stronger and no longer
Crawls like a worm, but flies instead.
He dances through the sunny hours
And drinks sweet nectar from the flowers”.
“Away, away deceitful villain.
Go to the winds where you belong.
I won’t be grieving at your leaving,
So take away your lying tongue.
Am I a foolish slug or snail,
To swallow such a fairy tale?”
“I’ll prove my words, you unbeliever.
Now listen well, and look at me.
I am none other than your brother,
Alive and well and fancy free.
Soon you’ll be with me in the skies
Among the flirting butterflies”.
“Ah!” cried the mournful caterpillar.
“’Tis clear I must be seeing things.
You’re only a spectre sipping nectar,
Flicking your ornamental wings,
And talking nonsense by the yard.
I will not hear another word”.
The butterfly gave up the struggle.
“I have”, he said, “no more to say”.
He spread his splendid wings and ascended
Into the air and flew away.
And while he fluttered far and wide,
The caterpillar sat and cried.

34
 PART TWO

What Evidence of Survival Is There?

 Foreword

For the past 6,000 years, most religions have promulgated the
conventional belief in immortality. However, their leaders have done
very little to convert faith and belief into actual knowledge of the cer-
tainty of life after death.
Now, for the first time in human evolution, the picture begins to take
full and comprehensive shape, for as man approaches the end of the
twentieth century, pieces of the puzzle suddenly begin to fall into place.
In Part II, we will identify and examine eleven of the most fascinating
types of evidence.
We have considered the wonder of the caterpillar which becomes a
gorgeous butterfly. Easily we regard the human being as an even more
fantastically marvelous creature which may be designed by our Creator
to survive death, decay and dissolution of its purely temporary physical
body.
Reports of rapidly emerging knowledge about the multidimensional
nature of man further strengthened the basis for belief in life after
death. But one may still ask, “Is there factual evidence that we will be
alive after shedding the caterpillar body?”
Were you to undertake your own search for actual proof, the obvi-
ous approach would be to determine what has already been written on
the subject. You would soon discover that there are many books about
it. Very good collections are in England, where you could find 10,000 to
30,000 volumes in each of five libraries. In the United States, three
psychical research libraries list more than 100,000 books related to the
subject.
Some of the most meaningful material, however, is found only in
technical journals of many branches of science—particularly physics,
microbiology, the neurophysiology of the brain, paraphysics, and para-
psychology. Unfortunately, many of the authors of these do not have a
broad enough knowledge in other scientific fields, or in religion and
metaphysical and occult lore, to understand fully the significance of
their own findings as they might relate to survival.
To make it still more complicated, some of the most interesting
research work being done is not yet in print.
In this section we assemble factual evidence from these wide-rang-
ing sources.

36
 CHAPTER 4

Historical and Religious Writings

Survival Evidence—Area 1 of 11

“Bury—bury me just where you please if you can only catch me. Have
I not often told you and the wise men that this body is not Socrates?”

We begin with what has already been written. Carl Wickland,

M.D., in the monumental research work reported in his book, Thirty
Years Among the Dead, provides a good summation:
“Fiske, the historian, says: ‘Among all races of men, as far as can
now be determined, ancestor worship (contact with the spirits of the
departed) was the earliest form of worship,...prevailing in Africa,
China, Japan, among the Aryans of Europe and the American Indian
tribes’.
“Allen, in his History of Civilization, writes: ‘Rude tribes the world
over are found to have ideas of a human soul, a spirit world, and gener-
ally a belief in immortality. Savages consider the next life simply a con-
tinuation of this; they also recognize another self which has mysterious
powers. Death is the abandoning of the body by this mysterious other
self, which is conceived of as still existing in the near neighborhood.
The loves and hates of this world are transferred to the spirit world’.
“Confucius said: ‘Bemoan not the departed with excessive grief. The
dead are devoted and faithful friends; they are ever associated with us’.
“The writers of classic times—Socrates, Herodotus, Sophocles,
Euripides, Plato, Aristotle, Horace, Virgil, Plutarch, Josephus, Maximus
of Tyre—repeatedly refer to spirit existence as a well-known fact. Cicero
wrote: ‘Is not almost all heaven filled with the human? Those very gods
themselves had their origin here below, and ascended from hence into
heaven’.
“Early Christianity’s recognition of spirits is too well authenticated
in the writings of St. Anthony, Tertullian, Origen and their contempo-
raries to require emphasis.
“The Bible is replete with references to spirit existence. ‘We also are
compassed about with so great a cloud of witnesses’. Heb. 12:1. ‘Beloved,
believe not every spirit, but try the spirits, whether they are of God’. 1
John 4:1. ‘The spirits of just men made perfect’. Heb. 12:23. ‘There is a
natural body and there is a spiritual body...First that which is natural,
and afterward that which is spiritual’. 1 Cor. 15:44, 46. Many other simi-
lar Biblical citations might be given.

37
 “Swedenborg contributed volumes on this subject. Dr. Samuel John-
son said: ‘I do not believe in spirits—I have seen too many of them’.
“Shakespeare, Milton, Wordsworth, Tennyson, Longfellow, and
many other poets write with profound understanding of the continued
existence of man.
“We are all familiar with the convincing results of the psychical
research work of modern scientists, philosophers, ministers, physicians,
psychologists and other investigators—Prof. Crookes, Alfred Wallace,
Sir Oliver Lodge, Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, Rev. R.J. Campbell, Archdea-
con Colley, Rev. Newton, Rev. Savage, W.T. Stead, Camille Flammarion,
Dr. Baraduc, Dr. Janet, Prof. Richet, Cesare Lombroso, Dr. Hodgson, Dr.
I.K. Funk, Prof. James, Prof. Hyslop, Dr. Carrington and many others.
“Dr. Thomas J. Hudson, author of The Law of Psychic Phenomena,
wrote: ‘The man who denies the phenomena of spiritualism today is not
entitled to be called a skeptic; he is simply ignorant’.
“The Rev. Dr. George M. Searle, rector of the Catholic Church of St.
Paul the Apostle, New York City, said: ‘The reality of the existence of
spirits in modern spiritism is no longer an open question, even among
scientific men who have examined the subject. Anyone who considers
the manifestation of them as mere humbug, trickery or delusion is
simply not up to date’.
“‘In our times no one denies the real existence of spiritualistic
facts, except a few who live with their feet on the earth and their brains
in the moon’, wrote G.G. Franco, S.J., in Civilta Cattolica. ‘Spiritualistic
phenomena are external facts which fall within the range of the senses
and can easily be observed by all, and then such facts are attested by so
many well informed and credible witnesses, it is useless, as well as
foolish and ridiculous, to fight against proved evidence. The facts
remain assured, even for reasonable men’”.
However, even if I gave page after page of such historical and Bibli-
cal quotations, it would not prove survival. All I endeavor to show in
this chapter is that for thousands of years there has been, around the
globe, a common thread of belief in both spirits and an afterlife. It
would be prudent to assume that where there is so much smoke there
may also be fire.

38
 CHAPTER 5

Deathbed, Near-Death, and Out-of-Body Experiences

Survival Evidence—Area 2 of 11

Much of the search for evidence that one’s mind, personality and
soul survive death of the physical body is to be found in death-bed,
near-death and out-of-body experiences.
The past few years have seen books on these subjects become over-
night bestsellers. On Death and Dying, by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, M.D.,
and Life After Life, by Raymond Moody, M.D., have each sold more
than 3,000,000 copies and have each been translated into more than 25
languages, while subsequent books by these and other authors have also
received acceptance throughout the world. Their popularity testifies to
a thirst for knowledge that reassures there is a life after death.
One might think that the above activities represent a completely
new area for research, but this is not the case. The references in the
Appendix show that writing on these subjects started more than 100
years ago. During this past century, many persons labored to add to the
great body of knowledge which now fully supports and substantiates
the work set forth in the above-mentioned bestsellers. In fact, it is most
significant that Dr. Moody and Dr. Kübler-Ross had very little
knowledge of the work of prior researchers. The fact that their work
dovetails so precisely with the findings of Cobb, Crookall, Savage,
Hyslop, Richet and others serves to add great significance to this area
of survival research.
By comparison, the purpose of this book is to supply the reader with
new knowledge of what actually happens in life after death.
Because of the ready availability of books on deathbed and near-
death experiences, I will not make an in-depth report on them. I will,
however, briefly review the subject. Then I will do something that has
been widely overlooked. I will relate these experiences, particularly
near-death ones, to the rapidly-increasing findings of researchers work-
ing with out-of-body experiences.
First, let’s define our terms.
Deathbed Cases: Observations by medical people and psychical
researchers of what a dying person reports in the moments before death
of the physical body. Often these reports include visions of deceased
loved ones, religious figures and afterlife scenes.
Near-Death Cases: The subjective reports of persons who, through
illness or accident, nearly died or who clinically died and were revived.

39
 Out-of-Body Experiences: Experiences in which the consciousness
of a person seems to get outside that person’s physical body. This con-
sciousness then reports what it sees, hears, and does, and where it
travels during the time when it is seemingly displaced from its physical
body.

The Deathbed Experience

One of the most extensive pieces of research yet done on the death-
bed “visions” was published in 1961 by Dr. Karlis Osis—a lengthy
monograph, Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses. Dr. Osis
sought the experiences of 10,000 American physicians and nurses. An
analysis was made of the detailed reports of 640 respondents. A high
proportion of these had witnessed their patients’ reactions to and
reports of unseen deathbed visitors. Dr. Osis drew these major con-
clusions:
1. The dying often go into inexplicable exaltation before death.
2. They see visions of apparitions to a much greater extent than per-
sons who are not approaching death.
3. Usually, these apparitions are of persons who have died. How-
ever, visions of living or religious personages are occasionally seen.
4. Drugs or other aspects of illness seemingly do not account for
these visions.
5. Many of the dying persons intuitively realize that these appari-
tions are coming to take them into death and a continued existence.
In 1977, Dr. Osis and a colleague, Dr. Erlendur Haraldsson, pub-
lished At the Hour of Death. This book extended the above studies and
included reports of experiences of more than 1,000 additional doctors
and nurses. Significantly, this work was based on the experiences of
persons dying in India as well as in the United States. The deathbed
visions were very similar in spite of racial, cultural and religious differ-
ences.
These scholarly and scientific studies in turn have been found to
correlate very well with the pioneering work done over a period of 30
years and reported in the several works of Dr. Robert Crookall of
England.

Near-Death Experiences
Please recall that in Fig. 19 in Part I, the nonphysical part of a per-
son was shown separately, outside of the physical body but attached
diagrammatic ally with a tenuous connection known since early Bibli-
cal days as the silver cord.
This ability of the mind, personality and soul to detach itself from
the physical body should be kept in mind in reading through this short
selection of excerpts of near-death cases reported by Dr. Moody in Life
After Life:

40
 “A woman recalls, ‘About a year ago, I was admitted to the hospital
with heart trouble, and the next morning, lying in the hospital bed, I
began to have a very severe pain in my chest. I pushed the button
beside the bed to call for the nurses, and they came in and started
working on me. I was quite uncomfortable lying on my back so I turned
over, and as I did I quit breathing and my heart stopped beating. Just
then, I heard the nurses shout, “Code pink! Code pink!” As they were
saying this, I could feel myself moving out of my body and sliding down
between the mattress and the rail on the side of the bed—actually it
seemed as if I went through the rail—on down to the floor. Then, I
started rising upward, slowly. On my way up, I saw more nurses come
running into the room—there must have been a dozen of them. My
doctor happened to be making his rounds in the hospital so they called
him and I saw him come in, too. I thought, “I wonder what he’s doing
here”. I drifted on up past the light fixture—I saw it from the side and
very distinctly—and then I stopped, floating right below the ceiling,
looking down. I felt almost as though I were a piece of paper that some-
one had blown up to the ceiling.
“‘I watched them reviving me from up there! My body was lying
down there stretched out on the bed, in plain view, and they were all
standing around it. I heard one nurse say, “Oh, my God! She’s gone”,
while another one leaned down to give me mouth-to-mouth resuscita-
tion. I was looking at the back of her head while she did this. I’ll never
forget the way her hair looked; it was cut kind of short. Just then, I saw
them roll this machine in there, and they put the shocks on my chest.
When they did, I saw my whole body just jump right up off the bed, and
I heard every bone in my body crack and pop. It was the most awful
thing!
“‘As I saw them below beating on my chest and rubbing my arms
and legs, I thought, “Why are they going to so much trouble? I’m just
fine now’”.

“‘Boy, I sure didn’t realize that I looked like that! You know, I’m
only used to seeing myself in pictures or from the front in a mirror, and
both of those look flat. But all of a sudden, there I—or my body—was,
and I could see it. I could definitely see it, full view, from about five feet
away. It took me a few moments to recognize myself’.

“‘I could see my own body all tangled up in the car amongst all the
people who had gathered around, but, you know, I had no feelings for it
whatsoever. It was like it was a completely different human, or maybe
even just an object....! knew it was my body but I had no feelings for it’.

“‘After it was all over, the doctor told me that I had a really bad
time, and I said, “Yeah, I know”. He said, “Well, how do you know?”

41
and I said, “I can tell you everything that happened”. He didn’t believe
me, so I told him the whole story, from the time I stopped breathing
until the time I was kind of coming around. He was really shocked to
know that I knew everything that had, happened. He didn’t know quite
what to say, but he came in several times to ask me different things
about it’.

“‘This is sort of funny, I know, but in nursing school they had tried
to drill it into us that we ought to donate our bodies to science. Well, all
through this, as I watched them trying to start my breathing again, I
kept thinking, “I don’t want them to use that body as a cadaver”. ’”

Out-of-Body Travel
In the foregoing paragraphs we have been considering out-of-body
awareness only in relation to the experiences of persons who have
come close to dying but recovered sufficiently to be able to describe
their short out-of-body sojourns. Even better evidence of the ability of
the mind, personality and soul to leave its physical cloak or overcoat
has been given in recent years by persons who develop the ability to
leave their bodies whenever they so desire.
One of the most accomplished out-of-body “travelers” is Robert
Monroe, a former radio and television broadcasting executive and elec-
tronic engineer. In his book Journeys Out of the Body, he tells how he
developed the ability, and of his actual experiences with out-of-body
travel over a 20-year period.
Monroe is now teaching this ability to small groups of people
throughout the United States. Several years ago, I spent ten days at a
lovely ranch in Montana where Monroe conducted training sessions,
during which he acquainted fifty people with the basics of the tech-
nique. In the year following this indoctrination workshop, approxi-
mately twenty percent of the people learned to leave their bodies at
will. To show the reality of this activity, consider this example from
Monroe’s personal experiences:
One Saturday in 1963 when Bob Monroe was 55 years old, he
decided to see if he could contact a woman friend of the family who had
gone someplace on vacation—but he did not know where. He lay
down, relaxed, and left his body. He traveled until he found himself in
the kitchen of a beach cottage where his friend was sitting, talking with
two teenage girls. He tried to “communicate” with her but had no suc-
cess. He decided to give her a pinch on her right leg. She suddenly
jumped up in surprise. A week later when they met, he asked her if she
had felt anything at the time the incident took place. She exclaimed in
surprise, pulled her dress just above the knee and showed a discolored
spot and said, “Don’t you ever try that trick again without giving me
warning!” The description of the kitchen, the teenage girls and many

42
 other details which he had written down upon returning to his body
agreed precisely with what the woman was able to report.
The parapsychology literature is now full of reports of scientific
research dealing with this new awareness of the mind’s ability to leave
temporarily its physical habitat. No distance limitation on such travel
has yet been observed. Subjects at Stanford Research Institute report
back from their travels around the state of California. The Russians are
reported to have developed these remote viewing abilities for purposes
of military surveillance. Experimenters have even “traveled” to the
back side of the moon and recorded their observations, which were
later confirmed by American and Russian astronauts who made investi-
gations.
It should be obvious that if the mind, personality and soul can take
leave of the physical body and function in space adjacent to or far away
from the body without losing consciousness, then it can remain outside
of the body when the body decays in death, since it is obviously
independent of the body.

43
 The materialized forms of clothed human bodies that I will discuss
in Chapter 11 are actually examples of solid ghosts. One of the finest
pieces of research in the field is the seven years of work presented in
Ghosts in Solid Form by Gambier Bolton. This small book summarizes
the official records of three research societies in London early in this
century. It reports on the questions and answers exchanged with the
solid ghosts. Here is an example of such verbal exchanges:
“Dr. A.C.: From your appearance, and the firmness of your arms,
hands, and bust, I assume that you are at this moment fully material-
ized. Please show us your lower limbs, so as to convince us of this fact.
“Ghost: No, Doctor, I cannot do that now, but if you will give me
time to return to ‘Florrie’ (the sensitive) for two minutes, I will get more
power, and will then gladly do so.
“She returned to the spot where the sensitive was seated on her
chair in a state of deep trance; and in less than two minutes she once
again walked into our midst, and, lifting up her white draperies,
showed us her legs bared from the knees downwards. She then placed
one of her feet upon Dr. A.C’.s knee, and permitted him to touch both
her leg and foot, in order to prove to him and to us that she was fully
materialized in every respect.
“Dr. A.C.: How is that you had no lower limbs three minutes ago,
and were obliged to return to the sensitive before you could obtain them?
“Ghost: Doctor, when we come to you people on earth in this way,
our great desire is that we may be recognized first by our voices, then by
our faces. That is why so many of us materialize only the head, throat,
arms, and hands, and the upper portion of our bodies. That is quite
enough for you to identify us by, as a rule, and in doing this we are able
to save “the power” for the use of other entities who may wish to
materialize as soon as we have finished. Tonight there is any amount of
“power” here, as you seven men are all in such good health; and as only
two of us intend to use it, I am able to show myself to you fully
materialized from head to foot, just as my predecessor “Katie” used to
do, through this very sensitive, to Sir William Crookes. But you may
take it from me as a fact that full-form materializations in this country
are rare, for the reason which I have stated; the vast majority being
partial manifestations only”.
More recently, the owner of a rented house in Huntsville, Alabama,
was growing frustrated because his tenants were so disturbed by
“unseen” visitors that after a month or two of such unnerving experi-
ences, they would decide to move. After the third tenant vacated the
property, the owner enlisted the help of Joe Gambill, a local man who
was reported to be able to talk with ghosts and persuade them to cease
activities such as opening and closing doors, causing items to fall from
the shelves, making strange noises and giving the feel of chill air at the
moment the ghost passed one’s person.

45
 Joe, who held a very responsible position in a U.S. government
research activity, had a highly developed psychic sensitivity in which
his clairaudient ability permitted him to hear the words spoken by a
ghost. However, he did not have sufficient clairvoyant ability to see the
ghost. Hence he expended a great deal of photographic film trying to
capture with the camera what he was unable to see. After wasting
much film, he decided to use his highly-sensitive dowsing ability to help
him locate the ghost so that he could point his camera toward the area
in the room where the ghost was located.
Late One evening, he went to the now-vacated house and quickly got
into conversation with the ghost. The ghost readily explained that he
had been killed in a fire that destroyed a house that had stood on this
site some 30 years previous to the erection of the present one. He was
now completely lost and frustrated. At this point, Joe used his dowsing
rods and located the position of the ghost. He dropped his dowsing
rods, raised his camera, pointed it in the direction indicated, and
snapped the shutter. The resulting photograph is shown in Fig. 22. Joe
then explained to the ghost about his present situation and gave instruc-
tions as to the steps he should take to “move into the light” and get on
with the many opportunities which his new life in the world of spirit
could provide.

Fig. 22. Photograph of a live ghost

46
 CHAPTER 6

Apparitions, Hauntings and Ghosts

Survival Evidence—Area 3 of 11

Since the beginning of recorded history, people in all parts of the

world have reported apparitions, hauntings and ghosts. To what
extent, if any, does this throw light on the survival question?
There is considerable overlapping of these terms in many people’s
minds, so I will clarify them here. Webster’s Third New International
Dictionary defines apparition as “the unexpected or supernormal
appearance of someone living or dead”. It is obviously unnecessary to
consider living apparitions; those of the dead will be included in my
references to ghosts.
The term haunting is defined as “an act of frequenting, especially by
a disembodied spirit”. Here we come a bit closer to the survival ques-
tion. Centuries of reports of hauntings establish two essential elements
in the phenomenon: an old house or dwelling place of some kind, and
the restlessness of a human spirit. The first represents an unbroken
link with the past life of a former occupant. The second is believed to
be caused by various factors. These include the person’s remorse over
an evil life, his shock at a violent death, important unfinished business
in the physical world, excessive attachment to material life, or the
failure to realize that he has “died” and is now living in another realm.
Such hauntings provide many types of activity. Strange noises are
heard, objects are displaced, lights are seen where none exist, existing
lights are turned on and off, and objects are moved about. An actual
temperature drop may be felt in the atmosphere. Sometimes an unbear-
able stench is detected, and often people on the premises experience a
feeling of discomfort or even horror. They sometimes report seeing
insubstantial shapes, phantoms, apparitions or ghosts.
What are ghosts? Webster’s dictionary tells us that a ghost is “a dis-
embodied soul; the soul of a dead person believed to be the inhabitant of
the unseen world, or to appear to be living in bodily likeness”. A dis-
embodied soul, inhabiting an unseen world. Yes, these certainly relate
to the question of survival. At least this gives us indication that perhaps
there is a soul and perhaps it can leave the physical body at death. So
that brings us face to face with ghosts. Are ghosts real?
There is ample—and increasing—evidence that they are. The evi-
dence falls into two basic categories—what might be called “solid
ghosts” and “vaporous, shadowy, indistinct or even invisible ghosts”.

44
 While to the uninitiated, the ghost may look like just an oddly
shaped white cloud of steam or vapor, it correlates well with our scien-
tific studies: the two floppy and folded appendages are the two streams
of energy that project cyclically from the mind, and the white spike at
the top relates to the emanations from the crown chakra at the top of
the energy field that makes up the mind, memory banks and soul.
Even from this very short review of the subject, it is obvious that
apparitions, hauntings and ghosts make a valuable contribution to the
research findings relating to the continuity of individual life.

47
 CHAPTER 7

Obsession and Spirits

Survival Evidence—Area 4 of 11

This is one of the areas that provides some of the best evidence of
survival. Literature for thousands of years has clearly reported the
existence of obsession and possession.
To assure that we are all in accord with the usage of these terms,
let’s refer to Webster’s Third New International Dictionary. I have
emphasized parts of the definitions:
Obsession: 1. Siege; 2. The act of a devil or spirit in besetting a
person, or impelling him to actions from without.
Possession: The condition of being dominated by something (as an
extraneous personality, demon, passion, idea), a psychological state in
which one’s normal personality is replaced by another.
Thus, by commonly accepted definition, a spirit can obsess a living
person. The person is then in the condition of being possessed.
As we saw in Part I, the departure of one’s mind and soul from the
body at death on some occasions occurs so naturally and smoothly that it
is quite common for a person at first to be unaware of what has just
transpired. Many persons, particularly those having no knowledge
whatever of spiritual life, are totally unconscious of having passed into
another state of being. However, no longer having the physical sense
organs, they find their eyesight is “turned off”. Lacking any compre-
hension of the nature and purpose of their existence, they are spiritually
blind. The Bible calls this zone the “outer darkness”. They actually are in
a realm—a very real world of spirit—which we today refer to as the astral.
The astral realm, as we will discuss in much greater detail later, is
made up of various levels. Upon shedding the physical body, a person
will normally awaken within three days on that astral level for which his
recent earth life has qualified him.
The lowest of these astral levels, zones, or planes interpenetrates
the earth and occupies the same region in which we live! Recall that in
Part I we learned that modern science has shown that our senses have
fooled us as to how “hard” and “solid” this world is. Actually, even our
physical bodies were found to be 99.99999 plus percent empty space.
So just lay aside for the moment your unbelief that a departed spirit can
occupy the same space you occupy. In fact, you can now well under-
stand how many departed spirits can occupy the body of just one living
person!

48
 It has been observed that death does not make a saint of a sinner,
nor a sage of a fool. The individual carries over all of the old beliefs, the
old habits, the old desires and all of his faulty teachings and religious
dogmas. Those who believe that there is no afterlife are not at all
prepared for what they find. (Later I will discuss in detail what hap-
pens to those who find themselves arriving on the higher astral planes.
Here in this examination of obsession and possession, we are con-
cerned only with those who because of their deeds—and
misdeeds—have arrived on the lowest astral plane.)
Those departing souls who arrive on the lowest of the astral planes
find that they lack physical bodies and are bewildered by the almost
total darkness that seems to surround them. Some may be attracted by
the “magnetic” energy field that emanates from nearby mortals and is
seen clairvoyantly as “light”. (These mortals might even be the friends
and relatives attending the funeral of the deceased!) Consciously or
unconsciously, a few of these attach themselves to the “magnetic” auras
of those still in the flesh, thereby finding an avenue of expression by
obsessing human beings. In such cases they will influence the pos-
sessed person with their own thoughts, imparting their own emotions
and weakening the will power of the possessed person. In some cases,
this “takeover” can be so complete that they will actually control the
possessed person’s actions and often produce great distress, mental
confusion and suffering.
This is a fact of life almost totally unrecognized by present-day
psychiatry. These earthbound souls are the supposed “devils” of all
recorded history. They are of human origin—the direct result of lives
filled with human selfishness, lives warped by false teachings and
ignorance, and lives thrust blindly into a very real type of “hell” or
“purgatory”, in bondage to ignorance. We can also be possessed by
nonhuman devils—by elementary spirits or so-called elementals and by
devilish thought-forms—but these phenomena are somewhat different.
For some, references to obsession and possession must have an air
of unreality. Therefore, let’s go back over recorded history so that it can
be understood that I am not trying to introduce some new and untested
ideas in this search for evidence of survival. Here are just a few items
to be found on the pages of history over the last 2,000 years:
Homer referred repeatedly to demons and said: “A sick man pining
away is one upon whom an evil spirit has gazed”. Plato held that
demons obsessed mortals. Socrates speaks directly of demons influ-
encing the possessed (the insane). Plutarch wrote: “Certain tyrannical
demons require for their enjoyment some soul still incarnate; being
unable to satisfy their passions in any other way, incite to sedition, lust,
wars of conquest, and thus get what they lust for”. Josephus says:
“Demons are the spirits of wicked men”.
Obsessing or possessing spirits are frequently mentioned both in

49
 the Old and New Testaments. In I Samuel 16:23, we read: “David took
an harp, and played with his hand: so Saul was refreshed, and was well,
and the evil spirit departed from him”.
So common was knowledge of spirits and spirit obsession in the
time of the apostles that the ability to cast out evil spirits was
considered one of the most important signs of genuine discipleship,
and it must be admitted that a considerable portion of the work
accredited to Jesus was the casting out of demons.
A few quotations from the New Testament will suffice. “Jesus gave
his twelve disciples power against unclean spirits, to cast them out”.
Matt. 10:1. “Jesus preached...and cast out devils”. Mark 1:39. “A cer-
tain man which had devils a long time...Jesus had commanded the un-
clean spirit to come out of the man...He that was possessed of the devils
was healed”. Luke 8:27, 29, 36. “Vexed with unclean spirits”. Luke
6:18. “The evil spirits went out of them”. Acts 19:12.
“Master, I have brought unto thee my son, which hath a dumb
spirit....And He asked his father: How long is it ago since this came
unto him? And he said, Of a child....Jesus rebuked the foul spirit, saying
unto him, Thou deaf and dumb spirit, I charge thee, come out of him,
and enter no more into him. And the spirit cried, and rent him sore,
and came out of him: and he was as one dead; insomuch that many
said, He is dead. But Jesus took him by the hand, and lifted him up; and
he arose”. Mark 9:17, 21, 25-27. Similar occurrences, labeled
“psychopathological”, are not at all uncommon in psychiatric research.
Tertullian with authority challenged the heathen to a trial of super-
iority in the matter of casting out demons. Minucius Felix, a Roman,
wrote in Octavius: “There are some insincere and vagrant spirits,
degraded from their heavenly vigor...who cease not, now that they are
ruined themselves, to ruin others”.
More recently, Dr. Godfrey Raupert of London, who was especially
delegated by Pope Pius X to lecture on spiritism to Catholic audiences
in America, said in substance: “It is no longer possible to put the subject
of psychic phenomena aside. The scientific men all over the world
have recognized spiritism as a definite and real power, and to shelve it
is a dangerous policy. Consequently the Pope has asked me to tell
Catholics the attitude to take toward the subject....The Church admits
the reality of these spiritistic phenomena and their external intelli-
gences, in fact, it has always admitted their reality. The problem at
present is to discover the nature of the intelligence. We are now on the
borderland of new discoveries which may revolutionize the world. It is
not the time yet for an explanation of all the phenomena. We must sus-
pend our judgment until the subject is better known. The study of
spiritism is a new one and therefore dangerous....A partial knowledge
of the subject may cause grave dangers (resulting in obsession or pos-
session)”.

50
 Julian Hawthorne wrote in one of the leading American news-
papers: “Thousands of evil-minded and evil-acting men and women die
every day. What becomes of their souls or spirits? They want to get
back here....The increasing boldness and frequency with which they
take advantage of their opportunities is illustrated in many ways....Two
acts of defense are open to us. We may stop the source of supply of
these undesirable visitors and we may close the doors”.
Surely any reasonable person will find that the foregoing historical
review documents the reality of obsession and possession. But most of
us like to go from the general to the specific. Let us consider first one of
Dr. Wickland’s cases which he reported in Thirty Years Among the
Dead, and then a case in which I was personally involved.
Mrs. Wickland was a superb deep trance medium. Dr. Wickland
would place a mentally disturbed patient in a chair beside his wife.
Mrs. Wickland would go into trance, making her vocal cords available
for use by the obsessing entity. Dr. Wickland would then carry on a
conversation with the invader, gradually enlightening it as to where it
was and convincing it to depart—usually in the company of some
helpful spirits summoned for that purpose.
If this procedure seems strange and hard to believe, let me report
my personal contact with the Wickland work, although I never met
them personally. When Mrs. Wickland died, Dr. Wickland could not
find another medium in the United States who could function in the
same way. He went to England in 1932 to see if he could locate such a
medium there. He found that Mrs. Bertha Harris could function just as
efficiently as had Mrs. Wickland. Dr. Wickland and Mrs. Harris spent
five days working with mental patients in one of London’s hospitals. A
large percentage of these patients were promptly enabled to leave the
hospital. I personally conducted research for many months into Mrs.
Harris’ psychic abilities. I reported on a portion of this work in the last
half of my book, From Seance to Science.
The following case history provided by Dr. Wickland demonstrates
several of the issues of dying we have been discussing, including
possession:
“Mrs. Wickland became entranced and fell to the floor, the spirit
clutching at her throat and crying: ‘Take the rope away! I am in the
dark. Why did I do it? Oh, why did I do it?’
“When the excited spirit had been somewhat quieted, she told that
her name was Minnie Harmening, that she was a young girl and had
lived on a farm near Palatine. As she was speaking brokenly, between
sobs, it was difficult to distinguish her words, and I understood her to
say that she came from “Palestine”, which seemed rather strange.
“The spirit was in great grief because she had hung herself, and
thought the body of the psychic was her own, and that the rope was still
about her neck.

51
 “She said that on October 5th, without any cause or premeditation,
she had been overpowered by a desire to take her life, and when alone
had gone to the barn and hung herself.
“‘A big man with a black beard made me do it. He [a possessing
entity] met me in the barnyard and hypnotized me, and made me hang
myself to a rafter, but I don’t know why I did it.
“‘My brother John found me and cut me down, and my parents
were almost beside themselves. But I am not dead. I am at home all the
time and I talk to my mother and father. I try to comfort them and make
them know that I am not dead, but they do not notice me and do not
answer me. My folks all sit around the table crying, and there is my
empty chair, but no one answers me. Why don’t they answer me?’
“We could not at first convince her that she was expressing herself
through the body of another, but after a lengthy conversation, she was
somewhat enlightened and comforted, and left with spirit friends.
“Previous to this incident, neither Mrs. Wickland nor I had heard of
the Harmening suicide mystery and we did not know that such a girl
had ever existed.
“Several days later, a reporter from one of the Chicago dailies came
to interview us regarding our research work, and I related our recent
experience with the Harmening girl.
“In great surprise he said that he himself had been the reporter on
the Harmening case and that the girl had lived in Palatine, Cook
County, Illinois. The dead body of the girl had been found hanging in
her father’s barn, but no one knew of any cause for suicide, although the
girl had always been peculiar”.
Fourteen years after the above session, the spirit Minnie Harmen-
ing put in another appearance, coming through the medium, Mrs.
Wickland:
“‘I want to thank you for all the help you have given me.
“‘When I committed the act which took my life I was only a young
girl of sixteen. I had so much suffering afterwards and was very, very
miserable. I could see my father and mother sitting at the table crying
and I could not help them.
“‘When the time came for my body to be buried the minister would
not take it into the church, and would not bury it, because, he said, I
had committed a sin in taking my own life. He also said that I could not
be buried in the graveyard because of my act, and he would not even
look at the funeral as it passed by.
“‘I did not do the deed myself. I was obsessed. It was very hard for
my father and mother and sisters. The minister would not even come
into the room where my body lay, but spoke from another room; he was
too holy to be where the body was. This made it harder for my parents.
“‘Do not think that by taking your own life you can bury yourself in
the hereafter. I was obsessed when I took my life and did not know

52
 what I was doing, but I am suffering because my father and mother are
still mourning for me. Very often I go to see my poor old mother, and
she is very old now.
“‘I am the girl who lived at Palatine. You remember me, don’t you?
“‘The neighbors made it still harder for my folks because they told
mother what a disgrace it was for the family. I feel very badly about the
matter.
“‘I want to thank you for the help I received here. It was through
you that I received light and understanding. I am happy in a way, but
not real happy, because I feel the grief my father and mother have.
“‘When I lived, I did not understand obsession. After I had hung
myself, I saw a man beside me, staring at me. Just when the rope was
around my neck, I came to; I tried my best to get it off my neck, but I
had kicked the box from under myself and my whole weight was on the
rope and I could do nothing. I scratched my body in an effort to free
myself, but it was no use.
“‘If one take his own life he goes through a bitter experience, and
suffers greatly—yes, suffers greatly.
“‘I thank you very much for the light and understanding I have
received, for it has been a great help to me’”.
I consider myself fortunate that my personal knowledge of the
reality of obsession and possession is not limited to what can be found
in books. Let me share just one interesting case with you.
In February 1974, I was awakened at 3:15 a.m. by the ringing of the
telephone. An acquaintance, Bill, was calling me in great distress. Be-
fore he had uttered more than a few words, a strange voice cut in and
cursed me with such gusto and vocabulary as I have seldom heard. Bill
would try to get in a few more words to explain what was going on but
would be interrupted constantly by the strange voice uttering more
curses and insisting that I stay out of their affairs (the word “their”
referring to the fact that two entities had obsessed Bill).
Finally, I got the picture into focus and told Bill that I could not
handle this case personally but that he should carefully put the phone
back on the hook and I would try to have someone call him.
I dressed hurriedly, walked to my nearby office and laboratory, and
looked up the telephone number of my friend Henry Mandel. Mandel,
then 78 years old and living in St. Petersburg, Florida, was one of the
best healers I had encountered in my worldwide studies of healers.*
I got Henry out of bed at 3:30 a.m. and explained the situation. I
gave him Bill’s number and asked him to phone immediately. At 4:45
a.m., Henry phoned me back and reported the mission accomplished.

* His work is reported on pages 28-30 and in Appendix B of Healers and the Healing
Process. He died in 1978.

53
 But news of equal importance was that Henry had had the presence of
mind to turn on the telephone-attached tape recorder just a few minutes
after making contact with Bill and his “visitors”. The copy of that tape
is one of my prized possessions. The conversation between Henry, Bill,
the two entities and a friendly helper in the spirit world just has to be
the strangest telephone “conversation” I have ever encountered!
After this episode, I undertook to help Bill learn how to prevent any
further invasion by such low level spirits and to open himself to contact
only from higher level spirits. Bill then developed into a good medium
with specialized powers of clairvoyance and clairaudience. With these
talents, he became a very effective healer through the aid of a medical
doctor in the middle astral planes. We will return to this subject of
“Spirit Doctors” in Chapter 8.
The reference just made to Bill’s mediumship brings to mind that
many well-known figures were mediums without the matter being
made public. A case in point is Mary Baker Eddy, founder of Christian
Science. In her early life, she was an accomplished medium and gave
public sittings. Her natural sensitivity later made her receptive to
teachings from higher levels of the worlds of spirit as well as from Dr.
P.B. Quimby—teachings that have done and are daily doing tremen-
dous good in the lives of countless persons all over the globe. (And if
you want some really interesting reading you should see what she has
said through mediums in the past 20 years! There are a few parts of
Science and Key to the Scriptures she would like to re-edit.)
It would be worthwhile to put together a well-documented book on
obsession and possession. Such is long overdue, if we are ever to stop
the practice of sending thousands of wonderful human beings to the
mental hospitals just because the psychiatric profession as a whole has
refused to look beyond the tips of the noses of Freud and some of his
successors.
Surely enough has been said to indicate that any research studies
on survival must consider very carefully 2,000 years of authenticated
experiences with obsession and possession.

54
 CHAPTER 8

Spirit Doctors

Survival Evidence—Area 5 of 11

During my intensive full-time research into the nature of man these

past sixteen years, one of the key areas of study was investigation of the
people known as healers. As I met and traveled with medical doctors,
psychiatrists, scientists, and parapsychologists in many countries, we
continually encountered the controversial question of “spirit doctors”.
Almost none of the healers we met in Brazil, England, the United
States, the Soviet Union, Mexico, Scotland, South Africa, or the Philip-
pines had any medical knowledge. Relatively few had an education
beyond high school—and most of the healers in the Philippines and
South Africa had either no education or only one or two years of grade
school. When asked, “How do you know what is wrong with the pa-
tient”, the answer usually was, “My guide (or “my protector” or “my
spirit doctor”) tells me what the trouble is and what should be done
about it”. This was very hard for the members of our various research
teams to accept. Since we all knew about the capability of the human
mind to put on a series of spectacular and often bizarre dreams each
night—even in full color, with musical accompaniment and striking
scenery—it was easy to smile deprecatingly and assure ourselves that
here was merely a figment of the healer’s imagination. But after en-
countering Arigó and his “Dr. Fritz”, we were no longer so sure of our
deductions.
You may have read in Time or The Reader’s Digest about the Brazil-
ian healer José P. de Freitas, popularly known as Arigó. Two para-
graphs in the Time story of October 16, 1972 give the overall picture:
“Even before he died last year in an automobile accident at the age
of 49, the peasant known as Arigó had become a legend in his native
Brazil. Claiming to be guided by the wise voice of a long-dead physi-
cian whom he had never known personally, the uneducated healer saw
as many as 300 patients a day, diagnosing and treating them in minutes
....He treated almost every known ailment, and most of his patients not
only survived but actually improved or recovered.
“A few years ago, reports on the exploits of such miracle workers
would have drawn little more than derision from the scientifically-
trained. Now, however, many medical researchers are showing new
open-mindedness toward so-called psychic healing and other methods
not taught in medical schools”.

55
 As a boy, Arigó had no education except for two years at a
parochial school from which he was dismissed because, in his own
words, he was too stupid to continue. His subsequent career involved
hard labor, either in the fields or mines, and later, a clerical job in a
social security office. Nobody ever saw Arigó read a book, or even
attempt to read one, as was discovered in an extensive sociological
study of his background. For all practical purposes, Arigó could be
considered an illiterate. Thus, it was necessary to consider very
seriously the hypothesis that there indeed may have been a voice pre-
senting itself in his head. The important question is: What was its
source?
Arigó the healer was able to make a complete diagnosis by merely
looking at a patient. A team of medical doctors and scientists from the
United States took 3,000 pounds of medical diagnostic equipment with
them to Brazil for the Arigó research. Andrija Puharich, M.D., the team
leader, arranged to have a diagnosis made of each of about 450 patients,
taken at random from the lines that formed daily to obtain Arigo’s
services. When comparing the team diagnoses with the instantaneous
ones Arigó called out in Portuguese in the time it took patients to walk
the few steps from the head of the line to stand before him, it was con-
cluded that there was good agreement in 92 percent of the cases. Puha-
rich later confided in me, “George, we will probably never find out, but
there exists the sneaking suspicion in my mind that Arigó may have
been right in the other 8 percent!”
Equally beyond medical comprehension was the fact that Arigó
was one of the few healers who prescribed every known modern mole-
cular medicine. In two cases, he dictated a prescription for medicine
that had just been put on the market in Europe but which had not yet
been imported into Brazil.
Arigó often treated a few hundred patients a day—patients who
seemingly suffered the full range of human ailments. Usually Arigó
would complete his handling of the patients in one to four minutes each.
How could this be? Arigó said all the credit was due to “Dr. Fritz”,
who spoke into his right ear. Since we were not able to come forth with
any alternative explanation that fit the facts as they were gradually
assembled from the study of Arigó’s many abilities, we decided to inves-
tigate the question in depth. Our research continues.* I will share with
you just one case I have been following carefully over the years.
In Chapter 7, I told of my friend Bill, who had become possessed by
two entities. I mentioned that we had helped him learn how to ward off
further attacks by low level spirits and to open himself to contact with
more evolved spirits.

* Some results of this research are presented in Healers and the Healing Process.

56
 Later Bill did perceive, clairaudiently and clairvoyantly, a much
more evolved intelligence. This spirit said he was a former medical
doctor and wanted to help Bill become a healer. Bill was naturally
quite mystified by the whole procedure. Under our close monitoring,
he developed into a very capable healer. All of his diagnoses and treat-
ment instructions came from an entity who called himself “Doc Nick”.
Bill, knowing nothing about the practice of medicine, was continually
struggling with the words Doc Nick would speak into his right ear. On
his 59th birthday, we gave Bill a medical dictionary so that he could
look up the spelling and meaning of the medical terms he was hearing
clairaudiently!
This is just another in the great and growing number of cases where
former medical doctors on the middle and upper astral planes are able
to continue doing what they are most interested in—helping suffering
humanity.
Robert R. Leichtman, M.D., an internist with highly developed
clairaudient and clairvoyant capabilities, made an important point
about help from Spirit Doctors when he read the first draft of the manu-
script for this book. He said, “Dramatic as it is to observe a Dr. Fritz
working through an Arigó or a Doc Nick working through Bill, we
should point out that most of the help from Spirit Doctors is not of this
variety. By far the greatest benefit comes from the Spirit Doctors work-
ing through both the patients and the medical professionals by influen-
cing their thinking while they are in the waking or dream state—by
ordinary telepathy”.
We are far from knowing as much about this situation as we want
to know. Research is being pursued avidly. With every additional bit of
research into the questions surrounding Spirit Doctors, there is
mounting evidence of survival.

57
 CHAPTER 9

Spirit Photographs

Survival Evidence—Area 6 of 11

If you have never heard of “spirit photographs”, the material in the

following paragraphs may tax both your imagination and your credul-
ity. However, after researching this subject over the past decade, I feel
it is an area that certainly must be considered in any serious study of
survival.
Perhaps a good way to get an introduction to this subject is to share
with you some material I recorded in the home of Mrs. Bertha Harris of
Golders Green, a suburb of London. Mrs. Harris has for more than 60
years been one of the finest mediums of this century. Her abilities, and
her crusty and unvarnished habit of telling the truth as she sees it,
resulted in her being a trusted friend of King George VI, Sir Winston
Churchill and Charles de Gaulle. After two years of personal study of
Mrs. Harris’ psychic abilities in the areas of psychometry, clairaudi-
ence, clairvoyance and precognition, I reported my findings in Part II
of From Seance to Science. In a taped interview in 1972, Mrs. Harris
provided this enlightening first-hand account of what “spirit photog-
raphy is all about.
“Spirit photography occurs when a photograph, taken under any
condition, shows an ‘extra’ when developed. Usually an extra face
appears in addition to the one being photographed. These extras do not
appear as frequently today as they did in the days of my youth when I
learned the technique of psychic photography.
“My father supplemented his income with photography. Regularly,
as a child, I saw him emerge from the dark room in our house where he
used the wet plates which were later to be superseded by films. He
made his own sensitive paper, chemicals from his own formulas,
enlargements, and so on. At the age of sixteen, I was taught to retouch
the negatives to make the people look more attractive. As a matter of
fact, I went through the whole process of professional photography.
“To my father’s astonishment, he used to get what he called ‘ghosts’
on his film. This was rather a nuisance, for he often had to travel
twenty miles to photograph a subject, only to return home and find
there was an intruder in the picture. Some of these ‘damned ghosts’, as
he irately called them, were extraordinarily exciting to me.
“Near our home, for example, lived Lady Yates, the owner of many
high-stepping and temperamental hunters. One of them, named Becky

58
 Sharp, would be groomed only when the groom’s little boy sat on her
back, for the two were greatly attached to each other. At the age of
four, the child fell ill and died not long afterwards, but during his con-
valescence he would be carried out to the stable to pet the horse. A few
weeks after the boy died, my father was asked to photograph Becky
Sharp in order that her picture could appear in an exhibition. When the
negative came back from the dark room, it showed the dead boy sitting
on the horse’s back.
“Even more staggering was the occasion when we went to photo-
graph a bridal couple in a country church. The bride looked radiant on
the arm of a handsome young soldier, and the photographs seemed likely
to turn out well. When they were developed, however, the soldier was
not there. Instead, a sailor stood in his place. Needless to say, this was
very distressing to the bride’s mother, who was especially worried about
the groom. ‘What are we going to do with this?’ my father asked her.
“‘Oh’, she exclaimed, ‘It will kill him if he knows. A couple of years
ago my daughter secretly married that sailor, and then he was killed’.
“It appeared the sailor had come to the wedding and superimposed
himself on the photograph. Not surprisingly, the bride’s mother begged
us to destroy the negative. Later my father said to the groom, ‘I’m very
sorry, sir, but that photograph was a failure’.
“That was one photographic assignment which could not be
repeated, but tremendous problems of embarrassment and expense
were caused when ordinary portraits had to be repeated. The fact is
that my father was a spirit photographer even though he knew nothing
about Spiritualism or psychic photography. No wonder he was
angered by the intrusion of these extras. ‘These ghosts are haunting
me’, he would cry. Then one day, I did not assist him in the dark room
as usual, and no spirits appeared on the film. Suddenly we realized that
my presence somehow caused the appearance of the extras, though we
did not understand why. The spoiling of film by these uninvited spirits
was very costly, and I was henceforth barred from the dark room!
“Some years later, after I had entered Spiritualism and was working
as a medium, I went sometimes to the Crewe Church, about fifteen
miles from my home in Chester. En route to Crewe on the train one
time, I found myself in conversation with the woman who shared my
compartment. It turned out that the woman was Lady Conan Doyle,
and she was on her way to Crewe Church to see Billy Hope who, at that
time, was one of the world’s leading spirit photographers. Lady Conan
Doyle invited me to accompany her and I accepted, though the evening
did not unfold as anticipated.
“Before the evening service, Billy Hope came to the church and
lamented, ‘There are no spirit photographs for you. They just aren’t
coming any more. Ever since Mrs. Buxton, my assistant, went into the
hospital, the spirits haven’t appeared’.

59
 “‘Do you think’, I asked him, ‘that possibly you and Mrs. Buxton
have some kind of power which causes the extras when you are to-
gether but fails when you are apart?’ Then I told him of my father’s
experience with me.
“‘I am the same’, he said.
“Thus it happened that while Mrs. Buxton was in the hospital for
several months, Billy Hope came to Chester to take his photographs in
my presence. Wonderful extras appeared. If I took the photographs
without Hope, however, no spirits were revealed in the developed pic-
ture. It was apparent that the power to produce the extras had to be
drawn from two cooperating persons. This theory was confirmed by my
spirit guide, whom Billy questioned one day when I was in trance.
Rather surprisingly, though, when Billy asked my guide about the
mechanical process of receiving the extras, he was told that the lens
played no part. The picture of the spirit was printed directly on the plate.
“‘In that case’, Billy asked, ‘How do you always manage to get them
right side up?’
“‘Oh, don’t worry about that’, my guide said obligingly. ‘We’ll give
you some upside down!’ And they did.

Fig. 23. Typical early 19th century spirit photography

60
 Fig. 24. Sir Arthur Conan Doyle shortly Fig. 25. Photo of Doyle produced at his
before his death request two months after his death

“‘They’ve pulled a fast one on us this morning’, Billy would remark

on such occasions”.
Over the years while working with Billy Hope and others, Mrs.
Harris collected a large album of photographs which had faces and
figures of people who had died. Unfortunately for science, this album
was destroyed in the same bomb attack in World War II that broke Mrs.
Harris’ back. From the few photographs that survived from this period,
four are shown in Fig. 23.
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, medical doctor and author of the Sherlock
Holmes stories, spent the last eleven years of his earth life traveling the
world speaking on behalf of the cause of Spiritualism. Two years after
his death he made arrangements to “come back” in a series of 22 sittings
with medium Grace Cooke of London. Doyle desired to tell how he
found things in the new worlds he was inhabiting, and in particular he
wanted to correct some of the erroneous ideas he had presented in his
lectures on Spiritualism. For example, he, along with other Spiritual-
ists of his day, had said there was no reality to the concept of reincarna-
tion. He wanted to testify to the fact that reincarnation is a reality.
At the end of the series of talks, Doyle himself made the arrange-
ments from his level of existence to provide evidence of his survival of
bodily death. Ivan Cooke, the medium’s husband, in his book Thy
Kingdom Come (the revised edition was entitled The Return of Arthur

61
 Conan Doyle) tells how Doyle said, “I am endeavoring to give you a proof
on a photographic plate”. He then described the steps by which such a
photograph actually was produced within the next 24 hours. It is repro-
duced in Fig. 25, next to a photograph of Sir Arthur while alive (Fig. 24).
Another piece of research on spirit photography will be of interest.
One day while working in our laboratory we utilized the spiritually sensi-
tive abilities of a trusted psychic to garner some information on spirit
photography. We asked a friendly soul who travels at will throughout the
world of spirit to locate for us for the following day a person who had
participated in spirit photography and materialization research while in
the flesh. When we met we were told that a person had been selected
who would share experiences encountered both in the flesh and in the
world of spirit.
During the process of “testing the spirits”, we learned that we were
talking to Rev. Sophia Bush; that she had led her own Spiritualist Church
in Miami for many years; and that she had been involved in spirit photo-
graphy and materialization for 30 years. In an aside she observed, “This
was more in my early years in Spiritualism. Once one learns the reality of
these phenomena, one becomes far more interested in spiritual develop-
ment than playing around with psychic phenomena”.
In addition to talking about conventional spirit photography such as
is shown in Figures 23 and 25, she told us about other types as well. “We
took photographic paper and each person present placed the sheet over
the forehead or the heart. We sat in darkness thinking intently of a partic-
ular dear one who had gone on ahead. After fifteen or twenty minutes,
we washed the photographic paper in the developing fluid and dried it
under red light. Often we were surprised at the pictures, which were
very recognizable. Incidentally, this is an old process which has even
been done with very thin silk cloth and no photographic emulsion”.*
A parapsychologist reading these remarks by Rev. Bush might say
that the latter account is an example of thought rather than spirit photo-
graphy. As of now we do not know enough about the process to agree or
disagree. We can only observe that the recording of a person’s thoughts
on photographic emulsion—and often without using the lens of the
camera—is as far outside the capability of today’s science to explain as is
the modification of a photographic emulsion by the imprinting of faces of
persons long since dead and totally unknown to the researchers.
With our rapidly expanding scientific knowledge of light and other
energy forces, it is likely that in the decades ahead, photography of per-
sons on the higher planes of being will become commonplace.†

* Is it possible that the matter-energy exchange involved here is related in any way to the
image scientists have recently scrutinized so thoroughly on the cloth shroud of Turin?
† For those interested in reading more, the definitive book on spirit photography is Beyond
the Spectrum by Cyril Permutt, published in 1983 in England.
 CHAPTER 10

Materialization

Survival Evidence—Area 7 of 11

If it is difficult to accept the reality of spirit photography, it is even

more difficult to accept the reality of materialization.
By the term “materialization”, I refer to the fact that all or a portion
of a person who has died and been buried or cremated can reappear in
a three-dimensional form. This reappearance can have such a high
degree of likeness to the deceased physical body that it is instantly
recognized. Preposterous as it may seem, research in many countries
has shown the reality of this extremely rare phenomenon. In Chapter 6
we gave an example of such research dealing with ghosts in solid form.
In past centuries such experiences were surrounded by mystery.
Materializations recorded in the Bible have been considered miracu-
lous, mythical or allegorical. In Exodus 3:2-22, the materialized figure
of an angel is reported as appearing to Moses. In Matthew 17:1-3, it is
reported that the materialized figures of the long-dead Moses and Elijah
appeared to Jesus, Peter, James and John. And according to Luke
24:13-31, the form of Jesus appeared and spoke to two disciples as they
walked on the road to Emmaus. Then some hours later, the fully
materialized figure of Jesus appeared to the assembled disciples (Luke
24:33-51). The disciples were terrified and thought they were seeing a
ghost. Jesus spoke to them and called attention particularly to His
hands and feet. He suggested that they verify that these hands and feet
were not some vaporous spook or a figment of their imaginations.
Is all of the above just scriptural nonsense?
It is only natural that we may be skeptical of the survival evidence
written down 2,000 years ago about a religious figure. Let us move for-
ward to this century.
In the past 100 years, occasional small groups of serious-minded
people have carried on research that resulted in materializations no less
dramatic than those recorded in the Bible. Sir William Crookes in
England, Schrenck-Notzing in Germany, Pavlowski and Kluski in
Poland, Carlos Mirabelli in Brazil, and Harry Edwards in his work in
England and South Africa have succeeded in producing materializa-
tions. These materializations have been no less dramatic and real than
those of Moses and Elijah, and that of Jesus appearing to and speaking
with the apostles on two occasions after His burial. Some readers may
find these modern examples more credible than the Biblical references.

63
 Carlos Mirabelli of Brazil must be credited with some of the most
fully-documented cases of materialization. The 1927 publication of the
Zeitschrift fuer Parapsycholgie reports on pages 450 to 462 on a series of
materialization experiments that collectively were observed by 557
persons:
“This seance which took place at nine o’clock in the morning was
attended by many people of note. The room in which the test was con-
ducted was situated on the ground floor and was eleven meters long by
ten meters wide. The windows opening upon the street were faced
with iron bars; the floor was composed of narrow strips of wood which
had been examined one by one to make sure that they could not be
manipulated surreptitiously. Everything was found to be in order, and
it was definitely established that the only way of forcing an entrance
into the room would be to break through its thick walls or its doors
framed in stone.
“Mirabelli, seated in a chair, turned pale, indicating the approach of
a deep trance. His eyes bulged and twisted about as though someone
were trying to strangle him, while beads of sweat stood out all over his
body. Suddenly three sharp raps sounded on the table which stood in
the room, and a child’s voice called out: “Papa”. Dr. Ganymed de Souza
who was present declared with great emotion that he recognized the
voice of his little daughter who had died of the grippe in the capital.
Everyone sat in tense expectation, and presently the shape of a girl
appeared beside the medium. Almost beside himself, her father
stepped out of the circle, spoke to his child, went close to her and folded
her in his arms. Amid convulsive sobs he assured the others again and
again that it was his own daughter whom he was holding, and that the
dress worn by the apparition was the same as that in which she had
been buried.
“All the while, Mirabelli lay as though in death-agony, cowered in
his chair, his complexion waxen, his muscles completely relaxed, his
breathing weak and wheezy, his pulse barely perceptible.
“Colonel Octavio Viana now rose to convince himself of the reality
of the apparition. He also took the child in his arms, felt her pulse,
looked into her deep fathomless eyes, and asked her several questions,
which she answered rationally, although in sad monotones. Viana also
was able to confirm that the vision was tangible. Dr. de Souza then
recalled several childhood incidents in his daughter’s life to the appari-
tion, receiving replies which showed that his remarks were understood.
The apparition was photographed, a copy of the picture being appended
to the investigating committee’s report.
“After the picture had been taken, the child began to soar about the
room, rising into the air and plunging about like a fish in its native ele-
ment. The spectators had risen to their feet and followed the vision,
which remained at a height within easy arm’s reach. The medium

64
 meanwhile continued to imitate the child’s motions with his forearms.
She floated about in the air a few seconds longer, and disappeared all of
a sudden, after having shown herself for thirty-six minutes by daylight
and under unexceptionable conditions to a gathering of educated men,
who testify that they saw before them a perfectly formed human being.
“Dr. Ganymed de Souza thus lost his daughter for the second time,
so deeply was he moved by what he had seen. The statement which sets
out this occurrence is attested by the signatures of ten men holding the
degree of Doctor of Science”.
The best documented case in recent years that I have uncovered in
my study of this phenomenon occurred in 1963 in Sao Paulo, Brazil. A
group of 15 medical doctors, psychiatrists and lay people undertook to
conduct an “iron-clad” experiment. They built a cage made of iron
bars, one side of the cage serving as a door. Inside on a simple chair,
they placed a woman medium who had previously participated in suc-
cessful materializations. (Only a very special medium is of use. The
materialized figure is made up of energy substance taken from the med-
ium’s physical body, as well as from the bodies of those present.) The
medium was secured by leather straps and padlocks to the chair and
the iron cage, as indicated in Fig. 26.
Some minutes after the medium was in deep trance, her head fell
over her shoulder. Then it was noted that white material was issuing
from her nostrils and her left ear, as seen in Fig. 27. At this point, the

Fig. 26. Medium securely fastened in Fig. 27. Medium in trance with ecto-
enclosure before trance piasmic formations issuing from left ear

65
research leader pulled the thin black cloth curtains mounted inside the
iron bars of the cage in order to decrease the intensity of the light in the
area where the spirit entities were utilizing the ectoplasmic material
being drawn from the body of the medium as well as from the bodies of
the research team members standing outside the iron cage. (White
light, both from the sun and electric lights, inhibits and may even pre-
vent the materialization process. This scientific fact, not generally
understood, has in years past resulted in critics charging fraud, because
the majority of materializing mediums would only consent to work
inside a totally darkened room or “cabinet”.)
With the passage of time, the white material increased in volume
and built up into a fully-formed five-foot-high figure of a Catholic nun
clad in full vestment. At this stage, two of the researchers handed an
open Bible to the figure, whose hands were starting to extend between
the iron bars, as indicated in Fig. 28.

Fig. 28. Materialized figure ready to hold the Bible

The figure took the Bible and held same in its hands, as can be seen
in Fig. 29. In this remarkable photograph, note the two arrows pointing
to the iron bars which pierce the robed figure. The figure is just starting
to move out of the iron cage by moving through the bars just as though
they were not there. (Recall that in Part I, Chapter 1, Fig. 2, the chair on
which I was sitting seemingly had moved forward through my body and
was photographed in detail.)
The materialized figure moved forward through the steel bars and
out of the cage until it was fully exposed, as is seen in Fig. 30. Note that
the upper arrow points to an assembly of white pearl-like beads making

66
Fig. 29. Materialized figure holding the Bible and starting to pass through the steel bars

67
up an ornament on the forehead level. Now look at the very first
material to issue from the medium’s nostrils in Fig. 27. It will be seen
that this decoration was among the first material to be formed.
In Fig. 30 note that the bottom arrow calls attention to the lacework
structure of the outer shawl, which partially covers the fully material-
ized crucifix. In the original negative, this material shows the warp and
woof of the delicate white threads.

Fig. 30. Close-up of fully materialized figure showing cloth-like nature of veil,
beaded head ornament and crucifix

68
 At this point, it was possible for the members of the research team
to recognize the face of the materialized figure. It was that of the
medium’s sister, a Catholic nun who had died two months previously.
The materialized figure gradually dissolved and disappeared. The
researchers lost the opportunity to use the warm wax and cold water in
the two buckets shown in Fig. 26. These were on hand to take finger-
prints of the materialized fingers. Such wax impressions of the finger-
tips of a materialized form were obtained in Poland in research with the
medium Kluski and in Boston with the medium Crandon.
In Chapter 9, I reported comments made by Rev. Sophia Bush, a
Spiritualist minister who had lived in Miami before her death. After we
discussed her experiences with spirit photography from the viewpoint
of her work before and after death of her physical body, we turned to
the subject of materialization of human beings. Two of Rev. Bush’s
remarks relate directly to the materialization case just presented.
“Now the type of person desiring to manifest is usually a spirit who
wishes to reassure his grieving loved ones that he or she is still among
those present. Some mediums are so proficient in helping to produce
the materialized figure that it is difficult for those present to distinguish
the ectoplasmic form from the physical form known to the loved ones.
But sooner or later, the life force begins to leave the figure and it
crumbles or dissolves. The energy of the manifesting spirit returns to
the bodies of the sitter and those present”.
This certainly relates to the materialization case we have just pre-
sented. The materialized figure was that of the medium’s recently
deceased sister. The nun’s figure dissolved before the researchers
could take the wax impressions of the hands and finger tips. The
energy-matter exchange caused a collective weight loss of 27 pounds by
the 15 physicians, psychologists and others who made up the research
team. In this case, there was no means of measuring the weight loss of
the medium. In other cases reported in the literature, however, the
medium has been found to suffer a weight loss of from 15 to 40 pounds
at the height of the materialization.
Realizing the importance of materialization to the survival ques-
tion, I organized and led a small team of American and English scien-
tists to Brazil in 1972. In our short stay we encountered a few persons
who were reported to be materializing mediums. Our efforts to capture
such phenomena on video tape, still cameras and movie cameras were
unsuccessful. However, our camera techniques did allow us to detect a
fraudulent effort on the part of one of the mediums who had agreed to
work with our research team. The medium, locked in the iron cage,
had his young son appear, garbed in white cloth from head to foot and
standing outside the cage. He was not a very convincing “spook”. Our
infrared film had penetrated the totally dark room and recorded all of
the important details. One photo of this fraud is included as Fig. 31.

69
 Now, fourteen years later, having studied this subject in more
detail, we realize that we ourselves contributed to the lack of success
with the sincere mediums with whom we came in contact. For one
thing, we now understand more fully why such materializations cannot
take place without the full approval and active collaboration of intelli-
gences in the worlds of spirit. These are specialists in the manipulations
of the subtle energies of the human being. Man is only dimly beginning
to grasp the realities of these energies, which seem to lie outside of our
knowledge of the electromagnetic spectrum.
It has been 2,000 years since the apostles examined the materialized
hands and feet of their Master. With our now rapidly expanding knowl-
edge of materialization, we can speculate that the next one or two dec-
ades will see this aspect of survival substantiated in a way that will cause
the “material” sciences to add some new chapters to their textbooks.
But is the materialization phenomenon itself convincing proof of
survival? Dramatic as it is, and even though it apparently was convinc-
ing to Jesus’ disciples, we do not feel it is the proof demanded by today’s
scientists. And interestingly enough, those persons dwelling in the
spirit world share the same opinion, as indicated in the next incident!
During the aforementioned 1972 trip to Brazil to study materializa-

Fig. 31. Fake materialized figure captured in total darkness with infrared film

70
 tions, our team had the rare privilege of using the superb telepathic
channeling services of Shirley Shultz to have a three-and-a-half hour
question-and-answer session with a British medical doctor, “Joseph”,
who said that he had died approximately 100 years earlier. As a fitting
conclusion to this chapter, note carefully the following exchange:
A Team Member: This team of scientists from the U.S. and England
believe that if they can photograph a bona fide materialization of a per-
son who has died, they will then have solid scientific proof of survival.
Do you, yourself a dweller in the spirit world, agree?
Joseph: No. Even if you find and photograph some legitimate mate-
rializations, you would still not have your proof of entities from our
side...that we exist...proof that we exist. And I will tell you why you
would not. First, you would find many on your sphere who would not
accept it. But even eventually it would not be proof. For eventually
your scientists will understand that materializations involve a physical
substance called ectoplasm. While it is partially manipulated by the
spiritual entities themselves, it is also partially manipulated by the
medium. So you will still not have complete proof of survival. The only
way you will have complete proof is by observing us as we are. And for
this you need to have a shield or screen for seeing us, and you will need
to have an instrument for hearing us. Most importantly, you need to
have an instrument which will change our thoughts to sound—or some-
thing which we ourselves can manipulate and use so that you will hear
our spoken words. Now this is the only way you are going to have 100
percent proof that life exists after transition from the material body.
In Chapters 18 and 19, we share with you the results of our sixteen
years of efforts to create equipment that does just that—change spirit
thoughts to sound so that we can hear the spoken words of persons who
have left their physical bodies.

71
 CHAPTER 11

Reincarnation

Survival Evidence—Area 8 of 11

Is reincarnation a present-day fact or a centuries-old fiction? Noth-

ing is more relevant to survival than the answer to this question.
In its simplest form, reincarnation is a belief that:
a.. Each person has a sou
b.. The soul survives the death of the physical bod
c.. The soul then spends time in other realms of existenc
d. Next the soul is reborn into a new physical body—human, not
animal—for the purpose of further mental and spiritual growth.
e. This cycle is repeated until the soul reaches a high state of
development and reunites in full consciousness with God.
Although reincarnation is accepted by more than half of the popula-
tion of the world, it is strongly resisted in Christendom. Most Christians
believe in a, b, and c above, but relatively few believe in d and e—even
though Jesus makes an oblique reference to reincarnation when He asks
if the disciples think He is the reincarnation of Elisha. Research has also
shown that the Essenes, the group in which Jesus seems to have lived as a
young man, may have embraced the concept of reincarnation—as did
most of the peoples who then lived to the east of Israel.
If you care to do serious research into the twin questions of com-
munication with departed spirits and reincarnation, you will find that
the earliest Biblical writings contained many references to each. The
former was the obvious reason for the author of 1 John feeling the need
to caution his flock to be careful, to test and make certain that the spirits
to whom they were talking were “of God”—that is, to be sure the spirits
were highly-evolved spirit teachers and not low-level or earth-bound
spirits. There is some evidence that between 300 to 600 a.d., ecclesias-
tical actions resulted in reducing the number of references in the Bible
to both spirits and reincarnation.
Regardless of the beliefs of contemporary Christians concerning
spirits and reincarnation, both concepts have been a part of humanity’s
beliefs in many parts of the world since the beginnings of recorded his-
tory. This book is not the place for a scholarly presentation or histor-
ical review of the subject of former lives. What is of importance is that
present-day scientific research has turned its attention to the subject. Few
areas will have much more bearing on the survival question than what
may now come from this new research into reincarnation.

72
 Indicative of the interest of this subject to science is the scholarly
and painstaking research being done by Dr. Ian Stevenson at the Uni-
versity of Virginia Medical School; Drs. Arthur Guirdham and Denys
Kelsey, British psychiatrists; Dr. Hernani Andrade, Brazilian physicist;
Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama, physiologist and Shinto priest in Japan; Dr.
Raynor Johnson, Australian physicist; Robert Crookall of England with
doctorates in science and philosophy; and Dr. Karlis Osis, formerly the
director of research for the American Society for Psychical Research.
With scientific investigators of this caliber devoting their time, we can
only conclude that reincarnation is indeed a worthy subject for
research. To provide you with just a short sampling of the kinds of
cases that are under study, I will present two highly-abbreviated cases
of persons who seemed to remember past lives. The first case is from
Dr. Ian Stevenson’s essay, The Evidence of Survival of Claimed
Memories of Former Incarnations:
“Case of Robert. A six-year-old Belgian boy insisted that a portrait
of his Uncle Albert (who had been killed in the First World War in 1915)
was a portrait of himself. This boy was especially devoted to his pater-
nal grandmother in contrast to her other grandchildren, who largely
ignored her. He was happy and healthy when with her, sullen and dis-
obedient when with his own parents. Albert, the boy’s uncle and
claimed previous incarnation, had been the marked favorite of the
grandmother and had meant far more to her than her other son, the
father of Robert. When Robert was three and first saw a swimming
pool, he ran along the diving board and dived in. Albert had been a fine
diver. When a visitor pointed a moving picture camera at Robert and
turned the handle with a clicking noise, he protested, saying, ‘Don’t!
Don’t! They killed me that way the last time!’ Albert had been killed by
machine gun fire while trying to destroy a German emplacement.
Robert, his grandmother reported, had used for her pet names Albert
had used, and told her of likes and dislikes which Albert and she had
privately shared”.
For the second example of modern scientific research in this field, I
have greatly condensed this case from Arthur Guirdham’s The Cathars
and Reincarnation. He opens by telling the background of his patient:
“She had been suffering for years from dreadful dreams of murder
and massacre....I examined the woman for neuroses. She had none, but
as the dreams had occurred with such regularity since the age of 12, she
was worried about them. She was a perfectly sane, ordinary housewife.
There was certainly nothing wrong with her mental faculties.
“After a few months, she told me that when she was a girl...she had
written the dreams down. She had also written things that came into
her mind, things she couldn’t understand about people and names she
had never heard of. She gave me the papers and I started to examine
them.

73
 [What first amazed him, Dr. Guirdham says, was the verses of songs
she had written as a schoolgirl. They were in medieval French, a sub-
ject she had never taken at school, as he later checked.]
“I sent a report of her story to Professor Pere Nellie of Toulouse
University and asked his opinion. He wrote back immediately that this
was an accurate account of the Cathars, or Cathari, a group of people of
Puritan philosophy in Toulouse in the 13th century.
“She also told me of the massacre of the Cathars. She told in horrid
detail of being burned at the stake....I was astounded. I had never
thought of reincarnation, never believed in it or disbelieved....She also
said that in her previous life she was kept prisoner in a certain church
crypt. Experts said it had never been used for this purpose. Then
further research showed that so many religious prisoners were taken on
one occasion that there was no room for all of them in regular prisons.
Some had been kept in that very crypt....
“In 1967 I decided to visit the south of France and investigate. I
read the manuscripts of the 13th century. Those old manuscripts—
available only to scholars who have special permission—showed she
was accurate. She gave me names and descriptions of people, places
and events, all of which turned out to be accurate to the last detail.
There was no way she could have known about them. Even of the
songs she wrote as a child, we found four in the archives. They were
correct word for word....
“I started this as a clinical exercise, and I have proved that what a
20th-century woman told me about a 13th-century religion—without
any knowledge of it—was correct in every detail”.
In 1875, a Unitarian minister, James Freeman Clarke, looked into
the future and observed: “It would be curious if we should find science
and philosophy taking up again the old theory of reincarnation,
remodeling it to suit our present modes of religious and scientific
thought, and launching it again on the wide ocean of human belief. But
stranger things have happened in the history of human opinion”.
Yes, the fact that more than one hundred years later our scientists
are taking up the study of reincarnation is a “curious” and exciting
development in man’s search for proof of survival.

74
 CHAPTER 12

Space-Time Relationships

Survival Evidence—Area 9 of 11

From the intense activities of scientists in the past two decades we

have another finding that relates to our search for survival evidence. It
deals with what they call “space-time relationships”.
As far as you and I are concerned, we live and move and have our
being in a well-ordered three-dimensional world: up-and-down, fore-
and-aft, and sideways.
Not so, says the scientist.
He says we live in a four-dimensional world, and perhaps a world
of five or more dimensions. First, he says, as a minimum, we must add
a time dimension, if we are to comprehend the nature of reality. In fact,
if we are to follow the present theorizing of physicists we would have to
add two or even three types of time and get involved in a four-dimen-
sional, five-dimensional, etc., “space-time” system.
This is far too complex for us nonphysicists, but in all of this new
scientific explosion of human understanding, there is one crucially
important nugget that can be stated simply. You and I live by the clock.
Our lives are measured by seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks,
months and years. Our every action is related to time. We are born,
live a certain number of years, and we die. Few of us indeed reach the
century mark. There can be no argument with the clock or calendar.
We last only so many years. Almost every person alive accepts this as
the truth. But is it the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth?
Not on your life!
Science is only bringing to light a very exciting fact about time.
While it is true that our lives are measured by time, it is true only
insofar as it relates to the physical body. Yes, our physical body is
chained to the three-dimensional sequential space-time system. But the
mind, personality and soul—actually at this very moment—already exist
in an interpenetrating space-time system. And while it is almost
beyond comprehension, watches, clocks and calendars don’t even exist
in the space-time system in which we will be spending all of our time
after we cast off that old, worn-out overcoat of a body.
In recent decades, the science of physics has been making discov-
eries that will soon give us a solid, scientific basis for understanding
how our nonphysical mind(s), memory bank(s), personality and soul
temporarily inhabit the physical body and then depart that material

75
 mass when it is cremated or buried in the ground. This revolution in
scientific thought started with the discovery of a “particle” which
seemed to be massless and capable of passing easily through thick
concrete walls and heavy sheets of steel. Physicists called this particle,
this packet of energy, a “neutrino”. And in the last twenty years, they
have discovered and named more than 100 massless particles. The
study of these particles has led to the establishment of a whole new
branch of physics known as quantum mechanics.
Michael Roll, a lecturer in subatomic phenomena in Bristol,
England, succinctly comments: “In a nutshell, our physicists have dis-
covered other dimensions of existence with people in them who are
exactly the same as we are. Some really good mediums are able to
bridge the gap between these different dimensions of existence. They
are speaking to people whose surroundings are as solid and as natural
to them as ours are to us. They exist in our space, but as their sub-
atomic particles—building blocks—are moving at such staggering
speeds, they are out of range of our physical senses. A good example is
to be found in radio and television. All the channels are operating in
the same space, but at different frequencies—subatomic vibrations. The
supernatural and paranormal are natural and normal after all”.
The true significance of this scientific revolution lies in the fact that
the science establishment itself can begin to conceive of worlds within
worlds. Science can now begin to be comfortable with the knowledge
that there does seem, after all, to be an interpenetrating world or realm
of existence, as has been taught by spiritual leaders for thousands of
years.
Michael Scott, astrophysicist of Edinburgh University, Scotland,
says, “I can now completely agree with the arguments about the reality
of psychic phenomena and the existence of a normally unseen world. I
am sure the explanation of these phenomena can be found in quantum
mechanics, as applied at the subatomic level. Here we will find the key
to the unseen world”.
The great significance of quantum mechanics is that at last science
is creating a key that will enable mankind to comprehend scientifically
what 2,000 years ago Jesus of Nazareth referred to as “the many man-
sions in my Father’s house”. This was His way of describing, in poetic
terms, the realms in which we will be living when we depart our
physical bodies. (See the large color chart inserted at the back of this
book.)
If Jesus were speaking to an Earth audience today, He would per-
haps substitute the phrase “higher levels of consciousness” for His
phrase “many mansions”. This would be completely compatible with
the work of the quantum physicists and the transpersonal psycholo-
gists. It is of great significance for the field of survival research that the
world’s “First International Symposium on Mind/Matter Interface”

76
(Brazil, July 1985) and the first national “Conference on Survival and
Consciousness” (Washington, D.C., October 1985) each had quantum
physicists of world renown as speakers.
The findings of quantum mechanics are beginning to provide a
basis for comprehending how another complete world can interpene-
trate our material world and yet not be detected by our five senses. No
wonder someone facetiously suggested that physics laboratories put a
sign on their doors reading, “Closed For Repairs”.
So present-day science has given us not one but two marvelously
enlightening tools that add proof to the centuries-old preachments on
survival we considered in Chapter 4. First, it confirms that our per-
sonality, mind and soul cannot “cease to exist” and “forever disappear”
out of the cosmos. Second, it gives us a basis for throwing off the clock-
and-calendar concept. It makes it far easier to understand that we do
not die at the “time” our body dies.

77
 CHAPTER 13

Conservation of Matter and Energy

Survival Evidence—Area 10 of 11

Late twentieth-century physics has been adding knowledge at such

an unprecedented pace that it is difficult even to keep abreast of the
month-by-month developments. Our whole concept of the nature of
matter is undergoing drastic revision.
Scientists have long since discarded the concept in the university
texts of my day that matter is made up of very small solid particles that
could be thought of in terms of minuscule billiard balls. Later teachings
involved picturing matter in terms of energy existing only in wave-like
forms. Then it was concluded that sometimes the billiard ball concept
was useful but that in other cases the wave theory was more helpful.
Now the thinking of the physicists has become so complex—with talk
about black holes and white holes, etc.—and it is so mathematically-
oriented that there is scant possibility that we ordinary mortals can
comprehend what it is they are saying about the nature of matter.
However, there are two findings to which we can relate. First, it is
now concluded that the mind of the experimenter can in some cases
influence matter. The second finding is that matter-energy can neither
be created nor destroyed. All matter is energy and as the energy is
changed or modified, the “matter” is merely energy at a different level of
“existence”.
A crude example of this is a liquid composed of hydrogen and oxy-
gen. These elements, normally gases, combine to make a fluid sub-
stance we call water. If the translational rate of the molecules in water
is slowed, by extracting heat, the fluid becomes a solid which we call
ice. If the vibrational frequency of the molecules is speeded up, by
adding heat, the fluid becomes a gas we call steam. If the steam is
heated and the vibrational frequency speeded up to levels not com-
monly found in nature, it goes into a state for which the scientists have
coined the word plasma. So now we have not three states for water but
four—solid, liquid, gas and plasma.*
The significant thing is that for all practical purposes science is
now telling us that matter cannot be destroyed. It can only be changed

* This is the source of the term devised by Russian scientists—“bioplasmic body”—to

replace the older term, “etheric body”.

78
 from one form to another—that is, from one vibrational frequency to
another.* This means that the law of conservation of energy applies to
the energies of life as well as to material things.
This has definite significance in our search for evidence that the
mind, personality and soul survive the death of the physical body. The
real you, your mind, personality and soul, is in a very real sense
energy—a “finer” energy at a very high rate of vibration which is un-
detectable by our very limited five senses. And this energy does not
suddenly cease to exist just because the physical body that it has been
wearing changes into water vapor and dust.
Dr. Werhner von Braun, as many readers will recall, was a scientist
who helped create Germany’s World War II rockets and missiles and
then later contributed greatly to the United States space program.
Shortly before his death, he provided a succinct summary of the
thoughts presented in the foregoing paragraphs: “Science has found
that nothing can disappear without a trace. Nature does not know
extinction. All it knows is transformation!...Think about that for a
moment. Once you do, your thoughts about life will never be the same.
...If God applied this fundamental principle to the most minute and in-
significant parts of His universe, doesn’t it make sense to assume that
He applies it also to the Masterpiece of His creation—the human soul? I
think it does. And everything science has taught me—and continues to
teach me—strengthens my belief in the continuity of our spiritual exis-
tence after death. Nothing disappears without a trace”.
So we can conclude that we are indeed fortunate to be living in a
day when science itself has done so much to provide another piece of
evidence testifying to the certainty of our survival in some form or
other in some part of the universe.

* We hasten to explain to the scientific reader that little is known about the subtle energies
involved in thoughts, emotions, the human aura and the soul. There is now a sufficient
accumulation of research data to show that the energies that make up an individual
person’s thoughts, emotions, personality, memory banks and soul continue in existence
after death and decay of the physical body. See “Realization of Holistic Health and its Sci-
ence“, by Dr. Hiroshi Motoyama, Journal of Religion and Parapsychology, June 1979, Tokyo.

79
 CHAPTER 14

Communications Through Mediums

And Telepathic Channels

Survival Evidence—Area 11 of 11

The Christian Bible as well as most religious writings are replete with
stories of people who “heard” voices, “saw” visions and foretold the
future. In ages past, these rare people were called prophets, sages, seers
and mystics.
In the early days of the American colonies, people with such abilities
were sometimes called “witches” and were, in some cases, tortured and
even burned at the stake. Even in this century in England, such people
were ostracized and even imprisoned until the repeal of the Witchcraft
Act in 1951.
Only within the last 140 years has serious research into the abilities of
such people been conducted. Even up to the present moment such
researchers are looked at askance by their peers. Hence, there are only a
few intrepid souls in England, the United States, the Soviet Union, and
Brazil who are today seriously engaged in conducting research in the
area of communications from spirits.
Since we do not yet have an electronic means for direct communica-
tion with inhabitants now occupying the worlds of spirit, our present
research is limited to the use of mediums. Because this is such a crucial
area of research into life after death, I will take time to clarify what I mean
by the term “medium”—our present terminology for a person who in cen-
turies past was called a sage, seer, prophet or even a witch. I prefer to use
the definition of mediumship given by Robert R. Leichtman, M.D., an
internist who is himself one of the most accomplished mediums I have
encountered in my worldwide search for such talents. The definition is
from his book, Edgar Cayce Returns:
“Mediumship: The phenomenon of a nonphysical intelligence, usu-
ally a discarnate human, assuming some degree of control of a physical
body in order to communicate something useful and meaningful. Med-
iumship is usually used for the transmission of information or inspired
guidance, but can also be used to transmit varieties of healing energies.
There are varying degrees of trance associated with mediumship and
differing qualities of information communicated, depending on the
quality of medium and the quality of the spirit using the process. Med-
iumship is distinguished from the phenomenon of possession in that it

80
 occurs only with the deliberate cooperation of the medium and
produces a constructive result”.
Take special note that Dr. Leichtman says that the quality of the
information transmitted is dependent on the quality of both the medium
and the spirit communicator. It is precisely because of this crucial
qualification that a very high percent of all communications through
mediums fall into one or more of the categories of inconsequential,
garbled, useless, mischievous, and even false and harmful.
Today we realize that the merest handful of people throughout the
world have demonstrated that they possess the capability to reach very
far up in the worlds of spirit to contact high levels of intelligence while
still very much immersed in the nitty-gritty, materialistic world of
everyday living. It is precisely this factor that has caused all of the dis-
belief and scandal associated with mediumship and messages from the
world of spirit. It is this—combined with the use of mediumship to
make money—that has brought British and American Spiritualism to its
present unenviable state. As soon as a medium sets himself or herself
up as a paid channel for bringing through “messages” to bereaved
family members, the trouble starts. Not being able to have uniformly
good contact day after day with the communicators in spirit—but being
expected to deliver a satisfactory message to the paying customer—the
faking and deception starts. (This statement applies equally to much of
the nonsense currently being brought through under the heading of
“hypnotic reading of past lives”.)
But just because some medical doctors are quacks, it does not fol-
low that all doctors are quacks. Precisely the same is true of mediums.
A Moses or an Elijah in olden times and a handful of mediums in the
world today stand out as effective servants of their fellow men.
During the past 16 years, my fellow researchers and I have
searched the world over to locate and work quietly with deep trance
mediums who are not in “the business of mediumship”. These people
never advertise their abilities. In fact, some of our most useful and
highest-level contacts with the world of spirit came into our laboratory
through a 60-year-old man who had gone into trance once each month
for twenty years in the presence of only his two closest friends.
If the reader is interested in studying this area in depth, I can say
that some books listed in the bibliography resulted for the most part
from communications through reasonably good mediums. But only in a
few cases were the communicators in spirit currently living on some of
the “higher levels”—which will be discussed in Part III.
In the case of my laboratory research, my prime objective has been
and still is to check—with very high levels of intelligence—that picture of
the detailed workings of the worlds of spirit which I had been painstak-
ingly assembling over the years. Therefore, let is be clearly understood
that the material which I present in Parts III and IV are not just fan-

81
 ciful ideas brought forth by my fellow researchers and me. The con-
cepts set forth in Part III, “A Blueprint of Immortality”, have been con-
firmed by intelligences in the worlds of spirit that can be reached by only
a very small percent of the people who consider themselves mediums.
So this book in itself is a living testimony to the reality of high level
communications with spirits through mediums.
In one of our laboratory sessions with a thoroughly tested trance
medium, a spirit entity introduced himself as Prof. Silas Roberts. He
gave a very learned discourse on studies currently being conducted in
the spirit world for the purpose of eventually helping man to solve the
energy crisis, by developing a solid form of hydrogen for use as a fuel in
cars and trucks. At one point, he reminisced about his work as a
professor of chemistry in a small (unknown to us) college. He men-
tioned that a small bronze plaque had been put on the door of his
laboratory by his former students after his death many years ago. I
made it my business to visit this small college in Demorest, Georgia.
Sure enough, on the chemistry lab door was the plaque with the date
1947 and words of esteem by the former students. In the years which
have passed since the visit to the laboratory of Prof. Roberts, much
additional evidence has accumulated to show that he is, in fact, who he
says he is.
In this connection, I should cite the admonition of John. In the
early days of Christianity—before the Bible was rewritten in parts to
tone down the references to dwellers in the worlds of spirit—medium-
ship was common. But the tricky problems outlined above prevailed
even then, and in his first epistle, John admonished his fellow Chris-
tians, “Try [test] the spirits [to see] whether they are of God”.

Telepathic Channeling
The foregoing discussion of mediumship must be supplemented by
a consideration of what is today termed telepathic channeling. This ad-
vanced level of communication with the spirit worlds, while relatively
rare in past centuries, has today become more common. In our own
research in the past sixteen years, we have encountered six superb tele-
pathic channels. How does this form of channeling differ from the
aforementioned mediumistic activities?
Physical state of the channel—The telepathic channel is usually
very much awake and completely aware of surroundings, the opposite
of being in trance. The presence of extremely bright lights may necessi-
tate the use of dark glasses or an eye shade, but otherwise the channel is
very much aware of the surrounding physical conditions. There is no
need for a trance state, light or deep.
Method of delivery—The thoughts of the spirit communicator can
be delivered by speaking, writing long-hand or use of the typewriter or
word processor.

82
 Level from which information can be obtained—While the majority
of mediums can contact dwellers only on the upper portion of the lower
astral or the middle astral planes, a superb telepathic channel can easily
reach the mental or causal planes and occasionally contact residents on
the celestial planes of consciousness. Naturally, the informational con-
tent from these higher levels of consciousness is of much greater value
than that from the astral plane.
Accuracy of transmission—The accuracy of transmissions by many
mediumistic persons is usually very low, perhaps less than 25 percent.
By comparison, one superb telepathic channel who serves in our
research sessions has been congratulated by the spirit communicator
from the mental-causal plane who stated that, in his opinion, the chan-
nel brought through as much as 90 percent of the intended content.
Need for little editing—Mediumistic communications often involve
contorted or incomplete sentences, with the material sometimes
coming out in a disorganized fashion requiring much time-consuming
editing. By comparison, the flow through a good telepathic channel
requires a surprisingly small amount.
We have not studied telepathic channeling just out of idle curiosity.
Our objective was to be able to establish solid two-way communication
with dwellers on the mental-causal planes of consciousness. We sought
men and women who in their recent lifetimes were outstanding scien-
tists and who now have a deep desire to join hands with us in a particu-
lar collaborative venture. This venture has as its objective the creation
of an instrumental system of communicating with them and other
dwellers on the higher planes of consciousness. Only by the use of out-
standing telepathic channels can this objective be achieved. Here is one
example of this type (further comment on their significance will be
given in Chapter 15).
As I look at the bookshelf beside my desk, I see 30 large three-ring
binders filled with hundreds of transmissions that have come through
one superb telepathic channel in the last 22 months. One of these was a
transmission volunteered on the occasion of my 75th birthday, when
Sir Winston Churchill dictated through the channel (via the keyboard of
the word processor) a message of commiseration and encouragement!
He described in detail his own personal feelings as he himself had
moved through his 70’s and then into his 80’s. The contents of this
communication would convince all but the most hard-headed skeptic
that the communicator was indeed who he said he was. Aside from the
helpful insights in Sir Winston’s discourse, there was solid information
to confirm the continuity of life. He gave me permission to reproduce
this personal letter in a quarterly issue of the newsletter of the Meta-
science Foundation. It brought unsolicited responses from numerous
readers who expressed their deep appreciation for the highly relevant
insights provided by Sir Winston.

83
 Any serious researcher in the field of communication from the
higher planes knows the crucial importance of screening out
“imposters”, usually friendly but mischievous spirits who are mas-
querading as famous persons. Having relentlessly followed the Apostle
John’s admonition about testing the spirits in my own sixteen years of
such research, I was, of course, immediately on my guard when this
communicator said he was Sir Winston Churchill. So I devised a test.
Since I lived in London for seven months during World War II,
where I functioned as a technical advisor to several top-level boards
directed by U.S. Ambassador W. Averell Harriman, the test I devised
involved information known, in part, to only five people—Sir Winston
Churchill, General Charles de Gaulle, King George VI, a highly
respected and beloved English Spiritualist medium, Mrs. Bertha
Harris, and myself. I asked the “purported” Sir Winston Churchill cer-
tain crucial questions, the answers to which could have been known
only to the five of us.
Of the five persons involved, I was the only one still in a physical
body in May 1985. To my knowledge, I was the only person in the
world in May 1985 possessing the background knowledge on which my
questions were based. The spirit intelligence with whom I was com-
municating promptly replied to my questions, giving answers that
could be supplied only from the presently existing memory banks of Sir
Winston Churchill.
It would be easy to expand the material in this chapter to several
volumes, but our purpose is merely to indicate that mediumistic and
telepathic channeling make up one of the eleven areas that should be
considered if one is to embark on a serious study of the question of
survival. And in Chapter 19, you will observe the crucially important
role that telepathic channeling is playing in the scientific research efforts
to establish the certainty of your living forever!

84
 Summary of Part II

While there is not yet absolutely ironclad proof that you will sur-
vive death of your physical body, there is certainly strong evidence
found in these eleven different areas:
1. Historical and Religious Writings. Since the beginning of
recorded history, in all parts of the world, and in most of mankind’s
religions, there has been a common thread that indicates survival.
2. Deathbed, Near-Death and Out-of-Body Experiences. Careful
research has clearly established that people in various cultures and
with totally different religious backgrounds “see” loved ones and/or
helpers coming to help them make the transition from their dying
physical body into their new state of existence. Research has also
clearly documented that the real you can leave the body and travel; and
that this same “spirit body” (referred to by the Apostle Paul 2,000 years
ago) carries you into your next state of existence.
3. Apparitions, Hauntings and Ghosts. Encounters with ghosts
over 4,000 years in all parts of the world indicate that something sur-
vives death of the physical body.
4. Obsessing spirits. “Obsessing spirits” (the “demons” of the Bible)
are still a reality today. They may be elementals, thought forms or
spirits or souls of people who have departed their physical bodies and
who, due to their baser habits of thought and behavior, are very much
confused and in darkness. Still being attracted to the earth plane from
which they have only recently departed, they attach themselves to the
magnetic auras of living persons. They actually affect the thoughts,
emotions and actions of the obsessed person.
5. Spirit Doctors. Very careful research by medical doctors, psy-
chiatrists, psychical researchers and others suggests that healers in
various parts of the world do, in fact, get help from dedicated medical
doctors who themselves now live in the worlds of spirit. These doctors
desire to continue their ministrations to ailing humanity. From their
present vantage point, they know far more about cause and cure of
physical and mental illness than they ever did when occupying their
physical bodies.
6. Spirit Photographs. Dozens of photographers in many countires,
using many kinds of cameras and film, with many types of lighting con-
ditions (including total darkness) have obtained photographs of persons
known to have died and whose bodies were buried or cremated. While
this phenomenon is easy to duplicate by fraudulent means, there are
fully-documented cases of the genuine thing.
7. Materialization. From Biblical times down to the present, com-
petent witnesses have observed, touched, examined and even weighed
bodies of persons and animals known to have died and been buried or

85
 cremated. Our present-day studies of the phenomenon and the rapid
expansion in our knowledge regarding the physical universe and its
interpenetrating nonphysical universe at last makes it possible to begin
to understand the natural laws behind this “miracle”.
8. Reincarnation. The beliefs of more than half of the world’s five
billion people, together with current scientific research, suggest that
the individual soul survives the death of the physical body and may,
under certain circumstances, inhabit a new human physical body.
9. Space-Time Relationships. The mind, personality and soul
already exist in a separate and interpenetrating space-time system. This
same interpenetrating space-time system is where we continue to live
when we cast off our physical body.
10. Conservation of Matter and Energy. We have seen that science
now accepts as one of its basic tenets that matter-energy can neither be
created nor destroyed. The higher, finer matter that is our spiritual
body continues to exist after the grosser physical body decays and
returns to nature as gas, water vapor and particulate matter (“dust”).
11. Communications from mediums and telepathic channels. From
the earliest Bible days down to the present moment, there have been
and are persons who have the ability to “live in two worlds at the same
time”, and thereby bring communications from persons who have
passed into the world of spirit.
The vast accumulation of experiences summarized in these eleven
areas of study strongly suggest that your mind, memory banks and soul
will still be very much alive and active when your day arrives to lay
aside your physical body. But we are not yet at a point where we can
talk about the certainty of your living forever.
So now let us go at the survival question from a totally different
approach. We are now in a position to start on a mind-stretching
journey.

86
 PART III

A Blueprint of Immortality
 Foreword

For two thousand years people have speculated about the meaning
of the phrase, “In My Father’s house there are many mansions”. Unfor-
tunately, passing centuries have provided little understanding of this.
Suddenly, as never before in history, interpretations of the accumu-
lated pronouncements of seers, sages and prophets; new revelations of
the world’s great religions; the findings of late twentieth-century sci-
ence (particularly physics, neurophysiology and parapsychology); and
current laboratory research on the borderlands of science at last enable
us to see with understanding eyes. What we see is a blueprint showing
the relative positions of the mansions. Moreover, it shows many activi-
ties carried on in some of these mansions—the very ones in which we
will someday be living—and in fact are already living.

88
 CHAPTER 15

A Tour of Many Mansions

Millions of spiritual creatures walk the Earth

Unseen, both when we wake, and when we sleep.

What if earth and heaven be to each other like

More than on earth is thought?
—John Milton

Putting It All Together

In Part I, we learned that there is a firm basis for saying:
• We are far more than our physical body.
• Our mind(s) and soul are nonphysical
• These nonphysical portions contain our memory banks, our soul,
and our own very individual personality.
• These memory banks, soul and personality can and do survive
death of the physical body.
• Even during the first instant after death of the physical body,
these minds, memory banks, personality and soul are just as vibrantly
alive (although they may initially be at rest or sleeping) as they were
during the years when we temporarily wore that physical body given to
us by our parents and ancestors.
Then we took a brief look back over the centuries to see what types
of evidence had accumulated to support the belief that the individual
man and woman do survive death of the physical body. We examined
eleven different areas and concluded that, taken as a whole, there is a
strong indication of survival—much stronger than any materialistic
counter-argument against survival.
But it is likely that at this moment there are still questions about
what actually happens when the day comes—as it does for each of
us—to leave behind the physical body we are temporarily wearing. You
ask, “What happens then? Where do I go?”
We need a blueprint, a diagram that can help to locate and identify
the “many mansions” the Nazarene said “are in my Father’s house”.
The blueprint of immortality which I now present is based upon:
• The experiences of many saints, sages, seers, prophets and mystics
over the ages;
• The experiences and reports of certain enlightened persons who in
the last 100 years have reached levels of cosmic consciousness;
• Similar experiences of some of my close personal friends and fel-
low researchers; and

89
 • Research currently underway in several countries.
If you are as skeptical as I was, you probably are already questioning,
“Just how accurate, how dependable, and how specific is this blueprint
you propose to show me?” While the years ahead doubtlessly will pro-
vide additional details, most of the basic information presented has been
authenticated by present occupants of the “mansions”, brought through
by mediums and telepathic channels of proven reliability.
Does one have to be an architect, engineer or college graduate to read
this blueprint? No. If you will follow carefully just three simple steps, you
will have a good basis for comprehending what Jesus himself had in
mind when He spoke about the many mansions in His Father’s house.

Packing for the Trip

Let us recall the essence of the concept which we considered in Fig.
17, reproduced here for easy reference. This simple diagram helps us
to understand that the multiple levels of our minds and our soul consti-
tute the indestructible portions of our being which the Apostle Paul
2,000 years ago termed the spiritual body. Now with the knowledge you
gained in Chapter 2, you know that the various levels of the mind and
soul are nonphysical, and still more important, that they are composed
of invisible energy which is indestructible.
You also found in the chapters in Part II that over the centuries
there have been eleven categories of evidence, as reported in thousands
of books, that the invisible “spiritual” or “astral” body survives death of
the physical body. But, you ask, “Where does this surviving body go?
What happens to it? Where does it travel to?”

INDESTRUCTIBLE
REALITY

THE REAL
THE EVERLASTING

‘I’

Fig. 17. The real, the everlasting “I”

90
 Using A Road Map
Our most earnest research led us to believe that the best clues to
answering these questions were given in the Nazarene’s statement of
2,000 years ago—“In our Father’s House there are many mansions”.
This may not seem very specific, but recall that His listeners were
not scientifically informed to the degree that we are. His listeners had
never heard of energy fields (nor did anyone else for the next 1900
years). Jesus was forced to use poetic language to create a picture in the
minds of His listeners. Fortunately, now at the close of the 20th cen-
tury, we can locate the “mansions”—and we have learned enough in our
16 years of research to provide a rather accurate road map. Fig. 32 on
page 92 charts the general territory to a degree never before possible.
And it can be presented now only because of hundreds of hours of
recorded conversations (via superb telepathic channels) with persons
who are today actually dwelling in the various mansions!
Strange and unbelievable as it may seem, the Nazarene was telling
the literal truth when He said, “The kingdom of heaven is within you!”
He was not speaking in parables. The only problem is that during
almost all of the past 2,000 years man and his “science” have not known
enough about the nature of his own existence and the so-called material
world to be able to comprehend His teaching.
No, there is no need to picture these mansions, planes, levels, or rest-
ing places as being in some faraway heaven, on some planet or far out
space above the earth. Most of these levels are surrounding and interpene-
trating us now. Recall the disclosure in Part I which introduced you to
the knowledge that a) our bodies and all of the material world are more
than 99 percent empty space, and b) we live in two worlds at the same time.
However, it does strain the imagination less if we simply picture
these levels, planes, “mansions” or resting places stacked one above the
other, with the lowest plane starting just above the earth’s atmosphere.
The simple sketch in Fig. 32 provides us with a good preliminary blue-
print or roadmap.
Do not be concerned about the names of the planes or levels. There is
not yet an agreed terminology. * The important fact is that there are these
basic levels, regions, zones, planes, mansions, resting places—call them
what you will.

* Any serious student of the accumulated mystical, occult, esoteric and religious lore will
recognize that we have greatly oversimplified both our discussion and our diagrammatic
representations of the planes (in both the lower and higher worlds of spirit). For instance,
each of the three planes we have designated as astral will be found to contain within them-
selves many (from 7 to 49?) different vibratory levels. The same is true of the still higher
planes. Recently a “teacher” on one of these higher planes expressed it this way: “There are
many, many planes of life. We may be on a plane beyond yours; but believe me, my friend,
there are planes beyond ours, far, far beyond ours, of which we know very little”.

91
 NIRVANA AND OTHER STATES OF CONSCIOUSNESS

THE VOID, OR PURE CONSCIOUSNESS

END OF MANIFEST CREATION

EARTH

Fig. 32—Interpenetrating levels of life and consciousness

“IN OUR FATHER’S HOUSE, THERE ARE MANY MANSIONS”

In speaking 2,000 years ago, the Man of Galilee used words like those above which
the people of that day could understand. Today, He might entitle the above chart
“Interpenetrating Levels of Life and Consciousness”. We could understand these terms
because late 20th century science has taught us that everything in the cosmos, including
man, consists of various types of energy at different vibratory rates or frequencies.

92
 Needless to say, we can only dimly comprehend the nature of the
levels above the cosmic level. We know they exist as we know a little
about them—again from some of the current inhabitants of these higher
levels. However, rather than trying to contemplate the possibility of
additional reality systems (9, 10 or 11), it is better to develop a deep
comprehension of planes 1 through 6, so that they may become goals
and promises for us when we leave Earth’s dwelling.

Finding Lodging
Now that we have the excellent road map provided in Fig. 32, let us
make inquiries as to just who dwells on the various planes of conscious-
ness and what type of daily activities are offered for the occupants on
each. We will treat each of these levels or mansions in a paragraph by
itself, numbered to correspond to the numbers and titles in Fig. 32.
In a first reading of the six paragraphs that follow, it is best not to
stop and try to understand all of the words in detail, nor to be con-
cerned if some of the ideas are new, “far out”, questionable, or even
upsetting. In some cases you may not have been exposed to these ideas
by your minister, priest, or rabbi simply because he himself has never
been exposed to such information! Just read slowly and thoughtfully
each of these paragraphs, holding your questions in abeyance until you
have finished reading them all.

1. The Earth or Physical Plane

Here, on the surface of the earth, you now live in your physical
body and also in your interpenetrating etheric and astral “bodies”. The
etheric and astral bodies are nonphysical.* They are a finer form of
matter involving vibrating energy fields. They interpenetrate the
physical body just as hundreds of radio and television waves are doing
at this instant.
Your soul, personality and emotions, memory banks and mental or
causal body are all contained in your astral body. When your physical
and etheric bodies die (here called the first death), the “real you” is still
fully alive in your astral body. Usually within minutes to a few days
you find yourself functioning on that particular astral plane to which
the quality of your life on the earth has entitled you.

* As stated at the outset, this is a nontechnical book. Therefore, this explanation is

offered to the technical or scientific reader: we use the term nonphysical to refer to a finer
and higher type of “matter-energy” undetectable by our present instrumentation. Accord-
ing to Motoyama, the “bodies” and “minds” of the physical, etheric or bioplasmic and
astral levels of being exist simultaneously and independently, are closely related and are
connected with one another—making up one human being. See his article on “The
Realization of Holistic Health and Its Science” in Journal of Religion and Parapsychology,
Number 20, June 1979, Tokyo, Japan.

93
 2. Lowest Astral Plane
This dark, dismal, dangerous and often frightening world, which
the Bible describes as “outer darkness, weeping, wailing and the
gnashing of teeth”, is the habitat of greedy, self-centered, unloving,
resentful persons. Often they have fierce bodily desires and lusts. Here
too may be drug addicts, sex perverts, alcoholics, murderers or sui-
cides. It is also the abode of the less desirable “creatures” of nonhuman
lines of evolution.
This level is traditionally referred to as hell, hades or purgatory. It
is the human and nonhuman astral bodies from this plane that attach
themselves to the magnetic auras or astral bodies of persons living on
the earth plane (an act of “obsession”). Such a “possessed” person may
act abnormally, be judged insane and institutionalized, or commit sui-
cide.

3. Intermediate Astral Planes

Here, the person “awakes” minutes, days or weeks after departing
the physical body, or months, years or centuries after arrival on the
lowest astral plane.
This is primarily a rest and rehabilitation region, complete with
hospitals and their staffs and institutions of learning and teachers. Help
is given to dis-eased souls; persons who had traumatic experiences and/
or sudden death; and persons with inflexible or erroneous mental, emo-
tional or religious beliefs. The body is still “material” but of finer sub-
stance at a higher vibratory rate. Its appearance accommodates each
individual’s personal preference—usually the prime of earth life.
Here communication is by both thought and spoken word. Each
person is encouraged to continue mental and spiritual growth. By such
growth one progresses to the higher astral and mental planes, or from
this level decides to re-embody for further learning and personal
growth on the earth plane.

4. Highest Astral Planes

This wonderful realm of existence is what the Christian generally
calls “heaven”. Another appropriate term is “the summerland”. There
is no pain or suffering. There are happy meetings with those for whom
a bond of love is felt, or groups formed of like-minded persons. There
are unlimited opportunities and encouragement for each soul to grow
in mental and spiritual consciousness. Interest in activities on planet
Earth decreases. There are encounters with angels—lovely and helpful
beings of nonhuman evolution.
Wider perspectives, greater vistas, magnificant panoramas! But
eventually the soul must decide whether to return to the earth plane for
more experience or to accept the second death. In the latter case, the
mind and soul may shed its astral body or containment vehicle and be

94
 reborn onto the causal or mental level for which it has become quali-
fied. When reborn, the soul will function in its mental or causal body.

5-6. Mental and Causal Planes

These levels offer unlimited scope for the further development of
the individual mind and soul. There is access to all of the accumulated
wisdom of the ages on the earth plane and throughout other parts of our
solar system.
There is no jealousy, judgment, or selfishness. There is complete
brotherhood. Most of man’s inventions, scientific advances, poetry,
inspired prose, art and music originate here and are passed down,
through the process called intuition, to receptive minds on the earth
plane. For this reason, the intelligences of this level “cause” much of the
good, beautiful and inspiring activities of the lower planes.
This is the final opportunity to choose to return to the earth plane
for more earth-life experience and growth; or, if all factors are
favorable, then comes the final rebirth onto the celestial planes.

7. Celestial Planes
The nature of these planes of consciousness (as well as those still
higher galactic, universal and cosmic levels 8, 9, 10 and 11) are largely
beyond the comprehension of those now living on earth. The celestial
planes are the location of the Christian God, of Buddha, and gods of
other great religious persuasions on the earth plane. Biblically it is
referred to as “the third heaven”.
On these planes there is preliminary contact with the Universal
Godhead, and understanding of the universal life and energy systems of
which our solar system is composed. The tapping of such levels of con-
sciousness enabled the Nazarene to perform “miracles”. This path is
open to each of us. This is what He meant when He said, “These things I
do, you will do also; and greater things than these will you do”.
After your initial study of Fig. 32, I suggest you lay it aside until you
come to the end of Part IV. By then you will have increased your under-
standing through the study of 50 questions and their answers. These
questions and answers will make it much easier to grasp the important
concepts in Fig. 32.
Now you can comprehend how it is that we are functioning not
only on the earth plane but also in the very lowest and densest portion
of the astral plane. When the physical body dies and the etheric body
disintegrates, we do not really have to go on a “far journey”. We will be
automatically on whatever vibrational level we deserve to be on, based
on the quality of life we have lived while in the physical body.
As you ponder the answers to the questions and the implications of
the blueprint, you will glimpse the sublime vistas and the grandeur of
the overall scheme of life which God has created for all of humanity—

95
 regardless of race, color, caste, sex or religion. You will note that while
the blueprint forever strips away most of the controversial dogmas and
creeds that separate the world’s religions, it does not discredit the cen-
tral spiritual teachings of the major religious systems.
Gradually, the overall concepts will become familiar and more com-
fortable. There will be less reason to cringe or become frightened by
the implication that we are each a spark of the Universal Godhead. We
have the opportunity to start living a life right now that will “lay up for
ourselves treasures in heaven”—another of the Nazarene’s gentle
admonitions.
No longer can we fail to realize that our every act is a “cause”—and
that each cause must have an “effect” on our lives in the countless cen-
turies of life which lie ahead.
No longer can the scramble to meet the monthly payments on a
never-ending list of material wants—or the effort to climb a little higher
in the economic or social rat-race—be quite so irresistible.
No longer can we fail to recognize that no matter how dull, dreary
and unrewarding this moment of life may be, the path which begins
with the next moment can be the stepping stone into a glorious and
ever-unfolding future of great promise.
No longer can a political system fail to recognize that its citizens
are far more than one-lifetime, soulless cogs in a materially-oriented
world, who face personal extinction at death.
Even if you disagree with many details of Fig. 32, your study of this
book will have been of great value. You have come to realize that
immortality is an alternative to your assumption of personal extinction
at death.
And if the term “immortality” has any negative connotations for
you, perhaps we should take a lesson from the men who edited the
Bible. “Immortality” is not mentioned in the Bible. “Life Eternal” is
mentioned 72 times. On that authority and on the basis of 20th-century
research into the nature of man, let us close Part III with the assurance:
Life is Eternal
This is still just a glimpse, perhaps, but it is a clearer, more meaningful,
exciting, stimulating, challenging and easily understandable glimpse
than anyone can picture without full perception of the grandeur of “the
many mansions” of infinite progression that lie ahead.

96
 PART FOUR

Specific Questions and Specific Answers

 Foreword

Sadly, too seldom do scientists, medical doctors, professors, philo-

sophers, theologians, ministers, rabbis or priests, individually or collec-
tively, even attempt to provide soul-satisfying replies to the age-old
questions propounded by people about life after death.
Regardless of race, color, caste, or creed, each of us—totally alone—
walks though the door called Death. It is then that certain basic ques-
tions cry out for answers. Nothing could be more important than to
know them beforehand.
Using an entirely different approach from that of the foregoing
chapters, I try here in Part IV to list the basic questions asked about
death and give the answers which represent the best of all available
conclusions.

98
 CHAPTER 16

Unraveling the Mysteries

“Finding myself to exist in the world, I believe I shall in some shape or

other always exist; and, with all the inconveniences human life is liable
to, I shall not object to a new edition of mine, hoping, however, that the
errata of the last may be corrected”. —Benjamin Franklin

The material that follows is possible only because of the inquisitive

minds of dedicated researchers during the past century. First I honor
the most dedicated of the serious (and honest) deep-trance mediums,
primarily in England, Scotland, Brazil, the United States, Canada,
Ireland, Italy, and South Africa. Second, I acknowledge the work of
thousands of persons traditionally known as “sitters”, whose presence
seem to provide subtle energies that facilitate the best contacts with
communicators from other levels of life.
These valuable contributions would have been lost, however, had it
not been for dedicated psychic researchers and scientists who had the
moral courage to investigate and report the work of these mediums and
their sitters or circles. These researchers, even down to this year of
1987, have had to suffer ridicule from their peers and loss of their pro-
fessional status. Men like Sir William Crookes in England, Schrenk-
Notzing in Germany, Nobel prize winner Charles Richet in France,
Ernest Bozzano in Italy, Dr. Holtacher in South Africa, T. Glen Hamil-
ton, M.D. in Canada, Carl Wickland, M.D., Elizabeth Kübler-Ross, M.D.
and William Tiller, Ph.D., in the United States, and Dr. Hernani
Andrade in Brazil are the better known of scores of their kind.
Although the accumulated communications and data were frag-
mentary and often extremely contradictory, in time it became possible
to piece together a reasonably consistent and experimentally valid
picture of life after death.
Finally, in the past ten years, this type of research has intensified.
Communications under laboratory conditions from recently “deceased”
communicators with medical and scientific backgrounds have added
still more validity to the emerging picture. These have greatly
enhanced our understanding of the process of death and rebirth. It has
pushed our knowledge far beyond that which grew out of the first
hundred years of Spiritualism.
Hence, I acknowledge my indebtedness to all those referred to
above, without whose effort the material that follows would not have
been possible. Their conclusions appear to be substantially correct in
their broadest aspects. In general, they confirm age-old teachings that

99
form the core of the world’s great religions. Of equal importance, how-
ever, they strip away a vast accumulation of dogma and creed with
which these religions have been profaned over the past 3,000 years.
Regardless of race, color, religion, creed, caste, sex or educational
level, we are beginning to see more clearly what happens when each of
us, totally alone, passes through the door labeled “Death and Rebirth”.

1. Let’s take first things first. After all of this talk about life and
death, what is the purpose of life?
I promised in the opening pages to cut out all of the philosophical,
religious and scientific jargon. So here is the answer, just as simply as I
can state it: The purpose of each individual life (soul) is to grow mentally,
emotionally and spiritually back toward the level of creative intelligence
from which it originally issued.
Please take a moment to refer again to Fig. 32 in Chapter 15 and
note the vertical arrow at the left side of the page. The concepts pre-
sented in this diagram will go further toward answering this question
than dozens of books.

2. Is it painful to die?
No. Even those whose terminal illness caused prolonged and ex-
cruciating pain find that at the time of death all pain is gone. This is one
reason it is often observed that the face of a dying person relaxes and
even has a smile.
The actual transition is so smooth and painless that often one
cannot believe he is dead. Frequently when a patient goes to sleep
during a painful illness he awakes to continuing pain. When he awak-
ens after death, and finds no pain, the first thought is, “I must be dream-
ing”—or he may wonder if a sudden and miraculous cure has taken
place. He has a feeling of lightness and buoyancy. The person sees his
physical body lying still and dead and he observes the actions of the
nurse or family members. Then it occurs to him, “I suppose I am dead!
I did not expect it to be anything like this! I feel fine!”

3. Will I become a ghost? If so, how can I be released?

It is most unlikely that you will be a ghost. Ghosts, apparitions,
shades or astral shells result only in the relatively rare cases when the
etheric body (or “etheric double”, as some call it) fails to separate from
the physical and then disintegrate. Separation normally takes place in
minutes, but may take up to 30 to 40 hours. Some persons, ignorant of
this fact, may have a tendency to hold onto the etheric body and may
appear as ghosts. Some people will be able to see this energy field as a
bluish-white mist.
Until the etheric body has separated completely from the astral
body, the person cannot proceed to his earned existence in the astral

100
world. This failure to shed the etheric body often results from a very
traumatic event—murder, fatal injury, or unpleasant emotional experi-
ence. Such a failure can also result if a person has never thought about
an afterlife and has been wholly centered on his possessions and
personal affairs.
A ghost can be released very easily from the area it is “haunting” by
a good psychic. The psychic needs only to get in tune with the ghost
and in a friendly, loving manner explain that death has taken place and
that there is nothing to be gained by lingering in these old haunts. The
psychic then encourages the soul to relax and look for any sign of light
from persons who are willing to lead it into the realm where it should
now be living.

4. There are many types of people alive today in what you have
called the physical or earth plane. Let us assume that you are right when
you say each person will shed his caterpillar-like physical body and
start flitting around like a butterfly on some other level of existence.
What I want to know is, “On what level am I likely to find myself?”
Not knowing you, I cannot answer your question. However, you
can look at Fig. 33 and then look at yourself. Assuming the character
groupings listed as A, B and C are reasonably accurate, you can answer
the question yourself.
A. Individuals who have made more than average progress in this
and/or past lives and whose souls have evolved to the point that they
“just naturally” are living their present lives in harmony with the char-
acteristics depicted in Fig. 34.
B. The average kind-hearted, considerate, well-meaning, hard-
working adults, and all infants and children.
C. Greedy, cruel, selfish, materialistic, highly egotistic and unlov-
ing persons, including, for example, swindlers, rapists, drug addicts,
alcoholics, sex perverts, suicides, murderers, hardened criminals, and
political despots. This classification includes those persons who failed
to benefit from the learning opportunities provided in their just con-
cluded physical incarnation on planet earth.
The width of the individual arrow is roughly proportional to the
number of people in each category.

5. Is there an actual place called hell? If so, where is it?

Yes, there is such a place. It is definitely not the fire and brimstone
place of the New Testament, nor the place depicted in the famous
Hieronymous Bosch painting. It is really more like the traditional pur-
gatory that has for centuries been referred to by the Catholic church. It
is a dark, dismal, uninviting place filled with countless numbers of
souls who are lost and wandering about in great distress.
It is also occupied by some rather frightening life forms of non-

101
 CELESTIAL
PLANES

MENTAL
AND
CAUSAL
PLANES

HIGHEST
ASTRAL
PLANES

MIDDLE
ASTRAL
PLANES

LOWEST
ASTRAL
PLANES

PHYSICAL
OR
EARTH
PLANE
A
B
C
PLANET EARTH

Fig. 33. The next stop for all people now living on planet earth

human lines of evolution. It is cluttered up with thought-forms accu-

mulated over the centuries as a result of humanity’s hatred, greed, lust,
jealousy and other unvirtuous passions. These thought-forms can be as
“real” as the shadowy “bodies” of the poor souls whose lives qualified
them for this plane of existence.
Of all the levels in the lower worlds of spirit, hell is the lowest.

6. Is there a devil?
No, at least not a red-skinned character with a tail, a pair of horns
and a pitchfork as has been pictured in centuries past. The lowest
astral level—like all other levels in the worlds of spirit—is largely a
world created by thoughts. This does not make it any less real. Far from
it! Mental torments can be far worse than actual physical torments—as
in the case of a person with delirium tremens.

102
 In the darkness of the lower astral, imagination and conscience can
create the most frightening devils of all shapes and sizes. To these are
added the very real astral bodies of strange creatures of nonhuman
lines of evolution.
Confirmation of what we are telling you about devils—and light
beings—comes from a small research project reported in the May/June
1979 issue of Parapsychology Review: “A heart specialist from Chatta-
nooga, Tennessee, has just finished a study of more than 100 patients
brought back to life after being clinically dead. ‘The good news’, he
said, ‘is that some of them had a blissful encounter with a being of light’.
The bad news, however, is that over half of the patients ‘had a perfectly
appalling time’, walking through dimly-lit caverns....The doctor now
firmly believes hell exists. ‘Reluctantly’, he said, ‘I have come to the
conclusion it may not be safe to die’”.

SERVE OTHERS

CONTINUE TO
GROW MENTALLY

SHARE
WITH OTHERS

PRACTICE PATIENCE

RADIATE KINDNESS

SHOW COMPASSION

LOVE OTHERS

LEARN TO KNOW
YOUR REAL SELF

SEEK FIRST THE CONSCIOUSNESS

OF GOD, THE CREATOR

Fig. 34. The proven path for individual soul development

103
 We can agree with the heart specialist’s conclusion that “hell” does in-
deed exist on the very lowest of the astral planes. His second conclusion
is certainly academic, since we all die. But the problem is neatly solved
by living a life now that will entitle you to a “gate pass” to be used as indi-
cated in the color version of Fig. 32, to be found inside the back cover.
In any event, if you do find yourself in the lowest astral planes, you
can escape these torments if you persist in striving to find the light and
in calling out for assistance. Sooner or later an encounter will occur
with one of the compassionate beings who willingly give of their time to
lead tormented souls to a place of rest and enlightenment.

7. What can or should I do to make certain that I am on a path

which will bypass that dark and dismal level of existence you call the
lower astral?
Quite frankly, you should not accept my answer to such an impor-
tant question as this. In fact, you should not accept any person’s
answer! The only thing to do is to look at the question from every angle
just as carefully as you can, considering all of the evidence that has
been accumulated. Then, and only then, listen for guidance from that
still small voice that is within you.
All I can do is to help you collect further information upon which to
base your answer to this question.
Perhaps the most helpful single thing I can do is to share informa-
tion that has come from wise old souls who have travelled much farther
along life’s high road than I have. One can place belief in far less than
10 percent of the information that comes from spirit entities through
mediums. It is very rare indeed to obtain direct communication from
those highly evolved persons currently living on the mental, causal and
celestial planes. In our research in communication between the inter-
penetrating levels of life and consciousness, we have found and
repeatedly tested a mere handful of communicators living on the higher
levels. We have followed faithfully the admonition in the epistle of John
to “try the spirits (to see) whether they be of God”.
So in Fig. 34 I present not my answer, but theirs, to your very
important question. Only time will prove for each of us whether these
wise old souls know whereof they speak. All I can say is that our “still
small voices” have told us we can safely consecrate our current lives to
such a course of action.
Persons now residing on the higher astral and the mental-causal
planes confirm the “central core” spiritual teachings of the world’s great
religions, once they have been stripped of the dogma and creed that
each has acquired with the passing centuries.
From their vantage point, they state that the concept depicted in
Fig. 34 is the only time-proven, safe, sure, quick and enjoyable route for
each soul to travel—now and throughout the coming centuries.

104
 8. I am miserable and unhappy. Will I be better off after I die?
Sorry, but the answer is no.
When you someday cast off your physical body, the real you—your
mind, memory banks, personality and soul—will be precisely what they
were before you left the physical body. If you are miserable and un-
happy when you make the transition, you will still be miserable and un-
happy in your new surroundings!
Today is the first day of the rest of your life. This is the day to start
to follow Jesus’ gentle admonition to “lay up for yourself treasures in
heaven”. Only by building into your life and actions many of the quali-
ties listed in Fig. 34 will you enjoy this life and assure yourself of an ex-
citing adventure in the centuries ahead.

9. Does a suicide succeed in escaping his troubles?

No, he only compounds them. There is no escape for any individ-
ual from the requirement that each one must evolve mentally, emo-
tionally and spiritually. A person who fails to cope with everyday prob-
lems does not escape by suicide. He cannot “kill” himself. He is just as
alive after destroying his physical body as he was before he pulled the
trigger, jumped out the window, or took an overdose of sleeping pills.
He finds himself in the darkest, most dismal and frightening level of
the astral plane. A long, hard and lonely struggle lies ahead before this
soul achieves the level on which it would have arrived by natural death.

10. How long might a suicide or a murderer remain in the lowest

astral plane?
We have been told that there is a big difference in the time spent on
the lower astral by these two categories. The suicide has harmed only
himself and his loved ones, if any. Usually he or she is immediately
filled with remorse.* When an offer of help and guidance is given, the
suicide is likely to respond readily. How fast he absorbs the teachings
offered will determine how rapidly he moves to a more hospitable level.
The murderer is in much, much deeper trouble. His act in cutting
short an earth life indicates that he has not only failed to learn much in
his past lives, if any, but that he has not evolved spiritually in the
present life. Usually, he has little readiness to accept teaching when
offered, so his stay on the lower astral may be from many years to many
centuries of our time.

11. I have heard that if one has chosen to have the body cremated,
it should not be done immediately after death. Is this correct?

* There are exceptions, of course. Consider the person who commits suicide for wholly
unselfish reasons—for example, the action of Titus Oakes of Scott’s 1914 polar expedition.

105
 Yes. However, some of our knowledgeable friends on the mental and
causal levels have reminded us that in the Orient it has for countless cen-
turies been the practice to burn the body before sundown on the day of
death. This practice came about because in warm climates decay of the
physical body starts promptly.
It is desirable that the etheric and astral bodies have ample time for a
completely natural and total withdrawal from the physical body. Hence
it is perhaps advisable whenever possible to wait for two or a maximum
of three days before cremating the body. Where this is not possible and
the soul or spirit is forced to make a sudden departure from its physical
body, it will again become normal after a period of rest.

12. Where is the “next” world (or “astral world”) located?

Only in the past few years have we become able to answer this ques-
tion with a scientifically satisfying statement. Our five senses have given
us a false, or at least totally inadequate, concept of reality, as if our mate-
rial world were the whole of it. The material world—and our physical
bodies—are not the “solid matter” we think we see and touch. All mat-
ter—the chair you sit on, the building in which you find yourself at this
moment, the “solid” foundation upon which the building rests—consists
almost entirely of empty space. That is why your vision can pass through
“solid” glass several inches thick. This is why hundreds of radio and tele-
vision signals carrying speech, music and pictures are at this moment
traveling right through the solid walls of your room and your “solid
body”.
Only if you can comprehend the above concept can you begin to
realize that it is possible to have two or more things occupying the same
space at the same time. Your physical body dwells in our common,
everyday, three-dimensional world of space and time. Your mind and
soul live in another space-time system that interpenetrates your physical
body and occupies substantially the same space as your physical body.
Hence the “next world” is the one in which your mind and soul
already lives and in which your mind and soul will continue to live. When
you have shed your worn-out physical body, you will be aware of the sur-
roundings in which your mind and soul are living—the astral planes.
It is only for convenience in Figures 32, 33, 35 and 36 that I stack the
various levels one above the other. This makes it much easier to grasp
and to accept the idea of “many mansions”.

13. Will I have to meet immediately that alcoholic spouse who mis-
treated me and the children, and whom I divorced? And what about my
friend Carol, who had five husbands?
No, to the first of these questions. You will find yourself in a group
where you are in harmony with all of the other members. As to the likely
whereabouts of your former husband, take another look at C in Fig. 33.

106
 As for friend Carol, I can only assume that she has a long way to
grow, both spiritually and mentally. But again, she too will find herself
with those persons for whom she has an affinity. If she does not want to
be with any of her former mates, she will not be.
In due course, we do have to meet those with whom we have unfin-
ished business. Each must sooner or later “balance accounts” if he is to
grow emotionally and spiritually.

14. Do persons addicted to alcohol, tobacco and hard drugs lose

their craving for such stimulation when they arrive on the next plane?
No, not right away. For example, an alcoholic, being on the lowest
astral plane, is in close touch with the physical or earth plane. Often he
is not truly aware that he is “dead”. He may seek out his old haunts and
get a vicarious thrill from visiting a bar. In fact, if he finds a patron who
is depressed, muddled and psychically sensitive, he may obsess that
person. By this merging of their respective energy fields, the dead per-
son may become more directly locked into the physical aura of the bar
patron and experience more directly the feelings to which he had
become accustomed. If the possession of the patron continues, it may
completely wreck his life, and in some cases may even cause the patron
to commit suicide.
A person addicted to hard drugs is in the deepest possible trouble.
He will be resistant to any offer of help and will persist in his craving.
He will experience torments that equal anything pictured in the old
ideas of hell. He may remain in this dreadful condition for what would
be centuries of earth time.

15. Can a “dead” person look in on activities of a child or mate?

Yes, this happens all the time. For a period of days, months or
years, the deceased person is very much attuned to the earth plane. If
the transition is an unusually smooth one, the deceased may even look
in on his own funeral! The records are full of examples of a mate or
parent who lingers for months and enjoys daily contact with surviving
family members.
It is not uncommon for a deceased mate to want to complete some
item of unfinished family business. In those rare cases where a good
trance medium is consulted, the deceased may reveal where a missing
and badly-needed last will and testament or other document can be
found. The settling of more than one estate has been accomplished by
this means.
As the deceased becomes fully reconciled to his or her new life, the
earth ties (primarily personal love and affection) become less binding.
The deceased then becomes fully absorbed in the increasing challenges
of the completely new world of living that has opened.

107
 16. Is there any factual basis for the idea that the spirit of a dead
person can intrude into the mind of a living person and adversely affect
that person’s behavior?
Absolutely, even though modern psychiatry has laughed at this con-
cept. However, for those who were open-minded enough to do serious
research on this matter, it quickly became clear that there is a solid
basis of fact for the age-old idea of spirit or demon possession.
Perhaps the best single piece of research on this subject is Wick-
land’s Thirty Years Among the Dead, which I discussed in Chapter 4. In
it he tells of the technique he developed for getting into two-way con-
versation with the possessing entity and then proceeding by persuasion
(and in some cases, shocks of static electricity) to induce the intruding
spirit to depart on its way.
Wickland’s work has been confirmed by research in which I have
been personally involved.
The many ways in which entities in the spirit world influence or
communicate with people in physical bodies is illustrated in Fig. 35.
Item A deals with obsession; the other forms of communication are far
more beneficial and healthy.
I have reason to hope that in less than a decade, “modern” medicine
will have come to realize that there are at least some persons now
locked up in mental institutions because of spirit possession. Today
these poor unfortunate souls receive no help because many psychia-
trists are unable to recognize and treat this problem.

17. All my life I have been taught that when I die, I will lie in my
grave until some far-off judgment day, and then I will be raised from
the dead. The material you have presented in this book disagrees with
my religious teachings.
I said in the opening pages of this book that this is not a religious
treatise. I have presented information from many sources to the effect
that present and future lives are intertwined and even concurrent. The
fact that you believe in some far-off day does not reduce the need for
preparing now for your very own judgment day whenever it comes.

18. As a Christian, will I meet Jesus when I arrive in heaven?

As a Buddhist, will I meet Buddha?
As a Muslim, will I meet Mohammed?
It is possible, but not very likely, that you would have immediate
contact with these or any other Being living on the celestial planes.
Recall that I said in Part I that modern science has shown us that every-
thing in the universe is vibratory in nature. As this is being written, the
newspapers warn that it is dangerous to watch an eclipse of the sun
without use of dark glasses to protect the eyesight. This is because the
incandescent sun is sending out energy at such a high vibratory level

108
 CELESTIAL
PLANES
E

MENTAL
AND
CAUSAL
PLANES

HIGHEST
ASTRAL
PLANES

MIDDLE
ASTRAL
PLANES

LOWER
ASTRAL
PLANES
C

PHYSICAL
OR
EARTH
PLANES A
B D F F'
G
H
J
PLANET EARTH

Fig. 35. Interplane communications

Key to the Diagram

A. The act of obsession
B. Ghosts, apparitions, “astral shells”
C. Rescue teams and invisible helpers
D. Teachers, masters, guides, protectors
E. Higher teachers, masters, angelic beings, light beings
F-F'. The sources of “intuition” and inspiration for the best
creative activities of musicians, artists, poets, writers,
sculptors, inventors, scientists, etc.
G. Guidance for Jesus, Buddha, Mohammed, and all divinely
inspired souls
H. Prayers by the living for the newly “dead”
J. Skilled meditation and prayer

109
that it would permanently damage the light-sensing cells in the retina of
our eyes.
The dwellers of the celestial planes, the location of all of Man’s
great religious figures and gods, are such bright and shining beings that
their energy would damage a new arrival from the earth plane. Hence
it is not likely that you would meet any of these beings in person.
All such enlightened and compassionate beings, however, do have
the ability to lower their vibratory rate by coming down through a suc-
cession of other beings on the various levels. (This is what the scientists
call transduction, or step-down transformers.) So yes, it is possible for
you to “see” and meet a being who fits your own image of the being you
desire to meet.

19. Are angels a figment of the imagination of the prophets and

writers of the Bible, or do they really exist, as Billy Graham says they do?
Yes, angels do exist, as Billy Graham says. But they do not have
wings as portrayed in some of the beautiful and imaginative drawings
and paintings of the Middle Ages.
The subject of angels is a complex one. There are many types or
classifications of angels. None of them developed from the human line
of evolution. It would take several chapters to do justice to the subject,
so we will have to be content with the following over-simplification of a
very wonderful and helpful aspect of God’s great universe.
The angels of the most numerous type are largely concerned with
the health, well-being, and advancement of man, beast, fowl, plant and
mineral life forms. They work at all levels on the astral plane as
depicted in Fig. 35. They evolved from what in Sanskrit are called
devas, meaning “radiant beings”.
The highest form of angels are known as “archangels”. They are
concerned mainly with performing major tasks in the overall operation
of our universe. For simplicity we might call them “God’s Helpers”.
They are great beings of infinite wisdom, love and compassion who in
every sense deserve the phrase, “the power behind the throne”. Or we
can say these are the top executives who help with the day-to-day
management of our little part of the solar system.
An example of how an archangel tries to help modern man is given
in my book, Collapse and Comeback. This booklet contains a transcript
of a one-hour-and-twenty-minute discourse given by the archangel
Hilarion in answer to my request for information as to what lies ahead
in the way of economic, political and social changes in the remaining
years of this century. It also contains comments by the archangel
Michael, another of the seven archangels who make up what is called
the Spiritual Hierarchy.
Both of the above categories are true angels and should not be con-
fused with the term guardian angel. This is a broadly descriptive term

110
that is applied to the friendly and helpful beings on the astral planes
who are assigned to work with each of us as individuals in this present
lifetime as well as those who are attracted to us at various stages of our
own mental, emotional and spiritual growth. These beings are all of the
human line of evolution. They are more properly called guides, mas-
ters, teachers, helpers, protectors, etc.
All of the above categories consist of loving and compassionate
beings interested only in serving man and his Creator to the fullest of
their individual capabilities. In ages past when a sage, seer, mystic or
even a simple shepherd “saw” such a being, it was certainly natural to
use poetic terms to describe it. Today it is possible for some highly
clairvoyant persons and very advanced meditators to encounter angels
and describe them as light beings.

20. Have beings in the worlds of spirit described what they see as
“material things”?
Yes, this literature is full of such reports from dwellers on the differ-
ent planes. A typical report from the middle astral planes about 60
years ago stated: “The surface of the zone is diversified. There is a great
variety of landscape, some of it most picturesque. We, like you, have
lofty mountain ranges, valleys, rivers, lakes, forests and the internal
correspondence of all the vegetable life that exists upon your earth.
Trees and shrubbery covered with the most beautiful foliage, and
flowers of every colour and character known to you, and many that you
know not, give forth their perfume. The physical economy of each zone
differs from every other. New and striking scenes of grandeur are pre-
sented to us, increasing in beauty and sublimity as we progress”.
In 1977, the first member of our research team made the transition
from this plane to the higher astral plane. Melvin Sutley died at the age
of 80 after a life full of love and service to his fellow man. When we
talked to him a year later, through the telepathic channel Sarah Gran,
he had this to say:
Sutley: This talk with you is something I have been awaiting for a
long time. Yes, I think back to the days when we worked together and I
had the privilege of sitting in on the information that was given us and
the times you visited me when I was in bed in Philadelphia and unable
to get up and go to meetings in the lab. This is marvelous. It is difficult
to communicate in this manner, and I must get used to the medium.
This place where I have been living is so beautiful, George, so beau-
u-tiful. I know that all that beautiful country that you brag about where
you used to live in Florida cannot possibly measure up to this.
Meek: Good!
Sutley: The trees are so green, grass is so green and so velvety, air is
just like breathing wine, if you could do such a thing. The sun is not too
hot, the breezes are lovely. Oh, it is marvelous. I don’t know why I

111
 hung around that place Philadelphia so long. I didn’t know it would be
like this.
Meek: That answers a question in my mind. I frankly wondered
why you did stay quite so long in that nursing home when we could see
what a terrible strain it was on you. When you were alone you couldn’t
have had the best of attention and help—it was a tremendous strain for
you to stay there, those last few months particularly.
Sutley: Yes, if you and Paul and Hans and...[unclear]...had stayed
there with me, I think I would have made it a few more years. But I’m
so sorry I hung on so long because this is—Oh, they tell me I’ll forget
about it, you know, and I will.
Meek: I looked at the early transcripts from the Philadelphia lab
where you and R.B. were present, and saw reference to the name
“Margaret”. I am ignorant in this situation. Was she your wife?
Sutley: Oh, yes! That’s my wife [with great pride in his voice]. You
know what, George? She waited for me [sounds almost like tears in this
sentence]. I kept her waiting all that time. I didn’t know. [He really
feels sad about that.]
Nine months after the above contact with our friend Melvin, we
were pleasantly surprised when he came through at the end of one of
our scientific discussions. We had been talking, by means of a medium,
about the nature of time in the worlds of spirit with Dr. William Francis
Gray Swann, who had died in Philadelphia in 1962. Here is the relevant
portion of the transcript:
Meek: All right, we will be glad to share this tape with Paul, Hans
and Will. This is the extent of our questions. If there is anything else
tonight, Dr. Swann, that you or one of your teammates wish to share
with us...
Swann: Yes, we have two new arrivals in our midst: Melvin and
Margaret.
Meek: Good evening, Melvin, and good evening to you, Margaret.
Although I didn’t have the pleasure of meeting you here on the earth
plane, we have heard much about you and it is a great pleasure to greet
both of you.
Sutley: You are very kind, George. Since I have grown stronger, we
have given up the “old home” and decided to join our old friends and
acquaintances and remind them that we were in communication with
them before we came to this place.
We thank you very much for your kindness and your thoughtful-
ness over a period of time. We are glad that the experiment is again
going forward. Frankly, it has gone so far afield from what we had in
mind that I can foresee that when the breakthrough comes, it will be
enormous.
Meek: Two thoughts come to my mind. First, you mentioned the
help that we gave. It is deeply to be regretted that we were not able to

112
 give you more help, more assistance in the closing months. We felt very
keenly that due to geographical separation and occupational problems,
we were not able to share more with you. We deeply appreciate the
great part that you played in the original activity in setting up this
whole project. We recall frequently your initial contact with Paul and
R.B. and the key role that you played. We also well remember the
financial contribution which you made to our work.
Sutley: It was of great interest to me and still is. You are most kind,
you and Paul and Hans.
Meek: What are you finding of interest these days, Melvin, to make
use of that marvelous mind and soul you have?
Sutley: Margaret and I have not been here very long but we find
there is quite a lot going on. We have been in on some very interesting
discussions and we have fitted some of our knowledge gained in our
last earth experience with some of the ideas being given out by some
here who have not been involved in a life experience for a long, long
time.
We have been circulating from group to group deciding where we
belong. It is very wonderful to be here. For awhile I thought it had to
be as it was before with the house* we had just like that one in
Philadelphia and everything that I had before. But I found out that it
just wasn’t satisfying. It is going to be much, much more interesting
here.
Meek: We are delighted with that news, Melvin. We hope that you
find it possible to come in frequently in the months ahead as we get
more regular communication with Dr. Swann and our friends.
Sutley: True. Tell Paul and Hans hello for me. I am most grateful
to them.
Meek: We will share this tape with them so they can hear the
inflections of joy and excitement in your voice. Speaking of old friends,
we would like to share with Dr. Holmes a report on his project. Is he
available this evening?
The significance of this second communication from Melvin is that
it shows how rapidly this man and his wife have progressed from the
“summerland” or highest astral to the mental and causal planes, where
Dr. Swann and his teammates are. This rapid upward movement
through the worlds of spirit can be attributed to three factors. First,
Melvin and Margaret had led lives of great service to their fellow men.
She was a renowned surgeon; he was a specialist in hospital admini-
stration and one of the founders of Spiritual Frontiers Fellowship. Sec-

* The thought-created house Melvin had constructed for himself when, after death, he
arrived on the highest astral plane. Many mediumistic communications refer to thought-
created structures and surroundings.

113
ond, through his lifelong friendship with Arthur Ford, the medium, he
was well acquainted with the reality of life after death and some of the
conditions in which he would find himself after death. (Readers of this
book will have the same advantage!) Third, Melvin himself decided he
wanted to move on upward to meet his friends. The Swanns and the
Sutleys had been close friends and co-workers for many years in Phila-
delphia.
Thus, in this very personal experience with Melvin, the first of our
research team to make the transition, we see confirmation of the
answer to question 13—that like attracts like; that is, we will find
ourselves with friends and former associates. We also confirm the
answer to question 7—that living a life as portrayed on the stairway in
Fig. 34 is the fastest, most certain, and most pleasant way to have a
wonderful life after one dies.

21. Will I retain all of my five senses when I leave my physical

body? Will I acquire any new senses?
You will no longer have any need for, and in fact will lose, the
senses of smell, taste and touch. Your sense of hearing and seeing will
be extended far beyond your present capabilities.
Beginning on the middle astral levels, you will know a person’s
thoughts by merely looking at him. You will know if what he is saying
really agrees with his feelings. He cannot pretend to be anything but
what he actually is. There is no place for “phonies” in the worlds of
spirit. In general, your sensitivity to your surroundings will be greatly
enhanced. You will feel far more alive than when you were in your
earth body.

22. To what extent, if any, does a person’s formal education deter-

mine his new level of existence?
Very little indeed, as you will understand by examining Fig. 33
carefully. Persons who are considered to be the most learned and with
many university degrees may find themselves on the lowest portions of
the lowest astral planes—if they have grossly misused their knowledge.
Back at “square one”, to use a current expression.
Persons who have had little or no formal education in this lifetime
may find they have arrived on the highest astral in the Biblical land of
milk and honey—if throughout earth life they have traveled the proven
path for individual soul development diagrammed in Fig. 34.

23. What about food in the afterlife? Do people have to prepare

and eat food?
No. Not having a physical body, you will have no need for food.
The higher, finer, vibratory “bodies” in the worlds of spirit can draw all
needed energies directly from cosmos.

114
 24. Is there marriage in the next life?
No and yes.
Bear in mind that marriage is a device that evolved over the cen-
turies as nature’s efficient method of providing the necessary care for
the well-being and growth of children until they could fend for them-
selves. Since there is no generation of new children on the planes of
spirit, there is no compelling need for the institution of marriage as
such.
On the other hand, if your present marriage is a completely happy
one and you would find your greatest happiness in association with
your mate when he or she arrives, then it is fitting that the relationship
continue. If the present relationship is unhappy, then it will automati-
cally cease. All will find themselves in surroundings and with people
with whom they are attuned.

25. Is sexual intercourse possible between males and females

when they no longer have physical bodies?
No. Intercourse between the male and female of most species of all
life forms—humans, all animals, birds, plant life—was provided by the
Creator for the purpose of continuation of the species; that is, for the
production of offspring. In the worlds of spirit there are no offspring
among the human dwellers therein. Hence there is no functional need
for sexual intercourse.*
However, as was pointed out earlier, a new arrival on the astral
plane is still filled with all the thoughts and bodily desires intact. A
person who on the earth plane was filled with lust usually finds himself
on the lowest portion of the lower astral. He is still steeped in his
attachment to earth and may not realize that he is “dead”. He is thus
what we term “earthbound”. He may, in this condition, get a vicarious
thrill out of wandering into a bedroom as an undetected witness to sex-
ual intercourse. Eventually, when he evolves and moves up to higher
levels, such fascination gradually disappears.
I use the word “gradually” advisedly. I was somewhat amused to
learn that “boys will be boys” even on the middle astral planes. It came
as a surprise to hear an entity (a former university professor) tell us
quite frankly that in his present plane of existence he missed having
contact with the beautiful form of the female physical body.
However, there is another—and extremely important—aspect of sex

* A medical doctor friend, a good psychic diagnostician with much experience in the
field of psychiatry, provides an additional insight. “In the lower astral there is a lot of so-
called ‘funny business’ going on. This includes orgies. It is not uncommon for physically
incarnate people to attend these during the hours when they are asleep. This accounts
for a lot of dissipation of energy during sleeping and waking hours”.

115
that we should mention. Any reasonably mature adult knows that there
is far more to the matter of sex than the physical-pelvic aspect. The
greater our comprehension of the cosmos and all we have encountered
therein, the more obvious it becomes that a duality of forces appears to
underlie everything. Some of the more obvious manifestations are day-
night, love-hate, male-female, ying-yang, sweet-sour, cold-warm, posi-
tive-negative electrical charges, etc.
Each individual human being has within himself a mixture of male-
female characteristics—physically, mentally and emotionally. A per-
son with a female physical body may have the mental and emotional
characteristics we usually associate with a male—and vice versa. The
important point is to note that we are each—to a degree—both male and
female.
We carry this basic duality with us when we die and proceed to
move on to one of the worlds of spirit. Many of those persons on the
mental and causal planes with whom we have come in contact in our
research have referred to having lived some of their earth lives in male
physical bodies and some in female physical bodies.
From our research it appears that the melding of the male-female
polarity becomes complete only when we accept the final rebirth and
move to the celestial planes.

26. Twenty years ago my daughter died at the age of six months.
Did her soul or spirit remain that of a baby?
No. She was received on the middle or higher astral plane and
given the most tender and loving care. She was given every oppor-
tunity for continued growth and development. She will reach adult-
hood. If you wish to meet this daughter after you have made the transi-
tion to your next level of life, you can do so—that is, provided you are
not now living a life that will result in your arrival on the lower astral.
In that case, there might be considerable delay before you could meet
your daughter, because she almost certainly will not be found on that
level.
If she has not been alerted to be on hand when you make the transi-
tion, all you have to do is to send out mentally a call for her with all the
love and longing you can muster. She will come.
Children in the afterlife are cared for very much as they are here.
There are those who find their greatest delight in mothering the mother-
less, and in teaching the young. So under such unselfish care the
children reach mental and bodily maturity much as if they had
remained in this world. In most cases, though, they will still return for
additional learning experiences on the earth plane of existence.
The etheric process of development is interesting; children need
mother love no less in spirit than in earth life.
Little do most people know how close the afterlife is, how close its

116
inhabitants come to us, the influence they exert on us, or the result of
our thought vibrations upon them. Then again, as the children grow,
they keep in touch with us from day to day, and when we go out into the
afterlife, they know and greet us as we enter the life that has no night.
There are in the next life institutions of learning just as we have
here. What is more, the inhabitants do not cease to study and increase
their store of knowledge when they have reached a certain age. I can
assure you that your daughter will continue to grow in body, mind and
spirit.

27. Both of my parents died in their eighties. Both had been in

nursing homes for many years and had wasted away to skin and bones.
Both were senile. When they “woke up” after death of their physical
bodies, what was the condition of their minds and souls?
They were in excellent condition. The deterioration you had
observed was limited to their physical bodies. For some months or
even years before their minds and souls made the final transition, they
were, in fact, spending time on short visits to their next plane of life.
This, in part, accounted for their failing memory, the lengthening
periods of forgetfulness, and “absent” look and behavior.
When the full transition of the mind and soul had been completed,
they would be, in most respects, the same as they had been in the prime
of life.

28. Can the passage of a loved one through purgatory (the lower
astral) be speeded by payments of money to a priest?
No. This centuries-old practice does nothing except add to the
coffers of the church, and perhaps give a small psychological consola-
tion to the one who pays the money.
We are all bound by the absolutely impartial and inescapable law of
cause and effect. In each of the first three gospels, Jesus is reported as
saying, “For with whatever measure ye mete, it shall be measured unto
you again”. In Galatians 6:7, Paul says, “Be not deceived, God is not
mocked: For whatever a man soweth, that shall he also reap”.
If, during your life, you caused pain, hardship, and unhappiness to
others; if you allowed yourself to become a drug addict or hopeless
alcoholic; or if you were a murderer or a suicide, you will reap precisely
as you have sown. You will find yourself in the lower astral levels. This
most undesirable “place” has been described in religious lore by the
words “purgatory”, “hades” and “hell”. A person who finds himself in
this condition solely because of his own unwillingness to grow men-
tally and spiritually is totally on his own. No priest can post bail for
such a person. Study Figs. 32, 33, and 35 for a deeper understanding.
Fortunately, the lower astral is completely bypassed by those whose
lives included few if any of the above-mentioned activities.

117
 29. In some religious groups it is customary to pray for the soul of
the dead. Does this practice serve any useful purpose?
A very emphatic Yes! The newly deceased person is very much
alive. As a pilgrim arriving in a new land, there are many strange and
even bewildering experiences on every hand. (How can it be otherwise,
when our religious lore has been so deficient in this area?)
It is a great comfort for this pilgrim to hear your spoken or
unspoken prayer on his or her behalf. Tender thoughts of love, good
wishes, encouragement, heartfelt thanks for shared experiences—these
are all easily received by the deceased if he has arrived on the middle
astral plane. Even if he is “asleep” or is wandering on the lower astral
plane, such prayers are useful, although their effectiveness may be
somewhat delayed until the departed has experienced the trials and
tribulations which are the fruit of his life’s actions.

30. How is time measured on the planes that make up the spirit
worlds?
It isn’t measured. There is no serial time as we know it. Locked as we
are into our present space-time system, it is almost impossible for us to
comprehend living in a “timeless world”. Since our earliest childhood we
have each been locked into a life that is rigidly bound into a system of sec-
onds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, years, centuries, eons, and light years.
There are no trains to catch at an appointed time. There is no first
of the month time-payment to be met. There is no growing old,
wrinkled and senile with passing years.
(The more technically or scientifically inclined reader is referred to
Appendix B for a more detailed answer to this question.)

31. What about political or governmental systems on the astral

planes? Is there any equivalent of money?
There is nothing to resemble countries, states or nations. The
principal divisions result from like souls being grouped with like souls.
There are no presidents, dictators, kings or rulers.
Nor is there need for money or a unit of exchange. Supply is
available for all wants to all individual souls.
The generating force is thought, difficult as this may be to compre-
hend. You can think and have beauty and happiness. You can think
base desires and they will be fulfilled—which shows how a benevolent
Creator can demonstrate to you the foolishness and triviality of those
desires. It is very like the situation in which one finds himself today in
life on the earth plane. You may have all the money you want, but you
still are not happy. It is pretty clear that happiness on any plane does
not depend on money. Sooner or later each will wake up to this fact
and seek the only things that genuinely satisfy—continuing mental,
emotional and spiritual growth.

118
 32. Some mediumistic persons claim they get guidance from
departed spirits—“counselors”, “protectors”, “guides”, “angels”, etc. Is
there any truth in such statements?
Yes, there most certainly is. Such advancement as humanity has
made in the past 4,000 years is in part due to such guidance, often ex-
plained as “intuition”. Indeed, most “revelations” received by sages,
mystics, prophets and spiritual leaders have come from such sources,
as illustrated by paths D, F-F', and G in Fig. 35.
However, this is an area requiring much additional research in the
decades ahead. The human mind is a fantastically complex thing with
the ability to spin dreams that stagger the imagination. Hence, it is very
difficult to make certain that a particular idea or thought is coming
from a friendly and helpful intelligence in the worlds of spirit.
The daily practice of deep relaxation and a prayerful attitude over a
long period of years seems to be the only proven way of hearing that
“still small voice” within—a voice which may, in fact, be from your
personal helper in the world of spirit. But, I repeat, this is a most
hazardous business. The pages of history are filled with acts which
stemmed from self-delusion with respect to “heavenly guidance”.

33. Can I put much trust in what I am told by a Spiritualist

medium?
Yes. No. And then again maybe, perhaps.
Today, the very best mediums almost never give sittings to any but
their closest personal friends or to serious researchers. My sixteen
years of searching over much of the world has disclosed only a few
dozen such persons.
Communications from spirits closest to the earth plane—the easiest
to obtain—are, for the most part, useless as well as inaccurate. This
covers 95 percent of all survival information which comes through a
medium on the platform of a Spiritualist church. The problem with
such mediumistic communications is that the most readily contacted
persons are those who are on the nearest astral planes. These are often
recent arrivals and are no more knowledgeable than before they left
their physical bodies. This, combined with the “noise”—or the sheer
difficulty of communication—gives rise to misconceptions.
Communications from more elevated spirits also suffer greatly in
transmission. A crude analogy is a game in which several people sit on
chairs spaced closely together in a row or circle. A sentence is whis-
pered into the ear of one person who quickly whispers it into the ear of
the next person, and so on until the last person. When the message in
final form is then repeated to the group, everyone has a good laugh at
the gross distortion that has taken place in the transmission.
No specific rules of guidance can be given. In general, however,
the communications that come through a medium who makes a “busi-

119
 ness” of his or her mediumship, charges for sittings, and handles one
client after another, hour after hour and day after day, should not be
taken too seriously.*
For this reason, a bereaved person should strictly avoid trying to
contact the loved one through a medium. At best the medium will be
tapping the sitter’s mind for a description of the deceased. When the
medium says, “I see standing beside you.”.. and then proceeds to des-
cribe fairly accurately the departed loved one, the medium is usually
not in touch with the departed. Moreover, some of the more mis-
chievous of the earthbound spirits—the only level which most such
mediums can reach—delight in masquerading as the departed person
and can be quite adept at putting on a performance that convinces the
sitter that he or she is in touch with the loved one.
It is infinitely more useful for the bereaved to sit quietly every few
days and send prayerful and loving thoughts to the loved one. Again,
study Fig. 32 and Fig. 35. Visualize where the loved one is. Speak out
loud as though the loved one is present. Often, in fact, he is! Wish him
well in his new surroundings. Of course, tell him that you miss him but
that you are no longer grieving because you know that he has returned
home, that he is among loved ones who are looking after his every want.
State that you are so very thankful for his love and companionship, and
that you are content that you will again meet and continue your rela-
tionship—if that then suits your mutual purposes. All of this is a far
more effective way to spend time than running from medium to
medium—and it saves money!

34. Twice you have mentioned the many pitfalls that you and your
fellow researchers were obliged to avoid in communicating through
even the very best of mediums. What about the persons in spirit who
try to communicate with you? Is it easy for them to communicate?
Yes and no. It is relatively easy for those on the lower astral or even
the lowest part of the middle astral planes to communicate. But they

* There are exceptions, of course. In the past 50 years, few of the really great mediums had
other means of financial support than the modest fees received from their sitters.
Robert R. Leichtman, M.D., in a private communication discussing this point, says:
“There are those who assume anyone who dares to charge for a reading or sitting with a
medium is instantly declaring himself to be a fraud. True, I see legions of half-baked, half-
witted ‘mediums’ and ‘psychics’ running amok at meetings, hustling readings and making a
lot of money. Nevertheless a good medium is worth something. Good advice is worth
something. People have no problem paying their minister for his services. The pseudo-
spiritual and sanctimonious often protest that ‘what comes from spirit should be as freely
given as it was freely accepted’. That sounds good but it is a bit impractical, as one does
have to pay grocery bills and rent despite what may be great psychic talent. The time it
takes to develop the talent takes time from other activities also, and this should be compen-
sated”.

120
 are of little help in providing useful knowledge for mankind.
It is extremely difficult for those on the mental and causal planes to
communicate, even through the best of mediums. The difficulties
experienced by spirits in trying to communicate are outlined in great
detail in the book Gilda Communicates, by Ruth White and Mary Swain-
son, in the chapter, “Technical Difficulties”.
For a short explanation of these difficulties, consider the comments
of Leslie Flint, the great English medium. Flint’s mediumship is of a
very rare kind. His helpers in the spirit world use ectoplasm from his
body to create an etheric mass a few feet from his head. The spirit com-
municator “talks into” this substitute “voice box” and the spirit’s voice
becomes audible to all persons in the room. In the course of 50 years,
many hundreds of spirit beings have communicated through this sys-
tem. In his book, Voices in the Dark, Flint reports an important sitting
as follows:
“A spirit with a marked French accent introduced himself as Richet
and, in the course of conversation with him, we learned he was the late
Professor Charles Richet, the eminent French physiologist who in 1905
was President of the Society for Psychical Research in London, and
who was winner of a Nobel Prize in 1913.
“He told us that not only must the communicating entity lower his
own frequency to the lower one of earth but simultaneously he must
remember what his voice sounded like in his lifetime and recapture
memories of happenings which will give proof of his identity to the per-
son with whom he wishes to communicate. When the professor was
asked by a sitter whether he could see and hear people at a seance, he
answered that it depended on the amount of concentration he put into
the effort to do so. If he focused his mind sufficiently, he could both
hear and see people on earth; but he found it simpler to apprehend their
thoughts before they were uttered as words.
“He grew quite testy when someone suggested that sometimes the
voices of communicators from the spirit world did not sound exactly
the same as their voices during their life, and he said it was hardly likely
they would sound the same, seeing they were not using the same vocal
chords they had in life. He added that we must take into account, also,
that the communicating spirit was trying to concentrate on three
different things at the same time while communicating. Most of what
Richet said made sense to me. I had often heard communicators
remark on the difficulty of ‘speaking through this box thing which
wobbles about all the time’, or say plaintively how confusing it was to
remember some event which would prove beyond doubt who they were
while concentrating so hard on other things. As the discarnate Profes-
sor Richet remarked rather grumpily: ‘The miracle is that we can com-
municate at all’”.
Yes, indeed, it is a miracle that we and they can communicate at all.

121
But in spite of all of the troubles at both ends of the line, we are begin-
ning to bridge the gap between our physical world and the worlds of
spirit.

35. Mediums and other psychic persons speak about “raising the
vibrations” when trying to contact those who have died. Is this just
nonsense?
No. Recent advances in physics and related fields of science show
that matter—indeed, apparently everything so far encountered in the
cosmos—is composed of energy, which is vibratory by nature. Con-
sider the following analogy. If we put a pan containing ice on the stove
and apply heat, the atomic particles increase their vibratory action.
Thus the vibratory rate of the newly-formed water is higher than that of
the solid ice. Applying more heat to the water raises its vibratory rate
still more. Then the application of still more heat can cause the water
particles to fly into space. The resulting steam represents energy at an
even greater level of atomic vibration.
Conditions relating to thought, both in this and in the astral world,
represent energy levels and vibratory rates far beyond that of steam. We
have every reason to believe that this admittedly crude analogy of chang-
ing vibratory levels of ice-water-steam apply to thoughts in the physical,
astral, mental, and spiritual or celestial levels. Each succeedingly higher
level of thought in the worlds of spirit represents even higher rates of
vibration.
Look at this the other way around. People living on the mental and
causal level cannot come directly through the mind of a medium. Their
rate of vibration is so high that they might damage the medium’s brain if
they attempted direct contact. Communications from these higher
levels have to be relayed down in steps. Look again at Fig. 35 and note
particularly items D and F. Often the “relay stations” or “transformers”
that serve to step down the vibratory level cause a loss in content, a loss
in quality—and may even represent a gross distortion of what the
higher-level being is trying to pass down.

36. Can a person ever visit the astral planes while still residing in
the physical body?
A very definite “yes”, and this offers one of the most exciting pros-
pects for humanity’s development in the century ahead.
Usually when we go into deep sleep during the early portion of each
night’s rest, the astral body leaves the physical body but remains con-
nected with it via the so-called silver cord. As it is of course already
existing in the astral world, it has no trouble traveling at that level.
What it can or may do in such travel is too long and involved a topic for
us to discuss here. I can say, however, that it is able to gain knowledge
that will be of help to the conscious mind upon its return. (This is one

122
reason why many people learn the habit of saying, “Well, let me sleep
on that matter”.
Senile persons and persons nearing death often find that their astral
bodies are starting to spend time away from their physical bodies even
in the daytime, when they are judged to be awake. This, of course, is
the basis of so much of the research reported by Kübler-Ross, Moody,
Osis, Crookall and others.
What is still more exciting is that through meditation techniques it
is possible to sit down in a quiet and secure spot, relax, and then attune
to the higher planes and let the astral body travel. Remember, the levels
of mind and soul are contained in the astral body so that they, too, are
out of the body. This allows direct mental contact with intelligences on
the astral plane. Not only can such contact vastly increase the knowl-
edge available to the meditator, but it can also bring to him the in-
creased wisdom that can be gleaned from much older and wiser souls.

37. Often small children insist that they see and hear other
children or playmates which are invisible to adults. When they get
older they seem to grow out of this. Are their “playmates” a figment of
their imagination?
Most certainly not! We have recently learned that up until the age
of six or seven, the eyes of many children can see light at wavelengths
considerably shorter than those detected by the eyes of adults. But they
also have a high sensitivity to energies outside our known electromag-
netic spectrum. Sensitivity to this latter type of energy in adults is
possessed only by those relatively rare individuals who are known as
clairaudients and clairvoyants. This ability of small children enables
them to see and tune into what we call the astral or etheric world—per-
haps into the middle astral planes.
A recent study has found that a large number of children today
have imaginary playmates or companions such as an invisible older
friend. What’s more, the same study has found that having a make-
believe friend is apparently good for a child.
A recent Psychology Today article says that up to 65 percent of the
kids in a study group reported having imaginary friends. The article
points out that only a generation ago, children with imagined play-
mates were thought to be hallucinating and “dangerously removed from
reality”.
Researchers have since found that children who have make-believe
companions are different from those who do not—they are said to be
less aggressive and more cooperative, they smile more, they show a
greater ability to concentrate, they are seldom bored, and their lang-
uage is richer and more advanced.

38. Why is the word “causal” combined with the word “mental” in
 identifying the next to the highest plane shown in Figs. 32, 33, 35 and 36?
Many persons know little or nothing about the role that thoughts
play in creating our material world. Hence, let me give some specific
examples to show how thought actually causes things to happen in our
everyday world—and in the worlds of spirit.
Consider this book; every facet of it is the result of many individual
thoughts by hundreds of people. The words you read are the product of
my thoughts. The paper was made on machinery perfected over
decades by hundreds of individual thinkers. A typesetter had to utilize
his thinking process to design the book and punch the correct keys on
his machine. Then there were the contributions made by the printer,
the bookbinder, the transportation company, the bookseller, etc.
Let’s consider our own bodies. The knowledge acquired in the last
30 years regarding the subject of psychosomatic illness shows clearly
that our thoughts can and do affect the several trillion cells in our own
bodies and bring about either health or illness.
In Part I, I presented the concept that your mind is the programmer
of your brain (the computer). Your brain is of no functional value
unless your lower self—your very wise unconscious mind—programs
the body on all details of its routine daily functioning. Unless your con-
scious mind thinks thoughts, you cannot turn from one page to the next,
nor can you weigh and evaluate these thoughts that my fingers are
pecking out and putting on paper.
In my book Healers and the Healing Process, I gave details of a
scientific report of how Olga and Ambrose Worrall, seated in Balti-
more, Maryland, focused their thoughts on a laboratory 600 miles away
in Atlanta, Georgia. They undertook to use their minds to accelerate the
growth rate of individual shoots of rye grass planted in a pot in the
laboratory. They did increase the growth rate by more than 500 per-
cent. Later Mrs. Worrall, still seated in Baltimore, focused her thoughts
and healing energies on an atomic cloud chamber in the Atlanta labora-
tory. She displaced matter in the cloud chamber sufficiently so that it
was possible to record the resulting disturbance on photographic film.
In subsequent research, Mrs. Worrall succeeded in changing the
molecular bonding between hydrogen and oxygen in water—one of the
most stable substances in our physical world. (Recall that your body
and brain are largely composed of water.)
With these few examples of our growing understanding of how our
thoughts can cause effects in the world around us, it will not be such a
great step to explain why the term causal is coupled with the term men-
tal in describing the levels nearest to the level of the Godhead. Most of
what we have in this physical three-dimensional world, including most
of our inventions, first existed in the mental and causal worlds.
Please refer again to Fig. 35. Note path A. This indicates how a
soul or spirit in the lowest astral plane can obsess a person living on the

124
earth plane—that is, cause that person to be possessed. Paths D and F
indicate how friendly and helpful souls or spirits on the middle and
highest astral planes can serve us as guides, protectors and teachers. If
you can accommodate these ideas, then it should not be too great a step
to contemplate that extremely wise intelligences on the plane nearest
our Creator have thought up many good ideas far in advance of anything
we yet have on the earth plane. This is the true source, the pathway of
humanity’s highest creative work—for artists, sculptors, writers, medi-
cal discoveries, inventions, etc. It is represented by path F'.
Thus we now have a rapidly growing basis for understanding the
power that thought has in the whole scheme of creation. We can
understand as never before the causal nature of thought.

39.
9. How do you personally feel about reincar ion?
Perhaps I should put my personal experience on record. I grew up
in a strictly orthodox, midwestern Christian Protestant denomination.
As the decades of my study, searching and world travels passed, I con-
tinued to reject the subject of reincarnation. Not until I was well past
the age of 60 had I assembled sufficient knowledge to change my views.
Not until I had logged hundreds of hours of contact, via mediums, with
beings in the worlds of spirit did I find the evidence overwhelming and
convincing. Only then did my conscious mind accept the evidence so
that I could become comfortable with the concept of reincarnation and
convinced of its reality.
Hence, with this background, I understand the feelings of those
who have closed minds on the subject. As stated at the start of this
book, I have no desire to preach any dogma, gospel, religion, creed or
“ism”.
In the next nine questions and their answers, I deal with the subject
of reincarnation. While some people in our western culture will con-
sider these comments with an open mind, many readers will not. In
fact, the latter may even label the whole subject “stuff and nonsense,
unbelievable, obnoxious and distasteful”.
If you are one of the latter, simply skip over the remaining questions
and their answers and move on to Part V, so as to concentrate on the
overall theme of this book.

40. Perhaps you should clarify what is meant by the term reincar-
nation.
Yes, that is very important. There are many misconceptions about
the term. Webster’s New Third International Dictionary defines:
Incarnate—invested with flesh or bodily form.
Discarnate—having no physical body.
Reincarnate—rebirth in new bodies or new forms of life, especially
a rebirth of the soul in a new body.

125
 I use the term strictly as “rebirth of the soul in a new body”—a new
human body. The Eastern concept of metempsychosis, or the transmi-
gration of souls, maintains that human souls can go into animal bodies.
However, there is no evidence I am aware of to support this belief.

41. How can reincarnation be a fact when the majority of theolo-

gians, priests, rabbis and ministers do not accept the concept?
A good and obvious question. Let us assume that back over the
years you had asked the following three questions of a prestigious panel
of 1,000 of the world’s leading medical doctors, psychiatrists and psy-
chologists:
1. In 1930, you asked the question: Is it possible that your theory
that illness stems almost entirely from invasion of the body by bacteria,
germs and viruses is seriously in error? Probably 90 percent would have
answered, “Preposterous! Our medical theories have evolved over
many centuries of treating people. Modern medical science cannot be
in error”. Yet only a few decades later, it became recognized that most
illness develops when stress and/or our thoughts and emotions trigger a
chemical imbalance that only then allows the bacteria, germs or viruses
in our body to take control. Thus, in only a few decades we learned that
perhaps 75 percent of all illness is triggered psychosomatically—and
that what we had thought we knew was only partially correct.*
2. In 1950: Is there any truth in the ancient Chinese concept of acu-
puncture meridians at or near the surface of the body? Probably 90 per-
cent would have answered, “No, that is merely ancient superstition”.
Yet only thirty-five years later, perhaps the majority would answer with
a qualified “yes”. Many of this group might be found using acupuncture
on their patients.
3. Today: Is the brain the same thing as the mind? It is likely that
the majority would answer a resounding “yes”. But a few who are
actively engaged in brain-mind research are beginning to have doubts.
Some frankly say it does not look as though we will ever be able to
explain the human mind in terms of the brain.
Now, what is the significance of these questions and answers?
Merely this: the human body has been under study for thousands of
years, yet it is only in this most recent instant in history that some of our
cherished concepts about the human body and its functioning have been
found to be false. Is there any reason to think that our religious pro-
fessionals (the theologians, ministers, priests and rabbis) have the final
answer on life and death? Hardly! The next time you encounter one of
these, ask, “Please tell me exactly what happens to me after I die”.

* This changing trend is nicely detailed in Beyond the Magic Bullet by Bernard Dixon,
published in 1978 by George Allen & Unwin, London, Boston and Sydney.

126
 Do not judge them harshly if their answers to questions on reincarna-
tion are not fully satisfying.
The current explosion of knowledge about our universe is cause for
comment in a column by Vermont Royster, “Toward Understanding”,
in The Wall Street Journal:
“It seems hard to realize but in my lifetime man has learned more
about the universe in which he lives than in all the lifespans of all the
generations that went before.
“In little more than half a century we have made prodigious leaps in
our knowledge about the infinitesimal particles that make up the
physical world and about the powerful forces that govern the infinite
space in which this world floats as a tiny speck.
“Yet here is a curious thing. In the contemplation of man himself,
of his dilemmas, of his place in this universe, we are little further along
than when time began. We are still left with questions of who we are
and why we are and where we are going.
“So for all that growing knowledge we are left with the ancient cry
from the Book of Job: ‘Where is wisdom to be found? And where is the
place of understanding?’”
Apropos of our expanding knowledge, there may be a parallel be-
tween the concepts of acupuncture and reincarnation. Both have been
around for thousands of years. Until recently the medical profession in
the western nations did not believe in acupuncture, and the clergy and
people did not believe in reincarnation. After tens of millions of Ameri-
cans heard about acupuncture as a result of former President Nixon’s
trip to China, they started questioning their physicians. The result has
been that in just a very few years, American medical practitioners have
investigated acupuncture, found it beneficial and are using it.
The recent books relating to past life readings and the use of hyp-
nosis for regression to pre-natal lives have stimulated the thinking of
millions of Americans to look carefully at the subject of reincarnation.
A recent study showed that perhaps 20 percent of Americans now be-
lieve in reincarnation. Only time will tell to what extent the thinking of
the clergy will move in the same direction.
So the fact that your religious counselor cannot answer your ques-
tion should certainly indicate that neither he nor you has any basis for
totally rejecting the concept of reincarnation. Generally speaking, reli-
gious spokesmen are as ignorant of known facts of life after death as
modern medical scientists are of many of the factors determining the
health and well-being of the body and mind.

42. I am mystified as to how reincarnation actually works. Can

you give me some specific guidance on this bewildering matter?
I can certainly try. Let’s cut out long, wordy discourses and take
the simple picture story approach. But let me caution you that what fol-

127
 lows is a highly simplified presentation of an extremely complicated
subject, which we are only beginning to understand.
In recent years, as the world’s raw materials have become scarce
and higher in price, there has been a trend toward recycling. Whereas
in the past we shipped vast quantities of materials to the dump or
incinerator, today we have started to reclaim or recycle materials. Now
we carefully gather up empty aluminum beer and soda cans and sell
them back to the mill. At the recycling plant they are melted and
molded into ingots. The ingots can then be used to extrude shapes for
storm windows, automobile parts, or more beer and soda cans. Similar
recycling plants are set up for reuse of automobiles, glass containers,
newspapers, shipping cartons and many other useful and increasingly
valuable materials.
Has it not occurred to you that if death is the end for each of us, our
Creator’s plan is a very wasteful one? What in all the world is more
precious than a human soul? Stop for a moment and think about your-
self. Do you have any material item that you consider more valuable
than your very own self—your soul? Does it make any sense to think
that an all-wise Creator is going to send your precious soul to the dump,
the graveyard of your dreams, the incinerator? Has not science in this
century shown us that energy cannot be destroyed—that it can only be
changed from one state or vibration to another state or vibration?
What could be more logical than the recycling of your soul?
Therefore, if you will permit a bit of fanciful humor or a late 20th-
century parable, let us consider Fig. 36, “The Original Recycling Plant”.
Let’s start our discussion at the bottom left of the diagram. Here I
stand. At age 76, I have traversed much of this lifetime. I am headed
for the elevator. Sometime in the years ahead I will cast off this worn
old body. I will be ready for a free ride to some higher plane of being.
I see three elevator doors, all closed. Which one of these will open
and offer a ride? Well, if I have learned anything in this life, I have
learned that this is a world of cause and effect. I have learned that
nobody can cheat or beat the rules of the game. Hence, the door that
opens will be determined by the life I have led. I, like all others, will be
judged as falling into one of the three categories shown in Fig. 33. on
page 102. Please take a moment to reread the descriptions of levels A, B
and C on page 101.
If I have failed to learn the rules that have been spelled out over the
centuries by the enlightened souls who have done their best to illumi-
nate the path to a happy, future life, I have no one to blame but myself.
In the school of life I must then be judged a failure. I get an F on my
report card for this life. The door marked C opens and I soon find
myself in some very uninviting surroundings when I am kicked off at
the second floor.
One who did somewhat better in learning his lessons and putting

128
 CELESTIAL PLANES

6th

CAUSAL AND
MENTAL PLANES

5th

HIGHEST ASTRAL PLANES

4th

MIDDLE ASTRAL PLANES

3rd

LOWEST ASTRAL PLANES

PURGATORY, HELL,
SHEOL, HADES, ETC.

2nd

1st
PLANET EARTH

Fig. 36. The original “recycling plant”

129
 them in practice will be welcomed for a ride on Elevator B to the third
floor. On the other hand, for the person who has been very diligent in
learning and putting into practice the admonitions illustrated in Fig. 34,
bingo—door A opens and he or she takes the express to the fourth floor.
Let’s assume that I get only as far as the second floor. I will have three
options:
a. Stay where I now find myself—for a very long time, even
centuries by earth time.
b. Start looking for some beings whose light shines through the
gloom and who offer to lead me upward to the third floor where I can get
some more schooling.
c. Because of my gross preoccupation with myself and burning
desire to get back to my old haunts, I stumble into the down elevator.
If the latter happens, I find myself again squeezed into a small
physical body for still another life on the surface of planet Earth. The
recycling plant has done its job! Or to put it more crudely by using the
terminology of the computer programmer—“garbage in, garbage out”. I
am merely back at square one and have to start all over again. In fact, if
my life has been particularly hurtful to others, I may find I have some
additional handicaps to carry in this new life. For centuries the oriental
religions have used the term bad karma to cover this accumulation of
unlearned lessons.
If a person finds himself on the third floor, the first order of business
is to relax and enjoy life. In principle, it is possible to apply oneself
sufficiently to earn a ride on up to the fourth floor. On the other hand, if
the individual prefers to come again to the challenge of living and learn-
ing on the surface of this fascinating and often frustrating planet, he may
eventually take the down elevator back to the first floor. There is no
pushing for a decision. It is always up to the individual.
When a person finds himself on the fourth floor (having arrived by
express from ground level, or the local from the third floor), he is really in
for a delightful period of post mortem life. (One of my humor-loving
friends says that in any description of the summerland we should aban-
don the old phrases of “pearly gates” and “streets paved with gold”. We
should talk in terms of wall-to-wall carpeting, air conditioning and
celestial stereo! This is not as facetious as it sounds. We learned in
answers to questions 6 and 32 the crucial role our thoughts play in form-
ing our reality in this nitty-gritty everyday world. We will find that in
“heaven” or “hell” our thoughts will play an even greater role in creating
our “reality”.)
Here, as always, the law of cause and effect is operating. If a person’s
mental and spiritual growth continues to the point of “graduating”, he
will undergo what has been referred to as the second death. This involves
shedding the astral body that has served as a containment vehicle; then
the mind and soul can progress to the higher level of vibrations of which

130
the next planes are composed. The person is thus born on the mental
and causal planes.
If, however, the soul is not qualified to move upward, it has the
option of remaining on the higher astral plane until such time as it may
decide to have another go at life on the earth plane.
Once the person arrives on the mental and causal planes, he loses
most of the detailed interest in what is going on far below on the earth
plane. However, if because of great altruism and compassion for his
fellow beings the person wishes to return for still another earth walk,
this is the last level from which a return can be undertaken.
Much of the material in this book has come from our friends now
living on the mental and causal planes. Most of these left the earth
plane within the last 35 years. There is much reluctance for any of
these intelligences to come back to the chaotic world of today. Some
say frankly that they will wait and take a look at things in the twenty-
first century. Who are we to suggest they do otherwise? They need be
in no hurry.
If they continue to work and study and grow mentally and spirit-
ually, they eventually have the possibility of taking the local elevator
which makes the short run to one higher level—the celestial planes.
Again, due to the change in the vibratory levels of matter, this involves
shedding what has loosely been called the “mental body” and accepting
what is known as the final rebirth.
Since, as I’ve pointed out elsewhere, modern man can hardly con-
ceive of the level of existence of the celestial planes, we can end our
effort to explain reincarnation here. There is no recycling from this level.

43. Frankly, I just do not like the concept of reincarnation. I do

not like the mechanical-like aspect. It is almost like being strapped to
a big rotating water wheel where I come up into the invigorating air
and sunlight, only to be submerged again in the murky waters of life on
the earth. Isn’t there any way I can get loose from the wheel and escape
the cycle of birth, growth, death and rebirth? Be specific.
Yes, you and everyone can get off the wheel of death and rebirth.
Here is a time-proven formula.
Let us assume you have lived your life in accordance with the pre-
cepts diagrammed in Fig. 34, the “Proven Path for Individual Soul
Development”. Hence, on departing your physical body, you will be
entitled to “take the elevator” directly to the highest astral plane.
Assume that your life here is joyful, beautiful and filled with happiness,
and that you continue to develop mentally, emotionally and spirit-
ually—what our enlightened forefathers termed growing in grace.
Someday, in the great scheme of things, you may find yourself evolved
to the very uppermost levels of the higher astral. Further growth is
open to you by two different paths. You can gain more experience of

131
 growth by returning and taking on a new set of circumstances on the
earth plane, or you can shed your astral body and become fitted to live
in the more refined and invigorating mental and causal worlds.
Since your question indicates that you are bent on escaping the
wheel of rebirth with its constant dunkings, trials and tribulations on
the earth plane, you would probably decide to push on upward in your
search for fulfillment. So you accept the second death and find yourself
reborn on the mental and causal planes.
Arriving on these planes, you will find, in due course, that once
more you have a choice of two paths: return again for further mental,
emotional and spiritual growth on the earth plane, or shed your so-
called mental body and take the one-way elevator going up to the
celestial planes. You say, “Excelsior!” and take the final death and
rebirth.
It’s all there in Fig. 36. You may be amused at the seemingly child-
ish representations in this diagrams, but you cannot go wrong in
betting your life that this is the way it is.
Eureka! You have made it. Congratulations. No longer are you
strapped to the wheel of rebirth.
Sorry. There is a catch. Recall my reference to cause and effect.
Each of us can ride the desirable UP elevators only if we have continued
to grow mentally, emotionally and spiritually. And what is the safest
and most certain way to accomplish this growth? Simply by applying
the precepts in Fig. 34, the nine-step staircase which has as its destina-
tion everlasting life. (If this were the conventional “how to” book, we
could observe: “Just take the nine easy steps and become a god yourself.
No need to bother with reincarnation”.
But, you ask, “Do you have any proof that this can be done? Be
specific; give some example—some case histories”.
While in trance, the psychic Edgar Cayce described the past lives of
1,200 people in readings that were in great detail and which involved
many lives for each person. Violet M. Shelley, in her book Reincarna-
ion Unnecessary, analyzed these 1,200 records. She found that in 18
cases the persons were told that when this life was finished they might
choose not to return.
What was so special about these 18 persons? You will be happy to
know that they were people like you. The list included housewives, a
governess, a real estate salesman, a psychiatrist, an architect, an
actress, a writer, a secretary, a life insurance representative, etc. What
did these people have in common? From my study of the data carefully
assembled by Ms. Shelley, it seems that all had lived previously and were
now living lives that had taken them far up the stairway in Fig. 34.
Now for more specifics which confirm that you can get off the wheel
of rebirth if and when you make up your own mind that you want to.
With the aid of one of the deep-trance mediums mentioned in the first

132
 paragraph of the Acknowledgments, we discussed this subject with
numerous friends we have acquired on the mental and causal planes.
(The subject cannot be intelligently discussed with any dwellers below
this level, as they know only what is below them. They lack the neces-
sary perspective. And, since we the researchers are lacking in cosmic
consciousness, our mentalities are not sufficiently developed to com-
prehend the perspective from the cosmic levels.)
One of our collaborators from the causal and mental level is the
previously mentioned Dr. William F.G. Swann, cosmic ray scientist,
former physics professor at the universities of Yale, Minnesota, and
Chicago, and Swarthmore College. Swann died in Philadelphia in
1962.* In discussing reincarnation with our friend Swann, he said that
he has made the decision that when the current research project on
which his team is working is completed, he will accept final rebirth on
the celestial planes.
A similar conversation was had with George W. Russell, the Irish
writer, poet, artist and mystic known as A.E., who died in 1935. He is
strongly tempted to return once more to his “beloved green isle”, as he
calls it. But for now he will delay the decision and see what develops
during the next half century of earth time. His story, like those of
Swann and many others contacted on this level, shows that it is possi-
ble to escape the wheel of rebirth. So also do the lives of the 18 persons
mentioned in the Cayce readings.
Thus the answer to your question is a qualified “yes”. But we must
be completely honest and say that so far our research has not turned up
any formula for accomplishing this objective other than that which is
diagrammed so explicitly in Figs. 32 and 36.
To all of this, one more comment should be added. Several months
after writing the first part of this answer, the scientist, mystic and
author Itzhak Bentov, one of my closest friends, was one of 271 people
who died in the Chicago DC-10 air crash.† Some months before this
accident, Bentov, in an interview published in the March 1978 issue of
New Age, expressed his thoughts as follows:
“New Age: In your cosmology, what about the concept of death?
“Bentov: The universe is an information storage system. It is a
teaching and learning machine, and it’s ridiculous to think that the
universe is going to throw out that information that has been collected

* A preliminary copy of the manuscript of this book was submitted for criticism to H.T.E.
Hertzberg, anthropologist and parapsychologist. When studying his marked-up copy of
the manuscript, I was interested to find the following penciled note, with an asterisk
placed as above: “My brother-in-law, an astrophysicist, studied with Dr. Swann in
Swarthmore in the 1930’s. My wife, also a Swarthmore graduate, remembers Swann
also. I even met him there myself”.
† Author of Stalking the Wild Pendulum: On the Mechanics of Consciousness, Dutton 1977.

133
over, say, eighty years. I look at the body the way you might look at a
car. You may use a car for, say, 80,000 miles and then junk it—but you
wouldn’t junk the driver along with the car! The driver goes on. So
naturally consciousness goes on and keeps collecting information over
many, many lifetimes.
“New Age: So you feel we just keep getting reincarnated on this
planet.
“Bentov: Until we learn how the system works. The purpose of the
lesson is to find out how it works, and once you know, then you’re out
of the system. Then you stand aside and look at the other people
finding out for themselves”.
Here Bentov, with his great ability to put important ideas into easily
understood form, is telling us, “Yes, you can get off the wheel of
rebirth—just as soon as you find out how the system works!”*
And after all, this is the purpose of this book. When we fully com-
prehend the concepts in Figs. 32, 34, 35 and 36, our consciousness will
arrive at the point where we have most of what we need to know about
how the system works.

44. We hear much about people getting “readings” of their past

lives. Some of these come through mediums. Some are obtained
through hypnosis. How valid are these readings?
They have very little validity, as I see it. My associates and I have
researched this question rather carefully.
In my case, I sought out seven persons in the United States and
England who are said to be among the best such past-life readers.
Among six personal readings there was absolutely no correlation, even
for identical time slots! None of these contained anything that could be
considered in the least evidential or meaningful. Only one reading,
said to have come from an elevated being, fell into a totally different
category, and three years of painstaking study of the material indicates
that it has considerable validity.
The batting average for hypnotic regression to past lives seems to
be slightly higher than the readings through mediumistic persons—but
not by a wide margin. For example, some of my research colleagues
regressed a number of persons and carefully recorded all of the detailed
information on the purported past lives. One year later the entire
activity was repeated. Not one item was the same! The fantasy creating
capability of the human mind is staggering.

* A few of the many persons who submitted criticisms and suggestions on the early draft
manuscript of this book—before the inclusion of this quotation of Bentov’s views—ex-
pressed the opinion that I made it sound too easy to break the recycling system. One
critic wrote several paragraphs on this subject. I feel that his views should be made
available to the serious seeker and have therefore included them in Appendix C.

134
 Let me make my position clear. Past life records are a reality. Every-
thing that ever happened, every thought ever held, every word ever
spoken is permanently embedded in the fabric of the cosmos—on the
master recording tape, if you want to call it that. But very few souls on
earth today can easily and accurately tap this material and operate the
retrieval system so as to get an accurate and precise readout of the data.
In 1973, twenty-seven years after his death, Edgar Cayce expressed
his present thoughts on this subject of past life readings. As reported in
the book Edgar Cayce Returns, by Robert R. Leichtman, M.D. and David
Kendrick Johnson, Cayce had this to say of his latest thoughts on the
subject:
“Past life reading is a relatively rare gift. There are maybe twenty
people in the United States who can really do it, although there are
many more who say they can. I believe there are only four on the West
Coast at the moment, in spite of the fact that it looks like thousands.
Most of these other people are making something up. I am talking in
particular about people who have perhaps four standard plots which
they give out to their clients, with only little shadings of difference.
“It would be interesting for someone to go through your records or
David’s—or even mine. It would be seen that no two life readings are
the same, and that each reading is helpful to the client. There’s always
a helpful reason why the client is being made aware of this informa-
tion—it’s not just another pretty story.
“But when you begin to find a pattern of similar plots in a psychic’s
file of past life readings, then you begin to realize that perhaps this
psychic is behaving in a way that’s not quite proper.
“I would like to add, too, that there are several games on the market
which purport to help people remember their past lives. They are
almost entirely worthless. The people who developed them are really
not what they pretend to be. As a matter of fact, the two people I am
thinking of at the moment are knowingly fraudulent. They are after the
aggrandizement of their bank accounts”.
Thus, in view of the scarcity of mediums who in fact do have the
ability to use helpers in the realms of spirit to tap the Akashic records,
and in view of the vast amount of deception—self and otherwise—sur-
rounding the use of hypnosis for past-life regression, my personal
advice for anyone who cares to take it is, “Forget about trying to pull
away the veil. Start in right now to concentrate ever more sincerely in
building into this life the tenets set forth in Fig. 34”.

45. I have had intelligent pets with wonderful personalities. What

happened to them when they died?
A long cherished pet is just as certain to survive death of its physical
body as you are. Cats and dogs have provided a substantial amount of
evidence on this point over the years. There are even well-documented

135
 cases of the survival of pet monkeys and favorite horses. If the survival
of well-loved pets were not a fact, “heaven” or the afterlife would be a
less happy place for animal lovers all over the world.
Unlike man, the lower animals do not normally possess individual
souls. Each species has what is known as a group soul. All wild ani-
mals and animals raised by man for food return to their respective
group soul upon death of their physical body. However, it seems that a
domesticated dog or cat that becomes a pet takes on a certain individ-
uality from its very personal association with its master. According to
Barbanell and others, it seems to develop a humanness that it did not
formerly possess, as a part of the friendship.* It may be a part of man’s
contribution to the evolutionary scheme to confer this attribute on
those animals who come within his care.
It could be this quality that determines the survival of a beloved pet.
Beyond the grave, the domesticated animal will not continue the pro-
cess of perfecting its individuality but will return ultimately to the
group soul of its species. But for all animal lovers, yes, when you come
to your next life, you will find your favorite pet waiting.

46. Those who believe in reincarnation talk a lot about “karma”.

What is karma? Is karma good or bad?
Many lengthy books have been written on this subject. I’ll try to
keep it simple.
This universe seems to run on two tracks, labeled cause and effect. In
my daily life, I carry out activities that help or hinder my mental and spir-
itual growth, and that of others. These actions by me are labeled causes.
The results of these actions are called effects. If my actions are beneficial
and help me and my associates or family to grow mentally and spiritually,
the effects will be good. This is called good karma. If the actions hurt my
mental and spiritual growth or that of others, they are called bad karma.†
A day of reckoning comes for each of us. It is as sure as the prover-
bial “death and taxes”. My good and bad actions will be considered in
determining which of the three astral planes will be my new home.
Being human, we each generate good and bad karma. As in the
game of baseball, it is the batting average that counts. Hence it is
prudent to try to store up far more good karma than bad.

* Maurice Barbanell, This is Spiritualism, Spiritualist Press, London, 1959.

† A reader well versed in the eastern religions and/or Theosophy may think that this is an
excessively simplified discussion of good and bad karma. It is intended as such. There is
reason to believe that much of the traditional concept of karma is as distorted and
nonproductive as are many portions of the dogmas and creeds of the various religions.
Discussions with present occupants of the mental and causal planes indicate that until
man evolves sufficiently to understand the true nature of karma and the whole reincarna-
tion process, he will do well to stick to basics.

136
 To be honest, I must acknowledge that the concept of karma is not
universally accepted. There are those who think that no matter how
greedy, lazy, dissolute, jealous and hateful a person may be in this life,
all such actions are forgiven, and a life of eternal bliss awaits the saint
and the sinner alike. As the evidence shows, however, such thinking is
unfounded.

47. I might want to look more deeply into what people around the
world have thought about reincarnation. Where can I find the best
source of information?
Just as I finished writing on reincarnation and constructing the dia-
gram in Fig. 36, a friend lent me Reincarnation: The Phoenix Fire Mys-
tery, by Joseph Head and S.L. Cranston. If I had had this book thirty
years ago, it would have greatly speeded up my own research. It is by
far the finest summary I have found of the centuries of East-West
dialogue on death and rebirth from the worlds of religion, science, psy-
chology, parapsychology, philosophy, art and literature, and from great
thinkers of the past and present.
It is gratifying to learn that what I have presented in this book on
the subject of reincarnation is in no way contradicted by this monu-
mental study by Head and Cranston.

48. Now a final but very important question on reincarnation. Let

us say that I accept the concept of reincarnation. Will such a belief
assure that the quality of my life will be any better here—and hereafter?
An emphatic—in fact, a most resounding—no!
Did the beliefs of the Crusaders who swept down through Europe to
Asia Minor cause them to refrain from ruthless slaughter of 80,000 of
their fellow human beings in just one of their many battles?
Did the beliefs of members and leaders of the Church in Europe pre-
vent the infliction of the most horrible torture and death on many unfor-
tunate people during the Inquisition?
Have the religious beliefs of the millions of people who make up our
Western civilization prevented us from trying to exterminate each
other in two devastating wars just in my lifetime?
Of course not, even though all such actions were totally at odds
with the basic teachings of love and compassion which form the very
core of such beliefs. Why should we expect that any belief—even a
belief in reincarnation—will automatically be translated into a better
life for those who hold such a belief?
In the very nature of things even good beliefs are of value only
when through constructive action they are translated into deeds that
enhance and glorify life. As an example, consider southern Asia,
where reincarnation has been actively embraced for more than 2,000
years but has often been misused. Religious and secular leaders have

137
 repeatedly used it to keep the masses under control. Hundreds of mil-
lions of believers in reincarnation in both the past and present have
used it as a crutch or an excuse to refrain from putting forth the effort to
grow mentally, emotionally and spiritually and thus better their animal-
like lives. It is all too easy to rely on the explanation that present life
problems are a result of bad karma carried over from previous
lives—and that one must be content with life, no matter how miserable.
What folly. What loss of God-given potential. Practicing a belief in
reincarnation—in the recycling of the human soul—should result in an
effort to surmount life’s present problems victoriously and thereby
accumulate a supply of good karma.
Failure to use the belief in reincarnation constructively is not
confined to the people of southern Asia. As I travel throughout the
Western world, I am appalled to see how a small amount of misinforma-
tion about reincarnation cannot only spoil the quality of a current life-
time—but also create problems that will have to be solved sooner or
later in future lifetimes. Olga Worrall, world famous healer and partici-
pant in healing research as reported in question 38, traveled almost
constantly, meeting with individuals and large groups. She once
expressed her opinions on this subject in a personal report to me, a
portion of which follows:
“As I travel here and abroad I am shocked and dismayed at some of
the things that are happening to people because of false teachings about
reincarnation. I have met dozens of St. Pauls—and I can’t even begin to
recall how many St. Johns I have met—as well as the mother of Christ.
These phony past life readings are causing the breakup of many fami-
lies—with immoral behavior stemming from the concept of soul mates’.
Let me give one example.
“I have just been asked to help in the case where a man, aged 45, at
the peak of his career, met a divorcee at a party who told him that she
was an expert on ‘life readings’. She proceeded to disclose that she and
he are ‘soul mates’ and that they must immediately take up life where
they left off in the last incarnation. Result—the man moves into her
home; she has a six-year-old son; he has a lovely and loving wife and
three children; he cannot understand why his wife objects—after all, his
‘soul mate’ must come first!
“When the man’s mother appealed to the woman to think of the
lives of the four children, the woman’s answer was, ‘We have absolutely
no responsibility for these four children. They chose to be reincarnated
into such a family situation, and they will just have to live with the
problem. This is their karma’”.
Mrs. Worrall concluded: “At the New Life Clinic in Baltimore, we
have many such people whose lives have been broken up by ‘soul mates’
and ‘life readings’—and by many who think that their specific illness or
poor health is a required carry-over from a past life. With this latter

138
 category we in most cases find that their illness stems directly from
emotional stresses and strains in this current life”.
Because of many similar experiences encountered in my own trav-
els, I have pondered as to why a person’s life can get so messed up—
and what can be done to avoid such happenings. I have concluded that
at least two main factors are involved. First, there is no fully authenti-
cated bible or handbook that sets forth the true facts on reincarnation.
Second, even if such a bible or handbook existed, many people would
fail to put its principles to work in their daily lives. The examples of the
crusaders, the inquisitors and the instigators of the wars mentioned
earlier are examples of this factor.
As to the lack of a “Reincarnation Bible”, we find that none of the
Theosophical books, none of the Rudolf Steiner or Alice Bailey books
and none of the many books on occult lore presently treat the subject in
the clear and easily understood way that the spiritual teachings of Bud-
dha are set forth in the Eightfold Path of Enlightenment and the central
teachings of Jesus are presented in Matthew, Mark, Luke and John.
This leaves a person in the situation where, “A little knowledge is a
dangerous thing”. As Professor William A. Tiller of Stanford Univer-
sity has remarked, “We have many indications that nature does a
recycling job on the individual human soul and that reincarnation is a
fact. But it seems that our present level of ignorance regarding the
workings of the cosmos is such that we really cannot comprehend more
than the merest outline of a theory of reincarnation. Hence we should
refrain from any attempt at day-to-day interpretation until we know
vastly more about this subject than we know today”.*
It is in an effort toward taking the first step at eventually creating the
much needed “Reincarnation Bible” that friends in the worlds of spirit
and I present herein Fig. 32, “The Interpenetrating Levels of Life and
Consciousness”, and Fig. 34, “The Proven Path for Individual Soul
Development”. But until others, working on both sides of the veil, carry
the work much further, it is well to put aside all such concepts as “soul
mates” and look upon “life readings” as intriguing mysteries that have
absolutely no significance for guiding one’s daily life. For now, the
material embodied in Figs. 32 and 34 will, if put into practice, assure a
better life now, and hereafter.

49. Immortality and eternal life certainly appeal to me. How can I
comprehend such a mind-stretching concept?

* Of course, my personal research has influenced me to include this statement. It is hard

to overlook or explain away the fact, as mentioned in the answer to question 44, that
readings of my purported past lives by six highly recommended persons in the United
States and England did not agree with respect to even one lifetime.

139
 Locked into our little individual lives as we are, it seems almost pre-
sumptuous to think we are made of the same stuff as God our Creator. But
this is the truth of the matter. We have no trouble thinking that God will
be alive for ages to come. Therefore, if we think of ourselves as some
small part of Him, we can visualize more clearly that we already have
eternal life. Stop thinking of eternity as something in the far-distant
future. You live in eternity now. Eternity is this instant, the next instant
and so on. You already live in eternity. After all, you cannot die!

50. One final question: Of all the messages received from all the per-
sons you have contacted in the worlds of spirit, can you single out one
which is the most helpful to those of us trying to understand these issues?
Yes. Wilfred Brandon dictated four books through the mind and
hand of Edith Ellis of New York City during the period of 1935 to 1956. In
1935, Brandon gave his credentials in Open the Door as follows:
“I was killed in 1132 in France, again in 1373 in England, and once
more I fell by the sword in 1647. I was too weary to incarnate again until
1762, when, like many other adventurous spirits, I wished to try life in
America, a life of free democracy. The New World was for me only a sol-
dier’s grave. No use of my heart or mind was made on Earth for six cen-
turies. Whatever I have made of myself as a thinker was accomplished
here. I hope to incarnate once more, but only when an Age of Reason
arrives. How far distant that time seems now!”
Here is the Brandon statement which I single out as a fitting and
helpful conclusion for Part IV:
“There is no death. That is the key to what you have to learn in the
years to come on Earth. You are all preparing to end your lives with
bodily death. You have made no preparation for going on with existence.
Most people, if they do have a belief in immortality, have such a fantastic
idea of what it will be like that they are not making plans for anything but
an eternity of idleness and some singing, for which they perhaps haven’t
the least talent.
“What a picture!
“Here we are far more interested in getting on with life than you are.
We see our wasted incarnations and wish we might have been sure of life
after death. We could have fitted ourselves to meet it had we known what
we know now”.

Having just finished reading these question and answer pages, you
may feel like the person who came out of a mind-stretching meeting and
humorously remarked, “Well, I am still confused, but now I am confused
on a higher level!” I hope you are not confused, but in the remaining por-
tion of this book you will find exciting information that should go far to
clear away any fears and doubts you may still have as to whether or not
you really will live forever.

140
 PART FIVE

The Certainty of Living Forever

 Foreword

Down through the ages, mankind in all portions of the globe has
speculated that life must continue after disintegration of the physical
body. In the foregoing pages, we have assembled and examined the
experiences and data that confirm this speculation.
Now, in these closing years of the 20th century, the long-sought
proof of survival is being generated.
Dwellers in “heaven” or “paradise” are in fact now collaborating
with more than one thousand earth dwellers in many countries in an
effort to create man’s ultimate communication system. This present
decade has witnessed the first two-way electronic communication
between the living and the so-called dead—in one case more than
twenty hours of meaningful two-way conversation on a variety of topics.
A start has been made at rending the veil between heaven and earth.

142
 CHAPTER 17

Perspectives, Predictions and Parallels

In order to comprehend the step that mankind is starting to take in

his efforts to tap higher levels of consciousness by pulling aside the veil
between heaven and earth, it will be helpful to develop some perspec-
tive. Throughout mankind’s history, there have been men and women
who have dared look beyond the present moment and dream of ways by
which the quality of life might be improved. These “dreamers” often
developed an idea that left its impact on the forward movement of soci-
ety. This movement in every field of human endeavor has resulted from
what has been called “constructive discontent” with things as they
were.
Late 20th century man looks out from his present perspective and is
horrified by what he sees—a materialistic world seemingly running
amok. He watches helplessly as some fellow passengers daily do their
utmost to destroy each other—and even the space ship on which all are
moving through the cosmos. It is in such situations that prophecies are
born.
For most of this century, there have been predictions that mankind
would develop an instrumental system to permit the enlightened souls
of “heaven” to converse with, and bring enlightenment to, persons in
fleshly bodies. Of the several dozen predictions that have been made,
these five illustrate the point:
1931. Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, medical doctor, creator of Sherlock
Holmes, and an untiring exponent of Spiritualism, returned after his
death by way of a series of messages channeled through the medium-
ship of Grace Cooke. Portions of this material are the subject of two
books edited by Ivan Cooke: Thy Kingdom Come and The Return of
Arthur Conan Doyle. Some of the unpublished material referred to
design details for electrically-activated devices to serve as an instru-
mental communication system from the spirit world. I made a visit to
the Cooke home in 1974 to investigate. I found that indeed serious
effort had been made to build the equipment, but there had been no
success.
1935. Open the Door, a book telepathically channeled by Wilfred
Brandon through Edith Ellis of New York City was published. On page
23 he states: “Yet science is on the verge of discovering the secret of life
after ‘death’; it is all but able to connect with our plane. Marconi and
those who study the marvels of the ether will in time find the connecting
wave length and we shall then be united in a common understanding of
the Law of Life”. On page 31 he continues: “We speak and the sound is

143
 forever there. We are continuously pictured there also, as on a cosmic
photographic plate”. On page 86 he says: “Your radios have already
made that plain to you. Every sound is there in space. It needs only a
mechanized device to connect the etheric world with the mortal world.
How? By discovery of the laws of vibrations which are universal and
hold on all three planes of matter—and possibly beyond them”. And on
page 179 he adds: “All of these [automatic writing and trance mediums]
are makeshifts which we must use until we can, through them, work
with your radio engineers, until we can perfect a mechanism that we can
use automatically. This is possible and will doubtless be the next step
after television”.
1944. Psychic Press published an article containing prophecies and
predictions about a heaven-to-earth communication system. The tech-
nologies already available at that time, including electronic systems,
induced the spirit world to envisage research in this field and to provide
for technical means to talk to human beings, making the hitherto-used
mediums redundant. In trance sessions, recorded in 1944, spirits of
departed scientists talked about fluidal electronic rods, covered with
layers of ectoplasm to produce human voices. In a lengthy talk through
a medium, further details were discussed. The main obstacle was how
to overcome the problems of high frequencies in the spirit world.
1944. The book Esoteric Healing, channeled through Alice A.
Bailey, carries a “Letter to a Scientist” dictated by the Tibetan master
Djwhal Khul. On pages 376 and 377 he prophesises: “Towards the close
of this century, electric devices will be used to contact departed souls,
together with photographing of thought forms, thus opening a new area
of spirit photography”. On page 378 he adds: “The astral body will be
susceptible of photographing, but never the mental vehicle”, and then
goes on: “Yet the first demonstration of existing after death, in such a
way that it can be registered upon the physical plane, will be via the
radio because sound waves always precede vision. No radio now exists
which is sufficiently sensitive to carry sound waves from the astral
plane”.
1972. From the Stainton Moses recordings: “...ere long there will
be an instrument that will make contact between the two worlds a fact,
so that the most highly skeptical will be convinced of life after death.
When that time comes, all the barriers that now stand will be broken
down”.
This small sampling of dozens of available predictions gives valu-
able perspective for judging the developments we will be reporting in
the next chapter. But our capacity for understanding these new break-
throughs can be enhanced even further by taking a moment to briefly
review the key events which led to the development of mankind’s
already existing communication systems.

144
 In 1558 Giovanni Battista della
Porta proposed a message sending
device that would utilize magne-
tism. Man had known about mag-
netism since ancient times, but it
was almost 300 years before the
development of electromagnets
made della Porta’s dream a reality.
In 1838, Samuel F.B. Morse, a
Fig. 37. Giovanni Battista/Magnetism
portrait painter with an inventive
bent, built a crude contraption which demonstrated that clicks from an
electromagnet could carry a message along a wire. After much experi-
mentation and assistance from
Joseph Henry, a message was sent
over 45 miles of wire stretched
from Washington to Baltimore:
“What hath God wrought?”
In 1867, Alexander Graham
Bell, a teacher of speech, demon-
strated with a very crude device
that wires could carry not only
Fig. 38. Samuel F.B. Morse/Telegraph
Morse’s dots and dashes, but the
tones of the human voice itself. The first words were transferred over a
wire only 17 feet long.
In 1877, Thomas Edison, with
no formal education, used a sew-
ing needle to capture the vibration
of the telephone mouthpiece, first
on paraffin paper, then on tinfoil,
and then on wax. Crude as his de-
vice was, he had invented the fore-
runner of today’s magnetic audio
Fig. 39. Alexander Graham Bell/Telephone
and videotape recording systems.
By 1896, Guglielmo Marconi was demonstrating that dots and
dashes of telegraphy could be transmitted without a wire over long dis-
tances—even over the Atlantic
Ocean! It did not take long for Lee
DeForrest to show that Marconi’s
signal could be detected by a de-
vice that used the flame of a Bun-
sen burner and platinum elec-
trodes with a coating of hydroxide.
He followed this device with the
invention of the first “audion”
Fig. 40. Thomas Edison/Voice Recording vacuum tube detector, and by 1907

145
the voices of singers could be heard on the airwaves. Following in the
steps of these pioneers came dozens of inventors bringing regenerative
circuits in 1912; superhetrodyne radio in 1918; the first complete tele-
vision system in 1926; and the first broadcast from a commercial station
of color television in 1940. In 1969, when mankind made its first landing
on the moon, millions of persons participated in that historic action via
both radio and television. Today we regularly see photographs sent back
to earth from cameras traveling more than a thousand million miles out
in space.
With this veritable flood of inventions and technical achievements
over the past 80 years, it is easy to see that the stage has been set for a
whole series of breakthroughs that will fulfill the predictions and
prophecies quoted in this chapter. The next chapter deals with break-
through number one.

146
 CHAPTER 18

History in the Making

No library in the world contains the information we will be present-

ing in this and the following chapter. Some of the material, in fact, has
never before been reduced to printed pages.
The idea itself—building a wireless, a telephone or a radio which
will make it possible to converse with the dead—has been around in
both heaven and earth for at least 100 years. Marconi and Edison spent
the closing years of their earth lives trying to develop such a system.
Neither succeeded. The reasons, as we see from our present vantage
point in time, are obvious. Scientific knowledge had not matured to the
point where enough was known about the nature and types of energy
that make up our physical and nonphysical universe. Moreover, the
whole subject of solid-state physics had yet to be born. We will
summarize the pertinent early history by reporting on two major break-
throughs which set the stage for yet a third.

Breakthrough Number One:

The Electronic Voice Phenomenon
Following in the footsteps of Marconi and Edison are some pio-
neers whose names will not be as familiar to you. In 1956, two men in
California, a photographer named Atilla von Szalay and a writer named
Raymond Bayless began an era of what has come to be known as EVP
(Electronic Voice Phenomenon). They recorded on magnetic tape some
paranormal voices—voices that should not, logically, have been there.
Bayless reported their experiments in the Journal of the American
Society for Psychical Research in the winter of 1959. The announce-
ment made hardly a ripple. Not a single person contacted the society or
the researchers to inquire about their work.
But across the Atlantic, things were about to heat up in the field of
EVP research. In the summer of 1959, a Swedish film producer named
Friedrich Jurgenson came up with some extra voices on his recordings
as he was trying to capture bird songs on tape in the countryside. Amid
the bird songs he heard a faint human voice, a male voice speaking
Norwegian, saying something about “bird voices of the night”. Like
anybody would in that situation, Jurgenson wondered if the voices
weren’t just stray radio signals. But the more he listened carefully to his
tapes, the more voices he defected that could not be explained as radio
transmissions. The voices included some personal messages, such as
“Friedrich, you are being watched”. A few weeks later, he recorded
what he recognized to be the voice of his mother, who had died four

147
 years earlier, saying in German, “Friedel, my little Friedel, can you hear
me?”
Jurgenson continued his experiments and published a book about
them in 1964. In addition to using the tape recorder with a micro-
phone, he experimented with making recordings from the radio, then
studying them to see if he could detect extra voices.
His book was read by Dr. Konstantine Raudive, a psychologist and
author of books on philosophy, who lived in Germany. After visiting
Jurgenson and listening to his tapes, Raudive decided to experiment
himself in order to answer the question of whether or not the voices
were somehow connected with Jurgenson’s particular personality. For
three months Raudive could detect nothing paranormal on his tapes.
Then he heard a whispered, “That is correct”, in the Latvian language.
This was in response to his remark that spirit world inhabitants, like
those on the earth, might face certain limitations.
Raudive was encouraged, and he went on to collect a huge number
of voice recordings. By the time he published the first book on his work
in 1968, he had recorded some 70,000 phrases. Also, he had added
some new techniques. He learned that if he tuned his radio to the so-
called white noise between stations, the tapes recorded at those wave-
lengths would contain voices. Word of Dr. Raudive’s work spread, and
scientists and engineers in Europe tried to duplicate his experiments.
One of those was Alex Schneider, a Swiss physicist, who helped Rau-
dive develop a new method of recording. The two discovered that
voices not heard by the human ear at the time of the recording could be
detected on the tape when it was played back.
Other pioneers who cooperated with Raudive included Theodore
Rudolph, a high-frequency engineer who worked for Telefunken.
Rudolph developed his own recording device, called a goniometer.
Another colleague of Raudive was Dr. Franz Seidl, an electronics
engineer in Vienna who developed a device he called a psychophon.
Engineers and scientists were not the only people to become inter-
ested in experimenting with the electronic voice phenomenon. Many
lay people did also, after reading Raudive’s book. So many began
experimenting, in fact, that a German woman, Hanna Bushbeck,
started a newsletter in 1969 to help the experimenters keep in touch and
exchange ideas. Today, there are more than a thousand people in Ger-
many alone recording, analyzing and cataloging paranormal voices.
One Catholic priest in Switzerland, Father Leo Schmid, has recorded
thousands of phrases.
And that is only in Europe. Not until 1971 was Raudive’s book
brought out in English, under the title of Breakthrough: An Amazing
Experiment in Electronic Communication with the Dead. It was pub-
lished by the British firm of Colin Smythe, which is a fascinating story
in itself. Mr. Smythe was handed a copy of Raudive’s book at a book

148
 fair in Germany with the suggestion that he might want to consider
publishing it. He turned it over to an associate, Peter Bander, who was
skeptical about the whole matter—until, that is, Smythe himself tried
some experimenting with the voices and came up with the voice of
Bander’s mother, who was dead. The two publishers decided to have
Raudive brought to England so that his tapes and his methods could be
checked out by scientists and engineers under controlled conditions.
Convinced that Raudive had, in fact, come up with unexplained voices
on tape, they published the book, along with a recording of some of the
voices. As a result, many more scientists and laymen throughout the
world are now experimenting with EVP.
As with so many aspects of the serious research into the almost un-
explored realms of the lower worlds of spirit, it is necessary to be
constantly on guard and try to separate the wheat from the chaff. So far, I
have said little about the content of the messages these researchers are
receiving. Frankly, there have been serious problems with these record-
ings. Up to this time, the voice heard in the majority of such words or
sentences purported to be coming from other planes is so weak that only
a person who has spent many months trying to attune his hearing can
distinguish the words from the background noise or sound that is a
necessary part of the energies involved. This fact naturally results in
much of the material being subject to misinterpretation.
There is also another problem. It has been found bits and pieces of
the experimenter’s own thoughts can be impressed on the recording
tape. To date, only a very few researchers have obtained sentences or
groups of sentences which are distinct enough that ten people listening
to them can agree on what it is they are hearing. Moreover, it is very rare
to get a complete sentence. Alexander MacRae, a Scottish researcher,
made a statistical study of many hundred EVP voices and found the
average length to be only 1.8 seconds.
In spite of such discouragements, the membership of the two
German electronic voice associations and the American Electronic
Voice Association are diligently pursuing this line of research to perfect
a communication system for conversing with persons who are very
much alive but no longer have physical bodies. More than 2,000 persons
in many countries are today following this line of research.

Breakthrough Number Two:

The Metascience Research
My reading over many years in the fields of psychiatry, psychology
and psychic research opened up exciting vistas for research into the
basic nature of the human being. In 1970, I terminated my professional
career as an engineering and management consultant who had special-
ized in the direction of industrial research laboratories in the United
States and Europe, in which role I had made 44 trans-Atlantic trips. With

149
 the prospect of royalty income from certain inventions I had made for
Swedish clients, I then embarked, at age 60, on what I hoped would be a
15-year, self-directed and self-financed research program.
The Ghost of 29 Megacycles, by John G. Fuller, gives an indepth
report on my work and that of others during this period. It was published
in England in 1985 and in the United States in 1986.
Since the answers I sought did not exist in any laboratory any place
in the world, I drafted my personal research program, using the same
techniques and principles that had made millions of dollars in profit for
my professional clients. Knowing that no one, or a combination of, the
major sciences could supply the answers I sought, I conceived a meta-
science approach. In the sense that meta means “over, above,
transcending”, I drafted a research program that was “over, above, tran-
scending all fields of science and including the best of the world’s
accumulation of religious, psychic and metaphysical lore”.
Over the next decade, five trips around the world and many shorter
foreign trips brought me into personal contact with a few dozen creative
thinkers in the fields of medicine, psychology, parapsychology, psychic
research, metaphysics, science, religion, psychiatry, etc. My close colla-
boration with these persons, often leaders in their specialties, resulted in
the eventual formation of an International Advisory Panel of more than
two dozen members in twenty countries.
In 1971, I and two electronic specialists opened a small private
research laboratory in Philadelphia to work exclusively on the project
that had foiled Marconi and Edison—a communication system capable
of two-way conversation with the higher levels of consciousness.
Through good fortune this laboratory activity had the benefit of two out-
standing telepathic channels, an advertising executive in his sixties and
a minister in her late fifties. Through the superb clairaudient abilities of
these two persons, contact was established with Dr. William Francis
Gray Swann, mentioned earlier. Dr. Swann, prior to his passing eight
years earlier, had been a physics professor at several distinguished
universities and had written the then-definitive book on cosmic rays.
Dr. Swann desired to help us in our research and assembled a large
team of colleagues from the highest astral and the mental-causal planes.
Many weekend sessions with Dr. Swann and his colleagues gave invalu-
able insights as to the nature of our design problems—numerous, and of
great complexity!
During this period, my twice-yearly trips for research in Europe
delved deeply into the electronic voice phenomenon research just
reported. By 1975, my engineering analysis indicated, at least to me, that
the EVP approach held very little prospect of achieving meaningful and
extended two-way conversation at higher levels of consciousness.
Several decades of organizing and directing research had taught me
at times it is prudent to carry on simultaneously two or more somewhat

150
 parallel lines of research. Hence, in 1975 I established a second
research activity in the home of William J. O’Neil, a colleague who was
a radio and television technician. I have already told you part of Bill’s
story—how he came to develop remarkable clairvoyant and clair-
audient abilities and how he was encouraged to develop his healing
skills by “Doc Nick”—in chapters 7 and 8.
Wonder of wonders, it developed that Doc Nick had been a ham
radio operator. He suggested that instead of the “white noise” tradi-
tionally used by the EVP researchers, we should use certain audio fre-
quencies. These would serve as an energy source against which the
sounds produced by Doc Nick’s vocal cords (in his rather dense astral
body) could be projected. He said that the result would be that our ears
and the tape recorder would then be able to pick up his voice. This sug-
gestion sounded plausible to us because we had observed that all of the
EVP voices had to “steal energy” from radio frequencies, spoken or sung
words, music or artificially created “white or pink” noises or sounds.
After some experimentation, we had the great thrill on October 27,
1977 of hearing Doc Nick’s first words just barely coming through the
quite loud mixture of tones Bill had provided as a starting point.
Bill: Try it again.
Doc Nick: All right. Do you hear me now, Bill? Can you hear me,
Bill?
Bill: Yeah, but you make it sound just like—oh boy—a robot on tele-
vision [chuckling].
Doc Nick: Yes, we always will, when we...we will. The one thing...
you hear, Bill. You hear, Bill?
Bill: Yeah, okay [sounding as though he is shaken up by the happen-
ings], You have to forgive me but—I know this is—you have to admit
this is kind of scary.
Doc Nick: [Unintelligible.]
Bill: It’s all garbled. I can’t understand you.
Doc Nick: I said, why are you...leave it alone, leave it alone. Did
you hear me, Bill? Do you hear what I say?
Bill: Yeah, I got it now, Doc. You asked what I was doing on the
Vidicom, right?
Doc Nick: Yes.
Bill: Dr. Mueller wants me to get busy on this, you know.
Doc Nick: Oh yes, that man.
Bill: Yeah, that man [chuckling]. You have to forgive me, but it is
not that easy, it is not easy. [Tones shift slightly in pitch.] That fre-
quency changed again.
Doc Nick: Yes, I know, Bill. It is much better now. I feel [echo
effect], I feel, I feel more comfortable with this frequency. Don’t change
it anymore. As I told you before, you must be careful of these frequen-
cies. Mark the frequency change.

151
 Bill: Oh, yeah—yeah, sure. I am supposed to guess what these fre-
quencies are. I don’t have any way of monitoring these frequencies.
We really can’t blame William for being a bit scared when he had
his first communication with someone who had been among the so-
called dead for seven years. But he showed his own good sense when
he remarked to Doc Nick, “Who do you think will believe anything like
this?”
Our position in releasing a tape recording of this communication
was precisely that of Doc Nick when he replied, “Don’t worry about
that. It is not important, believe me!” Those who scoff at this informa-
tion, even after carefully evaluating the tape and the related printed
materials,* may later find themselves in the embarrassing position of
one member of the French Academy of Sciences years ago. He told his
learned colleagues, “I personally have examined Mr. Edison’s phono-
graph and I find it is nothing but the clever use of ventriloquism”.
Noise-filled, broken and disjointed, and disappointingly brief as it
was, this was history making at its best. It was the first meaningful two-
way conversation of this quality of which we have any record. None of
the tens of thousands of EVP phrases achieved as of this date were of
such significance. And it certainly ranks in importance with what is
said to have been the first communication over Alexander Graham
Bell’s first crude telephone, “Come here, Watson!” or Mr. Edison’s
squeaky tinfoil recording of “Mary Had a Little Lamb” on his first
phonograph.
In some respects, this historic voice exchange between Doc Nick
and William O’Neil may be even more momentous. It could be called
the start of a communication system between the living and the dead-
between heaven and earth, between mankind on planet Earth and
higher levels of consciousness. But science demands replication, and
in this case further instrumental voice contact with Doc Nick was not
accomplished. And thereby starts the trail to the third major break-
through.

* Available by writing Metascience Foundation, P.O. Box 737, Franklin, NC 28734.

152
 CHAPTER 19

History Repeats Itself

Of course it was disturbing, even disheartening, when shortly after

that historic conversation, Doc Nick seemed to go off in a disgruntled
manner. What happened was, however, most interesting. You will
recall that Bill mentioned he was also doing some work with a Dr.
Mueller. At that point, Doc Nick remarked, in seeming disapproval,
“Oh, yes, that man!” and Bill answered, chuckling, “Yeah, that man”.
At this period in our research, in 1978, Bill was clairaudiently and
clairvoyantly collaborating in his research with both Doc Nick and Dr.
George Jeffries Mueller. These two dwellers in the interpenetrating
worlds of spirit had totally different personalities and professional
backgrounds. Doc Nick had been the first to collaborate with Bill, and
he definitely regarded Dr. Mueller as a “Johnny-come-lately”. However,
sad as we were to see our friend Doc Nick break off contact, he had
made an historic appearance, helped Bill to further develop his already
great psychic abilities of clairaudience and clairvoyance, had intro-
duced the idea of using certain audio frequencies and generally set the
stage for what was, within three years, destined to become the third
major breakthrough.
Earlier we mentioned the Apostle Paul’s admonition 2,000 years
ago to “test the spirits” to make sure they were who they professed to be
and were not mischievous imposters or pranksters. Bill had learned
this lesson well and between us we proceeded to put Dr. Mueller “on
trial”. The research over the next two years resulted in notebooks filled
with data and reports. It must be one of the best documented cases of
survival in more than 100 years of psychic research. Here are the high-
lights in abbreviated form:
Education: Dr. Mueller told us of his undergraduate work at the
University of Wisconsin in Madison, social and glee club activities, his
earning a master’s degree in physics, his doctoral work at Cornell Uni-
versity in Ithaca, New York, and his subsequent instructorship in
physics at Cornell. Parapsychologist Dr. Walter Uphoff visited the regi-
strar’s office at the University of Wisconsin and was able to verify Dr.
Mueller’s statements. Dr. Norman Uphoff, Walter’s son, was at this
time on the staff at Cornell, and was able to verify Dr. Mueller’s state-
ments regarding his work at Cornell.
Death: Dr. Mueller voluntarily gave the name of the small town in
California where he had been living when he suffered a fatal coronary
attack. We were able to obtain a copy of the death certificate, confirm
the cause of his death and get additional vital statistics.

153
 Social Security number: Dr. Mueller obliged us by providing his
social security number! We were able to verify this and learned the
names of two persons to whom payments were being made, 14 years
after Dr. Mueller’s death.
Survivors: We verified the existence and names of four surviving
members of his immediate family. They were as he gave them to us.
Personal appearance: Bill described Dr. Mueller the way he saw
him clairvoyantly. We then wrote to a surviving wife and asked her to
describe her former husband. Then a comparison was made of the two
descriptions. They agreed as to body build, height, weight and manner-
isms. They disagreed in one particular. Bill described him as having
wavy brown hair, whereas in fact he was bald at the time of his demise.
This discrepancy is easily explained. Even if you, the reader, make the
transition at the age of 90 and are old and decrepit, you will have the
privilege of “manifesting” a spirit body that suits your fancy. Most per-
sons choose their appearance at what they consider the prime of life.
Dr. Mueller had wavy brown hair as a younger man.
Intimate conversations: In the period from 1978 to 1981 (prior to
the two-way instrumental conversation with Dr. Mueller), Bill recorded
on tape dozens of extended conversations on a great variety of subjects.
Our investigations confirmed some of the intimate items Dr. Mueller
shared.
Personality: Again in deference to Dr. Mueller’s privacy, we will
refrain from anything presenting a personality profile, but from his
dozens of hours of one-to-one contact with Bill, we got a very clear
picture of his personality and mannerisms. We found our observations
were confirmed by a few contacts we made with persons who knew
him. Basically we can say he was a warm-hearted man with a wonder-
ful sense of humor. Due to his great intellect and scientific expertise, he
naturally had a communication gap with Bill, a high school dropout.
Dr. Mueller could never “bend” to the point of addressing William as
“Bill”.
Professional Resume: Dr. Mueller dictated to Bill two pages of
details, which he said were contained in the last printed copy of his pro-
fessional resume. Apparently the details were quite accurate, because
one family member was of the opinion that we “must have done some
research and uncovered this material in the files of one of Dr. Mueller’s
consulting clients”. While we certainly had not had any access to files
of Dr. Mueller or his clients, it was evidential to have such a statement
from a family member.
His book: Dr. Mueller referred to a “small booklet” he wrote in 1949
for the U.S. Army. Several times he requested that Bill “locate a copy
and read pages 66 and 67”. After searching for two years involving
contacts with several departments in the Pentagon, the Library of Con-
gress and the Army library at West Point, a copy was located in the

154
 Army section of the archives of the State Historical Society of Wiscon-
sin, Dr. Mueller’s home state. Comments regarding these two pages
and their amazing relevancy are presented in Appendix A.
Scientific knowledge: On several occasions, Dr. Mueller dictated a
scientific discourse—at least as scientific as possible with Bill’s limited
knowledge of scientific terms. One of these, dealing with the origin of
music in the earliest civilizations, is a most enlightening document.
A useful invention: Dr. Mueller, prior to the death of his physical
body, had a deep interest in arthritis. He gave Bill the wiring diagram
for a device to treat arthritis. He called it the Integrated Frequency
Response Therapy Unit. We built samples and had them tested in
several locations. We have received dozens of affidavits signed,
voluntarily, by patients who benefited. My wife Jeannette and I, as well
as some of our friends, are among the many persons who have bene-
fited from the use of this device.
Our main interest in contacting Dr. Mueller, of course, was not just
to gather evidence, as impressive as it may be. We wanted his help in
our research work. And one of the most dramatic examples of
Mueller’s help was the way he applied the knowledge he had acquired
from a life-long hobby—the study of the theory of music. From this
background, he provided a suggestion that helped make his voice audi-
ble in Bill’s laboratory. He instructed Bill to create a recording on a cas-
sette tape of 13 specific tones that spanned the adult male voice—from
121 to 701 cycles per second—for use as a source of audio energy in the
instrumentation Bill was devising. Wonder of wonders—the third
breakthrough! It occurred on September 23, 1980. Here it is:

Mueller: William, I think that’s much better, right there, William.

Now, William, did you understand? Williiaamm?
Bill: Yes sir, I understand, Doctor.
Mueller: Very well. I will give you a count from one to ten. One.
Two. Three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. One moment,
William.
Bill: Okay.
Mueller: Very well, then. [Reciting] Mary had a little lamb, its
fleece was white as snow. And everywhere that Mary went, the lamb
would go-ooo-goooo [deliberately holding last syllable]. Play that back
for me, William. William?
Bill: Yes sir.
Mueller: Play that back for me.
Bill: All right, Doctor. I am sorry, I was lighting a cigarette.
Mueller: Oh, those cigarettes again! [Bill played the tape back, then
they resumed their conversation.] Did you change it, William?
Bill: Yes I did, Doctor.
Mueller: Very well. I am back about three feet now, I am back

155
about three feet. I will give you another test. One, two, three, four, five,
six, seven, eight, nine, ten. I’d change that frequency again, William.
Bill: Very well, Doctor.
Mueller: One, one, one, one, two, three, four, five. This is some-
what better, William. Play that back, if you will.

Well, Mary’s “Little Lamb” certainly is adding to its claim to immor-

tality! But since one of the first rules of science is that of replication,
nothing could be more gratifying than to have Dr. Mueller’s conversa-
tion confirm that we had at last established meaningful instrumental
communication with a person who had shed his physical body.
Now, thanks to Dr. Mueller’s contributions to the new communica-
tions system, we want to share a remarkable conversation with another
communicator. What makes it remarkable is that he says he died 151
years ago! Fred Ingstrom, which is how he identifies himself, says he
lived in a rural area of Virginia and died in 1830. Our check of the
scanty birth records of that time and place have not yet confirmed his
existence then.
Fred’s voice, while still robot-like, was vastly better than the quality
of Doc Nick’s voice at the time of our first breakthrough.

Bill: Could you give me a count of ten?

Fred: One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten.
Bill: Yes?
Fred: Did you, did you understand me, Bill?
Bill: Yeah, I understood you. Let me make a little change here, okay?
Fred: Okay. [Next part is inaudible.] Oh boy!
Bill: What’s the matter?
Fred: Oh boy. Do you mind if I laugh?
Bill: No, go ahead and laugh.
Fred: Ha, ha, ha.
Bill: Okay—ha, ha [chuckling]. Let’s see. I’ll make a change here.
Now say something. Give me a count of five.
Fred: One, two, three, four, five.
Bill: You sound more like a robot.
Fred: I do? Well, maybe I am a robot.*
Bill: I doubt that very much. I am going to change it back again.
Now give me a count of five.

* The perceptive reader may wonder how a person who died 150 years ago could
understand expressions such as “robot” and “oh boy”. While Bill could not see Fred clair-
voyantly or hear him clairaudiently, Fred had been visiting Bill’s laboratory for many
weeks and had been listening to all of the conversations with Dr. Mueller. From these
and similar experiences, Fred was quite at home with modern slang and terminology.

156
 Fred: One, two, three, four, five.
Bill: Again! Wait a minute!
Fred: One, two, three, four, five. Did you get this? Did you hear
me? Did you hear me, Bill?
Bill: Yeah, I heard you. Wait a minute. [Changes pitch of tones.]
Now, give me another count of five.
Fred: One, two, three, four, five. Do you mind if I laugh? I am
having fun. Ha, ha. Let’s get this thing...
Bill: [Chuckling] Oh boy. Okay. [Changes pitch again.] Wait a
minute now. [To his wife] Yeah, hon? Okay, sweetheart.
Fred: What did you say, Bill?
Bill: I was talking to my wife.
Fred: Oh, that’s right. You are married. Oh boy. Ha, ha, ha.
Bill: Okay. Oh boy, I am glad you have a sense of humor. If you can
hear me, you will be able to hear that, because I’ll make a tape of it, okay?
Fred: Okay. Oh boy, that will be fine, oh boy. That’s right, you men-
tioned that, you said you were married. How long have you been mar-
ried, Bill?
Bill: About eight years.
Fred: Oh well, if I ever get out....How old are you, Bill?
Bill: I am 63.
Fred: Oh boy, I had you, thought maybe you are in your 20’s,
something like that, in your 20’s.
Bill: Well, mentally I feel like I am in my 20’s, but when I, when I
shave, my mirror says: “Who are you fooling, old man?”
Fred: Yes, I know what you mean. Well, I better get going. Oh boy,
I have to go right now. Sorry about that. See you later, okay?
Bill: Yeah, that’s okay, Fred. Good night.
Fred: Good night.

The great value of the technical assistance given by Dr. Mueller is

dramatically shown by this next excerpt, taken from a conversation in
April 1981. Near the start, he gives his reactions to one of the audio fre-
quencies and then proceeds to pinpoint an electronic circuit problem
on the video apparatus on which he and William were working.
Spiricom is the name we gave to the electronic device we used to
talk to these spirits. Vidicom is the name we coined for the video
device which will do the same thing, but with pictures as well as sound.

Bill: Just a minute, Doctor. Yes, I know you are here, but I got to—I
am gonna cut down the volume of these other frequencies.
Mueller: Very well, William.
Bill: I want to cut them down to a level that won’t, ah...
Mueller: I am not sure, William, but—I don’t feel too comfortable
with that one frequency.

157
 Bill: Well, we will see. Maybe we can change it later on, Doctor.
Mueller: Very well. Oh yes, William?
Bill: Yes?
Mueller: Ah, I think we have a problem with the Spiricom we are
working on.
Bill: Spiricom? Oh, you mean Vidicom.
Mueller: Oh yes, William. I am sorry, Vidicom. I think the problem
is...I know that your wife’s relatives...television receiver. However,
William, I think the big problem is an impedance mismatch into that
third transistor.
Bill: Third transistor?
Mueller: Yes, the transistor that follows the input.
Bill: I don’t understand.
Mueller: The pre-amp, the pre-amp!
Bill: Oh, the pre-amp?
Mueller: Yes, I think that I can easily correct that by introducing a,
by introducing a 150 or 100—I am not sure, William—a 150 ohm one-
half watt resistor in parallel with a .0047 microfarad ceramic capacitor.
I think we can overcome that impedance mismatch.
Bill: Oh boy, I’ll have to get the schematic back.
Mueller: You’d rather have the schematic?
Bill: I’d rather mark it on the schematic, Doctor.
Mueller: Very well.
Bill: The schematic is over there in the file.
Mueller: Very well.

I hope you noticed how very specific Dr. Mueller was in pinpoint-
ing the problem on the experimental video device on which he and
William were working. He said the problem lay near the third tran-
sistor in the pre-amp unit. The problem was an impedance mismatch,
and could be corrected by using a 150 ohm half-watt resistor in parallel
with a .0047 microfarad ceramic capacitor. What better proof could
science want that Dr. Mueller’s mind, memory banks and personality
are still alive and functioning in a useful and most dramatic way!
And now we share an excerpt in which they further discuss our
Vidicom research project. Incidentally, the problems of developing a
workable Vidicom system seem even more monumental than those of
perfecting Spiricom.

Bill: What’s that again?

Mueller: The television set with the metal screen—I didn’t put that
in the magnetic input from the signal generator in conjunction with the
input...from the camera to the television system. You understand,
William?
Bill: Yes, I think that’s it.

158
 Mueller: Oh, by the way, William. Did you get that multi-faceted
crystal?
Bill: No, I didn’t, Doctor. I got that five-faceted from Edmund’s.
Mueller: Edmunds? Edmunds? Who is Edmunds?
Bill: Edmund’s is a company—Edmund’s Scientific.
Mueller: Oh, I understand. What were the results?
Bill: Well, I inserted it into the lens of the camera, but all I got was a
lot of crazy colors of light. But I didn’t get any imagery.
Mueller: Oh, I see. Well, very good. Well, I think if we follow this
other procedure, William, and I am not absolutely sure but I have a feel-
ing, that this will help clarify the image, so we can discern features on
the subject. We have the form, we have the face, we have the...we
know...the human form. However, we must be able to discern the facial
features, so we can identify the subject. I don’t know yet [talking to
another entity. Just a minute, William. [To the other entity] What’s
that?
Bill: What’s that, Doctor?
Mueller: No, no, William, I am not....Someone is talking to you.
William, do you know Nathaniel? There is a fellow here, William. He
says his name is Nathaniel. He says he knows you and you know him.
Bill: Nathaniel? I don’t know anybody by the name of Nathaniel.
Mueller: He says he knows you.
Bill: I don’t recall knowing anybody [named Nathaniel].

You perhaps noted that Dr. Mueller turned aside from the micro-
phone to talk with another spirit person standing in the lab. William
was unable to see him visually or clairvoyantly, or to hear him clair-
audiently. The spirit, who told Dr. Mueller his name was Nathaniel,
seemingly could not talk through Spiricom. In the following days, with
Dr. Mueller serving as intermediary, William and Nathaniel discussed
boyhood activities, including pranks in which they had participated
more than half a century ago.
The contacts with Dr. Mueller were sporadic. Days and even weeks
would pass with no contact—even when William left the electronic
equipment on. Then Dr. Mueller would pay an unexpected visit like
this one:

Mueller: Wiillliiaam... William... William... Wiiilliiiaaammm, Wil-

liam... Wiilliiaammm. Are you there, William?
Bill: I’m coming, Doctor, I’m coming. [Out of breath] Oh boy. I am
sorry, Doctor, I am sorry. I just went downstairs for a cup of coffee. I
am sorry, Doctor.
Mueller: That’s all right, William.

Then, equally frustrating, there would be a totally unexplained

159
termination of contact in the midst of a very useful conversation. Here
is an example:

Mueller: What’s that, William? Did you understand what I mean?

Bill: Oh, I understand, but a lot of things I don’t understand. Do
you have any suggestions, Doctor? [Pause.] Do you have any sugges-
tions? Dr. Mueller? Dr. Mueller? Oh boy. Dr. Mueller? Are you there,
sir? Oh my God. Dr. Mueller? Oh boy.

In the early months of our conversations with Dr. Mueller, electro-

magnetic factors, the phase of the moon, sunspots or other unknown
factors resulted in poor quality of Dr. Mueller’s voice. Still, we
recorded a lot of material. In this segment, Dr. Mueller responds to
William’s mention of possible surgery. These comments and his obser-
vations of his own death 14 years previously, are worth careful consid-
eration.

Mueller: I am very happy, William, that surgery was not necessary.

There are times when surgery becomes necessary. Don’t worry about
it, William. Don’t worry. Worry does not help the situation. Should
surgery become necessary in the future, since it’s not a malignancy—it’s
benign—there’s nothing to worry about, William. Did you understand?
Hopefully you will not have to have that surgery, William, but should
you have to have that surgery, please, William, please—worry will not
help. Do you understand, William?
Bill: Yeah, I understand. But do you understand, Doctor? I know I
am not getting any younger.
Mueller: I know. I understand, William. Well. In my case, well, I
was fortunate. It was sudden. However, you know in advance. The
important thing, the one benefit that you will find as the result of our
contacts, you are aware! I was not aware of this side. I didn’t know the
potential over here before. So when I got over here it was like waking
up in the morning and not knowing where you are at. Like having a bad
dream...

There are many discussions on more joyful subjects than surgery

and death experiences! Often Dr. Mueller displayed his delightful
humor. In this excerpt, he speaks of his fondness for carrots and cab-
bage.

Bill: Yeah, I just turned on the tape recorder, Doc.

Mueller: Very well, William.
Bill: You said to hurry back, and I did. That has been exactly one
week ago.
Mueller: Ho-ho.

160
 Bill: Yes. Ho-ho yourself. Cold weather has left us, temporarily
anyway. It’s raining, it’s nice and warm. Of course, you never know
what to expect. I am going to try to put in a little garden this year.
Mueller: Oh, wonderful. Send me a couple of carrots.
Bill: What’s that again?
Mueller: I said you can send me a couple of carrots.
Bill: A couple of what?
Mueller: A couple of carrots.
Bill: Oh, carrots!
Mueller: Yes, William. And a nice head of lettuce.
Bill: A nice head of lettuce! I’m not going to plant acres, Doctor.
What’s that? I think you were talking at the same time I was.
Mueller: Well, perhaps I said if somebody had some cabbage, I like
fried cabbage. Oh, I love fried cabbage!
Bill: Fried cabbage! Well, I love sauerkraut.
Mueller: Well, you know what sauerkraut can do?
Bill: Yes, I do. You know, Doctor, I never thought I’d see the day
when I could talk to someone like you in the way we are doing. If ten
years ago someone had told me this was possible, I would have recom-
mended that they be sent to the “funny farm”.
Mueller: Well, perhaps you are right.

Like Bill—and his fellow researchers—you readers may have diffi-

culty believing these really are conversations with a scientist whose fun-
eral took place 14 years ago. After all, it does take a bit of getting used to!

Fig. 41. William J. O’Neil

161
 I should explain that these transcripts were prepared from record-
ings made simultaneously on two cassette recorders, and often on the
audio portion of one video camera tape. Fig. 41 was made by taking a
still photograph of the television screen during the replay of a video
tape in which Bill was conversing with Dr. Mueller in August 1981.
(Bill’s lab was only dimly lit.) Bill is standing in front of the Spiricom
equipment where he must remain alert to “fine tune” the signal and tone
generator to maintain the best quality of Dr. Mueller’s voice.

Fig. 42. Dr. George Jeffries Mueller

162
 The following exchange is one of several in which Dr. Mueller
states that serial time as we know it does not exist in his world.

Mueller: What did you say, William?

Bill: I said I am sorry, Doctor, but—oh boy—it’s almost 4 o’clock in
the morning. The last time we talked it was what? About a quarter
after two, I forget what time it was.
Mueller: Oh, there we go with that—time again. William, you know
better than that.
Bill: What’s that, sir?
Mueller: You know better than that. I am not aware of time over
here.
Bill: Well, I know. That’s what you said, sir.
Mueller: I am not joking, William. I am not joking. Now listen,
William, please listen very carefully.
Bill: Yes?
Mueller: Adjust that frequency, William!
Bill: All right, sir. Oh boy!

We were constantly amazed that Dr. Mueller could “see” everything

in the lab. Often Bill would lay out letters or magazine articles, which
Dr. Mueller would proceed to “read” and then discuss. Here he asks
about a new instrument that had just been placed in the lab.

Mueller: Very well, William. What is that in there? What is that

instrument there?
Bill: Which one is that, sir?
Mueller: The little one there.
Bill: Oh, the blue one, yes? The blue one, sir?
Mueller: Yes William.
Bill: That’s a bio-feedback, sir. A bio-feedback unit.
Mueller: Oh really! Do you have any nerve problems, William?
Bill: [chuckling] No sir. You know what that’s for, sir.
Mueller: Well, I am just joshing, William. I am just joshing. Let’s
get on with it.

During our years of working with persons in the worlds of spirit,

we have learned that most great inventions are conceived in the mental
and causal levels of consciousness and are then implanted in the mind
of a person called an inventor. We refer to this process as intuition.
Some time in the decades ahead, ideas will be transmitted directly by
instrument from a scientist in the higher planes. Dr. Mueller gave us a
taste of what that will be like in this excerpt from August 1981.

Mueller: Not very well but...now, William.

163
 Bill: I think I’ve got it, Doctor.
Mueller: Very well. Try it just to make—just a little bit, William.
You understand me, William? William?
Bill: Yes sir.
Mueller: Try adjusting that frequency. I’ll give a count of five, Wil-
liam. One, two, three, four, five, fivvve. I think that’s the best fre-
quency, William. Now, the next project, William. William?
Bill: Yes sir, I am listening.
Mueller: Very well. The next project, William, is the elimination, as
you call it, the zombie like sound of my voice. You know we have
more...at this moment. Is that about right, William? [Raising his voice,
as Bill was dozing off.]
Bill: Yes, that’s right, Doctor. [Chuckling] I am sorry, sir. Please
forgive me.
Mueller: That’s all right, William, that’s all right.
Bill: All right, sir.
Mueller: You know, in order to figure that, we are going to have to
have a more stable frequency. By more stable, I mean we have to do
away with the AC frequencies in the background. We are going to have
to find a way to eliminate it—to eliminate the fractional frequencies.
You understand me, William?
Bill: I understand you, Doctor.

Now for an evidential item that will gladden the hearts of even the
most strict parapsychologists. On one occasion, Dr. Mueller suggested
we refer to a small book he wrote in 1947 entitled, Introduction to Elec-
tronics.

Mueller: Did you obtain that book of mine yet?

Bill: Oh, that book of yours. No sir. By the way, our friend Mr.
Meek is really going all out to find that, because I want to read those
two pages you mentioned.
Mueller: Very well. And I want you to read that, William. There
must be copies available somewhere.
Bill: Well, I think George—that’s Mr. Meek, our friend...
Mueller: Your friend!
Bill: Yes, even if he has to go to the Library of Congress. He’ll prob-
ably do that.
Mueller: Oh, I see. Oh, all right.

Even the Library of Congress did not have a copy. However, we

located the book in the archives of the State Historical Society of
Wisconsin, Dr. Mueller’s native state. The two pages he specifically
asked me to locate, and ponder the implications of the statements
thereon, are reproduced in Appendix A.

164
 We conclude this series of excerpts from the Spiricom recordings
with a most prophetic exchange:

Mueller: William?
Bill: Yes sir.
Mueller: Did you make that telephone call yet?*
Bill: No sir.
Mueller: May I suggest you do, William. Now, you must under-
stand one thing, William.
Bill: Yes sir?
Mueller: I cannot be here forever. I cannot guarantee how long I’ll
be visiting here. However, I will do my best. Do you understand, Wil-
liam?
Bill: Yes sir.
Mueller: There is a time and a place for everything. So as I have
mentioned before, this is something I think you should be aware of.

Dr. Mueller’s statement that he would not “be here forever” was
most prophetic. As the months passed, I was able to observe that he
was beginning to shed his dense earthly vibrations and was starting his
progression upward, as depicted in Fig. 32, “Interpenetrating Levels of
Life and Consciousness”. Within one month of his having made the
statement about not being able to stay forever, he had increased his con-
sciousness to the point where our electronic system called Mark IV
could no longer be used for contact. In anticipation of that event, we
had already started to design equipment that may someday enable us to
resume contact with him.
Any reader who wishes to know more about the eleven years of
research which preceded these conversations between the “living and
the dead” will find the detailed story in The Ghost of 29 Megacycles, by
John G. Fuller. Fuller was given access to more than 300 documents—
correspondence, research reports, agreements, library references,
death certificates, social security dates, news releases, audio and video
tapes, etc. He supplemented study of these with travel in the United
States, England and Germany to interview my associates and other
researchers who were independently engaged in electronic voice
research. In his resulting book, he used his investigating and reporting
skills to create a balanced analysis.

* Occasionally Dr. Mueller would give Bill the unlisted telephone number of a profes-
sional colleague. I checked two of these and found them to be valid.

165
 Let Us Pause for a Moment

Ponder the significance of the preceding pages.

Their message is loud and clear. As a result of these breakthroughs,
the prophecies and predictions of the past 80 years, sampled in Chapter
17, have been fulfilled.

The veil between heaven and earth has been rent

And from the standpoint of 20th century materialistic mankind,

nothing in the past 2,000 years has done this so effectively. Man in the
flesh on planet Earth has devised electronic instruments that enable
him actually to talk with persons who were at one time buried in the
ground or cremated. Man has discovered that these people are still very
much alive. Their minds, memory banks, personalities and souls are
still intact and in good working order. They think and speak just as
they did before cremation or burial.
What are the implications of this rending of the veil? Changes so
momentous that within only one, two or three generations, the develop-
ments that will naturally follow this humble start could beneficially
modify the course of civilization and human evolution. The profound
questions generated will undoubtedly be the subject of many books that
will be written worldwide in the next decade.
We can anticipate some of the more obvious questions.

166
 CHAPTER 20

Questions—Questions—Questions

At this point, it is certain that various questions have flooded the

mind of the reader. And the more perceptive the reader, the longer and
more profound will be the list of questions! Let us consider the most
obvious ones.

1. Are the Mueller-O’Neil tape recordings a hoax?

An emphatic no!
The obvious and completely factual answer is that neither O’Neil
nor I had either the funds or the talent to dream up the script and then
stage more than twenty hours of recorded exchanges on a vast variety
of subjects.
But this is an important question and it deserves a satisfying
answer. It took mankind twenty years and tens of billions of dollars to
launch himself into outer space. Having achieved solid “two-way”
communication with the “dead” after long, hard, frustrating, discourag-
ing, costly and lonely years, we realized we had merely taken the first
small step toward launching man into “innerspace”.
Our miniscule effort is comparable to the role played by Robert H.
Goddard who, 70 years ago, spent his time trying to develop rockets
beyond the size and usefulness of the “sky rocket” created centuries ago
by the Chinese for firework display purposes. Goddard dreamed of
using the rocket as a means of launching men and women into outer
space, so they could some day visit other parts of the solar system.
The American press promptly labeled him “Moony Goddard”. But
when at last he sent one of his rockets to the stupendous height of one
mile above the prairie, he began to get financial backing. He began to
write learned texts that laid the foundation on which to launch man to
the moon, park satellites in orbit and create our space shuttle system.
More than any other person, he propelled mankind into outer space.
In 1981, eleven years into our research, it became obvious that skills
and financial resources far beyond those at our command would be
needed to achieve our dream of launching mankind into innerspace—
that is, of permitting earthbound persons in physical bodies to have
dependable, daily, static-free two-way instrumental communication
with enlightened souls on higher planes of consciousness. Thus, it was
obvious that the time had come to acquaint the world with the fact that
a modest beginning had been made—time to publicize our modest
beginning and stimulate inquisitive and pioneering minds all over the
globe to take upon their shoulders the challenging goal of creating a

167
 heaven-to-earth communications system. Like Moony Goddard, we
were prepared for the ridicule that would come from the public press.
The first step was to reserve the ballroom of the National Press Club
in Washington, D.C. for a press conference to be held on Good Friday,
April 6, 1982. The next step was to take a two-week trip around the
world to personally give information regarding the Mueller-O’Neil
communications to my colleagues in Tokyo, Manila, Bombay, Rome,
Frankfurt, Zurich, London, Paris and other cities and put into their
hands material which they could distribute to the radio, television and
press in their own countries during the week following the American
press conference. I later made two more trips through seven countries
in Europe and three trips across the United States to meet and talk with
individuals whose interests in our research had been stimulated.
At the close of the Washington press conference, there was a ques-
tion and answer period. One reporter asked, “Meek, do you really expect
us to believe this story?” My answer was: “Of course not! You do not
possess enough knowledge in this special area either to believe or to
disbelieve. But I predict that in the months ahead, one or more of the
world’s great electronic laboratories will take a copy of the voice record-
ings on the cassette, a copy which I freely distribute to all of you today,
and do some exhaustive research. Only if they publish their findings will
you have any sound basis for deciding whether or not this is a hoax”.
A few months later, a letter and a check came from one of the world’s
great complexes of communication laboratories ordering a copy of the
cassette and the 100-page manual, Spiricom—An Electromagnetic-
Etheric Systems Approach to Communications with Other Levels of
Human Consciousness. Five more months passed. Finally, an employee
of said company telephoned. Obviously their laboratory had done its
homework, using some of the world’s most sophisticated voice analyzing
and synthesizing research facilities. The twenty-minute conversation
concluded with this question: “What can we do to help you? We have
thousands of engineers and scientists, some of whom have spent 30 or
more years in their specialties. The expertise of these men is as available
to you as is the telephone at your elbow, at no charge”. *
So here at last, five years later, is the answer in print to the press
reporter’s question—and, no doubt, yours. By this offer to help, the scien-
tists and engineers in the laboratories of the Bell Telephone system
clearly indicated that they had detected no evidence of hoax.

* For reasons of their own, they did not publicize their results and conclusions. I tested the
sincerity of their offer to help by asking for some literature and references on a specific type
of ultraviolet light sensor. They willingly complied, supplying the desired information. I
did not follow the connection further. Twelve years earlier, at the start of our research, I
had resolved to stay free of all entanglements with commercial operations. I want to be free
to share results, if any, with all peoples on planet Earth.

168
 2. Is the instrumental communication readily repeatable by other
persons?
Not yet.
This work involves one or more, energies outside the four basic
forces known to present-day science—electromagnetic, gravity, strong
nuclear and weak nuclear. At least one unknown energy was generated
by the highly psychic Bill O’Neil. We have no way, as of now, to meas-
ure or otherwise identify it. This is why, in our technical manual, we
referred to Spiricom as “an electromagnetic-etheric” system.* In the
most outstanding case where there was a partial replication of our
work, it was quickly apparent that the operator and designer of the
equipment, Hans Otto Konig of West Germany, contributed his psychic
energy. Konig is a psychic who is clairvoyant and clairaudient, and
works with a spirit guide. In some way, Konig’s body contributed psy-
chic energy to the system. It is important to add, however, that neither
O’Neil or Konig acts as a medium. The communication does not in any
way come via their minds. They are objectively wide awake and in
complete control of all activities with their conscious minds. The voice
of the communicator is formed in the room where they are working.
But if a person does possess this special energy, then the answer is
yes, the activity is repeatable. In 1985 and 1986, Konig visited many
cities in West Germany and demonstrated his equipment. In a radio and
television station in Luxembourg, he assembled his equipment in front of
its engineers and the studio audience and then proceeded to establish
contact with recently deceased relatives of one or more persons in the
audience. In one program that went out all over northern Europe, his
contact was so solid and so dramatic that he and the station received
more than 2,000 letters of inquiry and encouragement in the next 72
hours.

3. Is there any such equipment currently available for purchase or

can do-it-yourself components be obtained?
No. Neither now nor in the foreseeable future.
A simple assembly of tape recorders and other components can be
used, as is being done by more than 1,000 men and women in the United
States and in Europe who are working with EVP, Electronic Voice
Phenomenon, as previously mentioned. But this approach is primitive,
resulting only in simple phrases and an occasional complete sentence.
The words are so faint in most cases that it takes months of attuning one’s
hearing. No sustained two-way conversation is possible now.
Inherent limitations, now obvious after 20 years of research, will
prevent the development of a practical system along these lines.

* See Appendix D for more information regarding the nature of these energies.

169
 4. Well, then, what about duplicating your Spiricom equipment
with which you talked to Dr. Mueller, Nathaniel, Doc Nick and others?
We are faced with the realization of three factors. First, the “Mickey
Mouse” type equipment we assembled for Spiricom was, relatively
speaking, even more crude than the crystal radio set I built more than 60
years ago with a coil of wire wound on a Mother Oats box I had obtained
from our kitchen. A tremendous leap in technology, contributed by
many inventors in the next ten years, was needed to make radio practi-
cal.
Second, the Spiricom system had no possibility of reaching beyond
the tuning range of the lower astral planes, some portions of which
include what, over the centuries, have been called Hell, Hades and Pur-
gatory. (See Fig. 33.) Contact with the astral levels holds real dangers for
the experimenter, from the standpoint of possession by some low-level
spirit in the great cloud of such dwellers who, vibrationally, are stuck in
close proximity to the earth plane. (One experimenter in Vienna was so
taken over by such a spirit that he committed suicide.) Bill O’Neil himself
has had occasional contact with such low-level occupants, with and
without Spiricom. One tape-recorded communication included more
foul language than we have encountered on the earth plane!
Third, it became apparent that to extend the “tuning range” for “long
distance” (in radio parlance, DX), more inventions would be required. As
of 1986, we know that these will involve certain wavelengths of light
instead of radio waves, the use of laser and holographic imaging
techniques, persons of a high level of spiritual evolvement and other
considerations, and the willing cooperation of persons dwelling on the
mental-causal planes of consciousness.
Our Spiricom-type instrumentation has served its purpose. Like the
experiment of portrait painter Samuel F.B. Morse, showing he could
send an electromagnetic signal over a piece of wire seventeen feet long;
like the speech teacher Alexander Graham Bell, whose first telephone
message came over a wire from a nearby office; and like the first radio
transmission of Guglielmo Marconi from one part of his laboratory to
another; Spiricom has shown that instrumental voice contact with the
“dead” has been achieved. Just as the work of Morse, Bell and Marconi,
within only a few years, was picked up and extended by hundreds of
other inventors, history is certain to repeat itself in the case of
instrumental communication with the higher planes of consciousness.
And since the inventive search stimulated worldwide by Metascience
has now been undertaken in at least ten countries, there is now no way
that such work can be “bottled up”, even if an individual or a vested
interest were so short-sighted and foolish enough to make the attempt.

5. How soon can we anticipate the perfection of a really practical

communication system with the higher levels of consciousness?

170
 When the first edition of this book was published six years ago,
Chapter 19, “Electronic Communication with the World of Spirit”, con-
cluded with these words: “Our lifetimes have witnessed the develop-
ment of such communication devices as the radio, telephone and tele-
vision. We have also seen the transmission of information to and from
objects millions of miles in space and on other planets—all of this
during that instant of history in which we have been privileged to live.
“The first such interplane instruments are bound to be crude—to be
filled with static—and frustrating to operate. Such is the nature of
research and development. But when the reality of such communica-
tion is proven, the world and its inhabitants will never again be the
same. When that day comes, it will no longer be necessary to write
chapters like these which suggest that survival is true. On that day, it
will forever become a reality”.
And now we can report that the very special day in history came
just 24 months later—when we held the press conference on April 6,
1982. We announced the recording of more than twenty hours of con-
versation between the “living” and the “dead”.
This new edition is being written in 1987. It is written from the
perspective of 16 years of continuing research to create a practical and
dependable system. It is made from the perspective of more than half a
century of experience in creating products and processes which are
daily of considerable use to this civilization. It is made from the per-
spective of many qualified collaborators on the higher levels of con-
sciousness who are desirous of reaching this objective through us and
other researchers.
From this threefold perspective, we answer with this unequivocal
statement: a workable, dependable, repeatable two-way communica-
tion with the mental-causal levels of consciousness should be demon-
strated in Europe, the United States or South America well before the end
of the century.

There are obviously many additional questions that will occur to

the perceptive reader. We will choose just one and strive to answer it in
our final chapter: “What immediate implications do these three historic
breakthroughs have for me and my loved ones now?”

171
 CHAPTER 21

Unlimited Horizons

The implications of the material presented in the preceding 20

chapters are enormous, profound and sweeping. Consider first the
implications for mankind as a whole:
1. For the first time in mankind’s history, it has been proven incon-
testably that death is merely a new birth into a continuing life.
2. It is now certain that individual consciousness—often referred to
as personality—continues to exist and to function in a disease-free and
pain-free environment.
3. The needless and destructive fear of death can be removed, as
well as the deep concern over the passing of a loved one.
4. The taboo our culture has imposed on the whole subject of death
can be removed.
5. The knowledge that the mind and soul transcend death of the
physical body will help man begin to understand that it is his own
thoughts and emotions that largely determine whether he will experi-
ence sickness or enjoy vibrant physical and mental health in this life.
6. Each individual can begin to realize that he or she is a permanent
inhabitant of an apparently limitless cosmos, and not just a soulless
maze-running rat or corn-pecking pigeon, as proclaimed by present-day
behaviorist psychologists.
7. In the decades or centuries ahead, when instrumental systems
evolve to the point where they can be used to communicate with the
mental and causal planes, mortal man will have access to the accumu-
lated wisdom of the ages on any subject.
8. This book has developed solid confirmation to date in support of
the key spiritual teachings assembled in what Christians call “the
Sermon on the Mount” and in the basic moral teachings of Judaism,
Hinduism and Buddhism.
9. We can begin to jettison some of the accumulated nonproductive
religious dogma that has ruined countless lives over the centuries to the
extent that it imposed burdens of fear and guilt.
10. Finally, the material in these twenty chapters suggests the possi-
bility of constructing a bridge by which science and spirituality can
meet on common ground, with the resulting changes in science and
organized religion benefiting both you and me personally.
Yes, the implications are indeed staggering. They necessitate, for
example, tremendous changes in our present theories and practices for
treating both physical and mental illnesses. They do the same for our
existing political and social structures, and for all religious creeds, not

172
 to mention the whole economic industry built around funerals and life
insurance.
There will never be a better world until there are better people in it.
Since society is composed solely of individuals, major changes in indi-
viduals will be reflected in civilization as a whole. Therefore, the impor-
tant thing at this point is to consider a better means for achieving major
changes individually.
Since I have already shown that scientific research into life after
death has confirmed the core truths of the great spiritual traditions, it
behooves us to pay attention to what those traditions have to say about
“better”. In my judgment, two points stand out.
First, all of them have some form of the Golden Rule. What Chris-
tians learn as “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you”,
members of other faiths also learn, although the language differs
slightly. Whether it be Judaism, Buddhism, Taoism, Confucianism,
Jainism, Zoroastrianism, Islam, Hinduism or Sikhism, the same idea
about how to relate to others is at the heart of each ethical system or
program for self-improvement. In all cases, it is the basis for a happy
life.
If the first point offers a simple rule to govern our relations with
other people, the second point does the same for our relations with our
Creator—our God. Since God is all—omnipresent, never apart from
us—we do not have to die in order to know the reality of His many man-
sions in which we live simultaneously during life on the earth plane.
I’ve shown throughout this book that your astral body—your butter-
fly body, if you please—can and does travel while your physical body is
asleep. Some persons, in a meditative state, learn to visit the various
planes or levels of the diagram I have called “The Interpenetrating
Levels of Life and Consciousness” (Fig. 32). You don’t have to wait until
death of your physical body. Ordinary psychics regularly go to the
lower levels. Extraordinary psychics such as those I have been working
with go into the higher levels. The truly enlightened, however, have
become familiar with all levels, from the lowest to the highest, and have
realized that those levels are present within us here and now.
This enlightened condition is rare, of course, and has been limited
to a mere handful of sages, seers, mystics, prophets and holy men—
people who reached levels of cosmic consciousness while still in the
flesh. What they tell us is that their condition is possible for us, too—
you and me—if we were genuinely set in our hearts and minds on
having God, not ego, as our center of self.
Moreover, they have often condensed their experience into systems
designed to help people in their quest for God. These spiritual systems
provide efficiency and security for the unwary beginner. Their essence
is not a moralizing lecture on good behavior, but rather a method by
which one can experience personally a deepening of wisdom, a growth

173
 in character and a realization of higher values in life. All of these sys-
tems have some form of prayer and meditation as a major part of the
discipline involved.
Why meditation and prayer rather than psychic development? Why
the emphasis on spiritual growth rather than, say, becoming a deep
trance medium?
With all due respect and love to my good friends, the mediums and
psychics in many countries who have assisted in my research over the
years, I must say there are inherent limitations and shortcomings in
psychic development. It is no substitute for spiritual growth. Those
who follow and teach the spiritual traditions have recognized this for
the past three thousand years.* They are quite familiar with the pitfalls.
Therefore, they have placed injunctions on students not to pursue psy-
chic abilities because they are obstacles to a full flowering of a con-
sciousness rooted in God. Psychic talents are often spectacular and
alluring, but they are by no means always satisfying. One of my dearest
friends, for instance, has been a superb psychic for more than fifty
years, but now in old age greatly regrets having failed to seek what the
Apostle Paul two thousand years ago referred to as “fruits of the spirit”.
Without concentration on an ethical foundation, and without wisdom
to apply such talents properly, great harm can come to the psychic and
to others. When one fails to open himself first to God, the seeking of
psychic abilities all too frequently leads into self-aggrandizing power
trips.
Prayer and meditation, however, have the effect of dissolving the
ego—the petty little personal self that wants to remain in control and
“get the glory”. And as ego goes, the light and love of God shine forth
more and more clearly, so that the personal becomes transpersonal.
There is an outreaching, a selflessness, an all-embracing attunement
with the human race and all creation. The “other side” becomes more
and more integrated into your awareness in everyday waking life, not
occasional transcendental states. The various “levels” then become per-
fectly obvious aspects of the single reality which is none other than here
and now. You can learn to tap daily the wisdom of the astral and higher
planes without waiting until you shed your present physical body.
It is no accident that society’s models of the fully-developed human
being, the worthy examples, have included many saints and holy peo-
ple. They have been revered for many reasons: their compassion,
devotion, inspiring words of wisdom, service to the world, lack of fear
about death, tranquility and peace of mind and heart in the face of cir-
cumstances that for most others would be extremely stressful, if not
overwhelming.

* Buddhism is 2,500 years old; yoga is more than 3,000 years old.

174
 What has been their secret? Each of them, in his own way, arising
from his particular tradition, has discovered the truth of the sayings,
“Let go and let God” and “Thy will be done”. A sense of the infinite
replaces the usual narrow self-centeredness. The personal becomes
transpersonal.
Their secret—and the message of this book—was captured in only
four lines by R.W. Raymond:
“Life is eternal;
and love is immortal;
and death is only a horizon;
and a horizon is nothing save the limit of our sight”.
Yes, of course there is a funeral at the end of the road—be you a
mighty ruler, an office or factory worker, banker, scientist, inter-
national financier, homemaker, billionaire industrial tycoon, minister,
priest, rabbi, janitor or pope. Everyone of the more than five billion
souls occupying a physical body travels a similar road. But now you
understand the seeming magic by which soul and mind, memory banks
and personality will still be very much alive. You can now understand
that you cannot “cop out” by the suicide route. You cannot be destroyed
even by an atomic holocaust. There is just no way you can terminate
the wonderful total being that is you. This is the magic of living forever:
you cannot die! And though you will be living forever, the quality of
life—here and hereafter—depends on you.
You can now be certain that after your funeral your own precious
mind, memory banks, personality and soul will be vibrantly alive and
ready to continue a journey that has unlimited horizons.

Man in the closing years of the twentieth century has at last rent the
veil between heaven and earth. You have peered through to the “other
side” and have acquired the priceless knowledge that:

YOU WILL LIVE FOREVER

175
 Afterword

As momentous as are the communication breakthroughs presented

in Part IV, with the faint spoken words heard by the EVP researchers,
the static-filled exchange with the “deceased” Doc Nick and the more
than twenty hours of solid two-way conversation with Dr. Mueller,
these are merely analogous to the faint dots and dashes over Mr.
Morse’s first telegraph, the squeaky voice over Mr. Bell’s first telephone,
the faint, static-filled voices I received more than sixty years ago on my
crystal-set radio, and the wiggly images on the first broadcast television
of Mr. Baird.
Research now under way leads us to predict with confidence that
when the third edition of this book is published, a few years hence, the
advances then reported will parallel the developmental history of man-
kind’s other communication equipment breakthroughs.

The reactions of critics and of many thousands of readers of the

first English edition, as well as the Japanese and other foreign language
editions, testify to the substance and lasting value of the concepts pre-
sented in this book.

176
Appendixes
 APPENDIX A

A 1949 Prophecy by Dr. George 3. Mueller

which he helped to fulfill 14 years after his death

While helping O’Neil and Meek develop Spiricom in 1981, Dr.

Mueller referred them to pages 66 and 67 of a small booklet he wrote for
the U.S. Army in 1949 under the title, Introduction to Electronics. After
months of searching, we located the book in the Army section of the
archives of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin, his native state.
Little did Dr. Mueller realize when he wrote the following prophetic
material in 1949 that, in a most dramatic way, he would provide the
“sparks of genius to reconcile the irrational, and so accomplish the
impossible”. Here is what he wrote:

“By 1895, the people of the world felt that their men of science were
due for a long-deserved rest. It was the popular belief of the time that
everything of importance had already been discovered and that the
great inventions had already been contrived. With justifiable pride the
scientific achievements of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries
were considered the ultimate in all that could possibly be accomplished
in the universe. The predictions of the era were that future generations
would have to be content with making minor refinements and
rearrangements to the established order of science.
“Within the past fifty years, the events which have transpired prove
how erroneous were these predictions. Even before the celebration
which marked the arrival of the twentieth century, Pierre and Marie
Curie had announced a discovery which was to have far-reaching
effects and was to change the theories on the structure of matter. The
Curies, working in France, had discovered radioactivity and had manu-
factured a radio-active element, radium, from pitchblende. The subse-
quent developments of the twentieth century continued to prove how
mistaken were the predictions prior to 1900.
“Today, men are eagerly searching for the undiscovered in elec-
tronic research. Men are at work exploring the known and unknown
portions of the frequency spectrum—from sound waves to supersonics,
from the lower radio frequencies through the infra-red, the visible, and
the ultraviolet regions, up into the area of the x-rays and gamma rays,
those minute wavelength radiations associated with radioactive ele-
ments. Men are reaching even into the spectrum heights of those fabu-
lous cosmic rays. Out of this work, new techniques and instruments of
electronic wizardry will emerge, but only after seemingly impossible

178
problems have been solved. These solutions will require the careful
thought and patient work of many people, whose findings will be corre-
lated with other efforts, verified by experiments and aided now and
then by sparks of genius to reconcile the irrational and so accomplish
the impossible.
“As a conclusion, a salute is given to all men of electronics and a
greeting is extended to newcomers in the field. Through their zeal, new
magic will be created from electrons in motion and electromagnetic
waves in space. Through their initiative and industry, future accom-
plishments will be achieved to challenge those of Oersted, Faraday,
Franklin, Bell, DeForest, and the other masters of earlier years”.

Certainly in the years ahead, the name of Dr. George Jeffries

Mueller will be ranked with those of “Oersted, Faraday, Franklin,
DeForest and the other masters of earlier years”.

179
 APPENDIX B

Additional Information on the Nature

Of Time in the Worlds of Spirit

The answer given to question 30—How is time measured on the

planes which make up the worlds of spirit?—was very elementary. The
true situation is so far beyond the comprehension of lay readers that we
sidestepped some of the complexities. For the technical or scientific
reader, the following may be of interest.
Several times a year for more than a dozen years the electronic spe-
cialists connected with Metascience Foundation have utilized the serv-
ices of two of the most capable mediums who have been discovered by
searches in this country and abroad. These sessions have been for the
purpose of discussing our research efforts with a team of former scien-
tists and inventors now residing on the mental and causal planes.
The team in the worlds of spirit was organized and is directed by Dr.
W.F.G. Swann, who in the 1950’s was reported in Who’s Who in Science
as follows:
SWANN, William Francis Gray, physicist; b. Ironbridge, Shropshire, Eng., Aug.
29, 1884; s. William Francis and Anne (Evans) S.; student Brighton (Eng.) Tech.
Coll., 1900-03, Royal Coll. of Science (London), Univ. Coll., King Coll., City and
Guilds of London Inst., 1903-07; B.Sc., London, 1905, D.Sc., 1910; asso. Royal Coll.
of Science, 1906; hon. M.A., Yale, 1924; hon. D.Sc., Swarthmore Coll., 1929; hon.
F.T.C.L., London 1936; Litt.D. (hon.), Temple U., 1954; m. Sarah Frances Mabel
Thompson, Aug. 14, 1909 (dec. 1954); children—William Francis, Charles Paul
Sylvia; m. 2d, Helen Laura Diedrichs, Dec. 23, 1955. Came to U.S. 1913. Chief
Phys. div. Dept. Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Instn., Washington, 1913-18;
mem. faculties U. Min., U. Chgo., Yale, 1918-27, dir. Sloane Lab., 1924-27, also
chmn. advisory research com. Bartol Research Foundation of Franklin Inst.,
1924-27; dir. same, 1927-59, dir. emeritus, 1959-62, sr. staff advisor Franklin Inst.
Labs, for Research and Development, 1945-62. Fellow Imperial College of Science
and Technology (London, Eng.), Phys. Soc., London, Am. Physical Soc. (v.p. 1929,
30; pres. 1931-33); mem., sometime officer, numerous profl. assns. Mem bd. dir.
Phila. Musical Academy, chmn. 1951-58. Recipient Elliott Cresson Gold Medal,
Franklin Inst., 1960. Author: The Architecture of the Universe, 1934; (with other)
The Story of Human Error, 1936; Physics, 1941. Contr. to study cosmic rays,
atomic structure, relativity, and atmospheric electricity. Died 1962.

Of course, in keeping with the Biblical admonition to test the spirits

to see that they are who they say they are, we established in 1972 that our
communicator was in fact the man referred to in the above biographical
sketch. This was made easier in the case of Dr. Swann because, as
reported in our answer to question 20, one of our team members, Melvin
Sutley, had been a very close personal friend of Dr. Swann. The Swanns

180
 and the Sutleys both lived in Philadelphia and had the closest of
friendships. Melvin, who died in 1977, was the first of our research team
members to make the transition.
After reading the above biographical sketch, the reader might say,
“This certainly shows the intellectual level Dr. Swann reached during
his recent stay on the earth plane. I wonder on what level of Fig. 32 he
is now functioning?”
We have contacted Dr. Swann many times during the past seven
years and have had many hours of discussion. He has told us that since
his death in 1962, he spent only a short time in the level of existence we
have colored yellow (in the foldout version of Fig. 32) and is now at the
upper boundary of the levels we have colored green. He tells us that he
is almost formless and is largely pure mind. He is the organizer and
leader of a large team of scientists, philosophers, mathematicians and
inventors, most of whom passed over within the last fifty years. Dr.
Swann has already made the decision that upon the completion of the
project on which his team is now working, he will accept the “final
rebirth”, shed his mental body and move into the levels above.
In preparation for a session in July, 1979, my associates and I had
carefully composed six questions for submission to Dr. Swann and his
associates—questions which had an important bearing on decisions we
were facing on the design and operation of some very sophisticated
electronic equipment. Here is a portion of the transcript of our session
through the medium.

Meek: All right, question number five: Can your energy be made to
interact with a stream of electrons in a vacuum tube such as a cathode
ray tube or in a traveling-wave antenna?
Swann: If so, it would have a scattering effect. A wave guide as we
understand it would possibly be the better equipment to work with than
the cathode ray idea. We do not know if it would interact with that, but
we believe it would.
Meek: And the sixth and last question, of a somewhat different
nature. First, by way of explanation, we speak of the vibratory nature
of all creation. To identify vibratory rate, you and we speak of higher
and lower frequencies. Yet you and other communicators have told us
that there is no time in your dimension. Therefore this question: How
can we discuss “frequency” and “frequency stability” without a time
base? The word frequency denotes cycles per unit of time. Yet you say
you have no time in your dimension. How is it possible to discuss
vibratory rates and frequencies independently of time?
Swann: [chuckling] We feel that there is a great deal of misunder-
standing in this area. Our lack of time relates to days, hours, minutes
and seconds such as we knew on the physical plane. Our area of
dimension is a type of frequency in itself. The vibrating energies here

181
 are those which comprise that which we are, vibrating energies which
we are. They even now comprise a portion of your own being but you
will experience them more fully after you lay aside the physical body
and lose the connection with your present etheric body and astral form
and frequency. So that is the nature of “dimension of being”—that
which is at a higher frequency.
On the physical plane, atoms are in motion and are vibrating at
such a high rate that although there are great spaces between them, the
surface actually appears to be solid. Here the spiritual atoms far
outnumber your physical atoms and are vibrating and interacting with
each other at a far greater rate than on the physical plane or on the
astral plane. They are also somewhat different in composition. It is
what many others have called “finer matter”, because all energy is
matter in some form or another.
This energy which comes into our area from other sources
functions according to the numerical atomic numbers governing such
energies. They are different from those on the physical plane inasmuch
as they are not measured by time. They are not measured by so many
vibrations per second. They are composed of extremely fine substance
which does not follow the laws of the physical plane. In making the
transition from the physical plane, a person must go through an inter-
mediary area which is known to many on the physical plane as the
astral world or the “summerland” and comprises a number of areas
where vibration changes, or the nature of energy changes.
At last on the upper planes, the being dies or lays aside the astral
body, much as he laid aside the physical body and proceeded in a body
of finer matter into the area where we now live. The energies which
come into this area are from a great—a much greater being, and one
who has evolved far beyond the imagination of most beings upon the
physical plane where you now reside. This energy is a pure light and as
it comes into our area, it becomes differentiated. This is the energy that
we use. It is not possible to find words to describe it.
We have said “frequency” several times because it seems to fit that
which we work with, but it is not frequency measured in days, hours,
minutes or seconds. There is very little with which to describe this
energy. Let us say that it is very fast. It comes in spurts. So far as our
measurements are concerned, it could be slowed down if we could get
it to be constant. We could possibly hope to compress it into a more
solid beam that would provide exactly what we are looking for: a
carrier of voices.
We would desire to use this because of our plans to place these
instruments in many dimensions, in each of many dimensions in the
world of spirit. We thought that since this energy comes into many of
the higher dimensions, it would be more native than anything else that
we could plan to use.

182
 Perhaps I have not made it clear that to us frequency is that which
we can see, which we can feel or which affects us in any way. It has no
magnetic qualities. It is a pure energy although tinged with the rate of
atomic energy existing on our plane. One cannot now measure it in any
way. You express a vibration in giga hertz and we say, “Yes, it is akin to
that”.
We have no true measurement here. We have a name for it, but we
have no true measurement that you would understand. (And I can
already hear your associate Paul saying, “Try us!”) It is only a term, just
as your term “giga” hertz was coined to name something which previ-
ously had no name. So that is what we have done here—coin a term for
what we are working with.
Meek: All right, we will be glad to share this tape with Paul, Hans
and Will. This is the extent of our questions. If there is anything else
tonight, Dr. Swann, that you or one of your teammates wish to share
with us—
Swann: Yes, we have two new arrivals in our midst, Melvin and
Margaret. [The continuation of this transcript involving the Sutleys
was presented in the answer to Question 20 in the text.]

From these comments by a scientist with the qualifications of Dr.

Swann, it is obvious that we earthbound mortals, locked as we are into
our little three-dimension sequential-time system, cannot explain the
workings of the cosmos within the framework of what we now know of
the electromagnetic system.

183
 APPENDIX C

Notes on Reincarnation by Robert R. Leichtman, M.D.

The footnote at the close of the answer to question 43 promised

additional views on the complex subject of reincarnation. Here they
are, drawn from the comments of Robert R. Leichtman, M.D. on the
early draft manuscript of this book. Dr. Leichtman is a psychic of
outstanding ability and the author of From Heaven to Earth, a 24-book
series of mediumistic interviews.

You make several statements about reincarnation that sound a bit

too permissive to me. I have never found that the personality (which is
what survives physical death initially) can make simple choices such as
“to go on the causal planes or reincarnate”. If that were the case, I
doubt that more than a very tiny percentage would ever return to the
earth plane. While free will and the development of wisdom to choose
are objects of incarnation, this free will choice rarely would extend to
deciding whether or not to reincarnate. The soul, in the average per-
son, is impelled to reincarnate again and again because there are mag-
netic ties which keep pulling it back to earth again until it is complete.
There are various laws of karma (or call it universal law, if you like)
which demand this. It is unfortunate that the surviving astral person-
ality and even the surviving mental essence of the personality would
like to believe differently, but this is usually not the case. The soul is
concerned with the evolution of consciousness and the work of service.
Many can stay a long time on the inner levels working toward that, but
there is often unfinished business in the life of that soul—business that
can only be worked out here in the earth plane. There is a certain “mag-
netic” appeal that this unfinished business applies to call people back
into incarnation.
I have seen the tomes that are written by people who get overheated
with the notion that God is a Loving Father who would not permit his
children to suffer, so “of course He would not make us come back here!”
Unfortunately, some lessons are a bit painful, but are necessary any-
way. Every good parent feels some anguish at times when his own chil-
dren fight to stay home from school or fight to stay away from the
dentist or rebel against getting cleaned up and doing their chores, but
the long term progress of their children toward maturity demands that
parents discipline their children to ensure their progress and to avoid
creating a monstrous and childish mess which demands indulgences
and has temper tantrums during the adult years. When the life of the
personality gets too strong, it often tries to speak for the spirit within

184
and begins to make up a self-serving concept of God that is something
resembling a Santa Claus who showers a lot of gifts on “nice” people but
not quite so many on “bad” people.
While it is true that a lot of difficulty and immaturity does get
worked out after passing over, and many new talents and insights are
gained, this is similar to the lawyer who learns a lot of theory in law
school but still hasn’t had any real life, personal practice in the field. In-
sights, compassion, talent and harmony—whether gained in heaven or
in an earthly school—must be grounded, eventually, in the physical
plane. That is the way new light enters the physical plane and collec-
tive humanity is enriched. Escape to heaven, however desirable, is not
always possible, except for short bursts between lives. Not liking that
idea has nothing to do with its reality.

—Robert R. Leichtman, M.D.

185
 APPENDIX D

The Role of Subtle Energies

Only the merest fraction of one percent of the readers of this

volume will have the interest or technical and scientific knowledge to
cause them to seek information on the energies which are involved in
creating a communication system capable of “talking with the dead”.
Hence, while we are not justified in adding the many pages to this book
which would be required to present such specialized information, we
wish to assist such readers in their search for enlightenment.
In 1982, at the time we made the public announcement of the third
breakthrough, we published a 100-page technical manual, Spiricom: An
Electromagnetic-Etheric Systems Approach to Communications with
Other Levels of Human Consciousness. This manual reported in detail
our research from 1971 to 1982 and shared the very limited knowledge
we had then acquired about the nature of the subtle energies involved
in instrumental contact with the higher worlds of consciousness. In
retrospect, perhaps the most important parts of this manual were Chap-
ter 9, “Spirit Energies—Their Nature and Problems for Spiricom
Researchers” and Appendix A, which also touched on the subject of
etheric energies.
While this manual does not present any plans for a “build-it-your-
self” communication set, or provide an outline of the eventual solution,
it does contain useful information not to be found in any other publica-
tion. A copy of the manual and a packet containing a 90-minute
cassette tape with sixteen excerpts of two-way conversation with
“deceased” persons and other informative printed matter may be
obtained by sending $25 in U.S. funds to Metascience Foundation, P.O.
Box 737, Franklin, NC 28734. Please make checks or money orders
payable to Metascience Foundation.

186
 APPENDIX E

How To Die

All of us spend all of our earth years in temporary occupancy of this

current physical body. Quite naturally, all of us are concentrating our
thoughts and actions on the business of living. But what about the
important business of dying?
As we move through our sixties, seventies and eighties, what guid-
ance is available to ease us through the gates of death? Suddenly, we
find we are really going through the birth process—rebirth into an excit-
ing new world. What steps are involved? Who is there to help us?
For those who want a good but short overview of the subject, we
reprint herewith the substance of an address presented in various cities
in the United States by Mabel Rowand more than forty years ago. It
was issued as a small booklet in 1942 and sold widely in the following
decades. It is now out of print. Since our own sixteen years of fulltime,
worldwide research in this area fully confirms all details of the Rowland
material, we use this occasion to help all readers in this and the coming
decades.

How To Die
by Mabel Rowland

Regardless of who we are and how we feel about it, each one of us
must one day leave the body. But there is absolutely no reason to fear
this change, for life is continuous and, what is still more comforting,
consciousness and individuality are continuous.
What happens is that the soul leaves the body we now dwell in and
starts anew in its next phase of existence, vibrating at a different rate.
The change is as natural as breathing and we should be as trusting and
fearless concerning it as we are about breathing. There is nothing to
fear any more than when we lie down to sleep for the night.
As God’s creatures, we are privileged to live life, and this privilege
includes stewardship of a body—a body housing this dynamic, precious
and most wonderful thing in the world—life. We must take care of the
body, but we are not to presume that we own it. We dwell in it. We do
not own it. The Creator put us into these bodies “for the duration” of
our earth lives, and we are to follow the first law of Nature and strictly
observe “self-preservation”. We are to fight for our lives to the very last
ditch and to protect our bodies to the very best of our ability. Even an
insect does as much, instinctively.
Painless as we know “dying” to be, it is nature’s own process and is

187
 arrived at upon the Creator’s exact moment scheduled for us in the
great plan. When will it be for me? Forget it! It is none of our business,
but preparing for life afterward is.
It is only fair to yourself to take in these few facts which I shall give
you and remember them—you may not believe them, nor do you need
to—but it is necessary for you to read and remember them. That is the
intelligent thing to do. Then when you need the information, it will
suddenly pop up out of your subconscious mind and be useful.
Now when we have completed this cycle of our earth life and it is
over—finished—we awaken in the next state of existence, discovering
that our thought and feeling reactions are exactly the same as they
always were! Remember that. You are you. There is no death. There is
only a change of apparel, so to speak. You have shed the body, but your
thoughts and feelings do not undergo any change in the passing out.
However, you become quickly conscious of the fact that things
other than yourself are slightly, but definitely, different, and it is for that
very reason I am making this talk. So please heed this, that you may not
be at all panicky, but know exactly what to do.
You probably at some time have dreamed you were falling. If so,
you know that the dreamer never hits and hurts himself. He wakes up.
In the experience of “dying”, sometimes the individual realizes he is
going—or he may merely suspect it—but the truth is, that while people
rarely admit it, even to themselves, most of them fear it.
There is no need to. There is no death: it is a misnomer. The truth
is that the actual passing out is not only painless, as I told you a few
moments ago, but often beautiful—a natural transition, never to be
dreaded.
We do not get whisked to a city with “golden streets” and see angels
flying around—no. If there is any such place, which was held out to us
as “bait” to be “good” in the theologies we were raised on, then we are
certainly not ready, in our present state of being, to take up residence
there, anyway.
The real of the person leaves the body—very much as a butterfly
leaves its old chrysalis. Many, many persons everywhere have seen
this passing out. I have seen it myself. Ask any experienced nurse. She
will probably tell you of seeing a vaporous cloud of ectoplasm—that’s
what it looks like to our human vision. It is the silver cord that holds us
to our bodies. Everyone has it and here in our earth life it is never
severed, but it stretches when we are asleep to let our souls or entities,
the real of us, go from the body and experience dreams. Then it short-
ens again and comes back to the body. It holds “body and soul”
together. There might be four or five people present at a bedside when
a soul passes out and maybe only one or two of them will have their
human vision stepped up to the frequency even to see this much.
Some of us have seen a great deal more. There is no death.

188
 Now you understand that you are the same individual after you
leave the body as before. No wings, no thrones, no crowns. You may
be pleased with conditions, or you may at first be a little disappointed.
It just depends on what you expected.
For the first few days, everyone’s fate is the same, whether saint or
sinner, and after that there are spheres of life where you will belong—
and nothing can keep you out of your sphere. You are drawn into it by
the law of attraction; that law which proves that like attracts like. We
will be with people of the same tastes and degree of spiritual interests
as ourselves, just as we naturally gravitate to and choose suitable asso-
ciates here.
Individual reactions are just that—individual reactions. And there
are some people who have lived a sheltered earth life to a ripe old age,
steeped in theological tradition and with fixed ideas about streets of
gold, gates of pearl, harps and so forth. These good souls are oftentimes
their own worst enemies, being stubbornly unwilling to adjust to any-
thing even similar to their earth life conditions, although the next plane
is similar—surprisingly so. Some people, through theological training,
actually expect, when they realize they have “died”, to find the streets
made of gold. Certain it is that if they believed that literally while here,
they will be of the same opinion still.
Some theologies teach that when we die, the body, soul and entire
entity lie in the grave and sleep until the “judgment day”. Well, these
dear souls actually believe that literally. And when helpers on the other
side of life try to tell them they are the same John or Annie Smith
they’ve always been, but that now their life is going to have a few
changes in its working out, they are skeptical and react as they might to
a Bunko man at the county fair. Some folks of this persuasion insist on
sleeping until “Gabriel” shall blow his horn. They often sleep for years.
Let us consider now, a soul just out of the physical body, through a
natural, leisurely process. It is yourself perhaps. You are greeting your
parents. How wonderful they look and they have been gone for years!
They were quite old and a little bent when you last saw them in earth
life. It used to grieve and tug at you a little to see them aging and
failing. But here they are as lovely looking and as smiling and happy as
you remember them when they were young and you were very young,
just starting to school back in the little home town.
Perhaps you are dreaming—something like this has happened to
you before in dreams. No, they were very brief and fleeting flashes,
those dreams. This is real and enduring. Still, your parents aren’t
saying very much—that is like a dream, too. But their gaze is fond and
steady and they smile so reassuringly. It is real. And what a nice cool
light feeling you have! They embrace you. It is real!
Lovingly, they lead you off into their own circle or vibration, where
you will rest and talk. Soon you will experience a lovely drowsy, but

189
 very safe feeling, and letting yourself go, will fall into a sleep of any-
where from three days or so to several weeks. Even the most spiritual
personalities we have any record of remained and rested the first sixty
hours or a few days, in the astral, then sometimes reappeared here on
earth, briefly, before ascending into higher realms.
The “dead” person doesn’t feel nor act any differently for having
“died”, but adjustments have to be made, just as they have to be made
here on earth. For instance, when summer is waning, we move in off
the sleeping porch, wrap up a bit and get out our furs and make a hearth
fire. That is all there is to it: it is that simple.
When you have slept for your few days or so after “dying” and
wakened to start living in your new environment, you never sleep
again. You rest as all do in the spiritual realms, but they do not sleep.
The exception is those people I just mentioned, waiting for Gabriel.
Please bear in mind that when the soul leaves the body it doesn’t go
anywhere. The change geographically is no greater than you would
experience in life if you walked from one room to another, from a dark-
ened room into a lighted one or from a warm room onto a cool balcony.
Please realize also that while your body is to be protected and cher-
ished, leaving it, in God’s own time, is no more to be feared than is slid-
ing out of your overcoat, letting it fall on a chair and walking away from
it. And at first there is no consciousness of this “shedding” as it were, of
the body of flesh. Our rate of vibration has changed, that is all. And the
life we have entered is so very much like the earth life the new arrival is
often quite confused, particularly if he has been taught all his life to
expect something different.
Should you ever experience the baffling sensation of walking up to
your loved ones, embracing them, while they, completely unaware of
your presence, walk through you, just do not get panicky. Do the same
as you should do in an earth emergency, or any situation which you do
not understand. We are told by the Psalmist to “Be still” (Psalms 46:10).
It matters not what your religious belief is, or whether you have
any—that is perfect advice. Just be perfectly still, within your own
mind and lift your thought to your highest concept—whatever you think
of a God. Call to It or Him or breathe His name silently or aloud, just so
it is from the heart, which it will be then—it will be you “as a little child”
and immediately—even more quickly than I can tell you this, help
comes. Pleasant, friendly aid and you are never in that “spot” again.
The helper finds your relatives and loved ones for you. This is
necessary when deaths occur accidentally and suddenly. Remember
what you are reading please. Simply raise your consciousness. It is
your same old consciousness you know, to your own heavenly father.
Just say as much as “Father” and help will come. The astral realm is
organized. I repeat: you need not believe this that you are reading, but
please remember it. In accidental death and in wartime it all happens

190
 so suddenly that the soul may be hurtled out of the body and stand
amidst a hellish scene of disaster and destruction and see his own body
lying there. It isn’t a pleasant experience, but it is life. Life is progres-
sive. It blooms and fades and grows again and lifts us from sphere to
sphere individually according to each one’s consciousness. Stand still
and pray. Death is a natural part of life.
If your life here has been devoted to the accumulation of material
things or to the making of money, to the extent that you have come to be
steeped in it—to enjoy it, say, more than anything else, you are building
up a hazard for yourself in the “next world”. Be wise enough not to
have your chief interest a material one like collecting or selling to make
money, because when we leave the body, we go where there is no
economic standard—money is not used. You will be a fish out of water
unless you have a hobby which is something less material, more
intangible and important than buying and selling.
Things “of the earth earthy” are just that. Be careful not to grow so
fond of them to be obsessed by them, for once we actually love things or
money, then we are in danger of being drawn and held by this earth
vibration. Briefly, that would mean that we should, as a disembodied
soul, yours or mine, after we have died, hang around others still in
earth life, whose tastes and activities are the same as ours used to be.
Our satisfaction would be merely vicarious. There are hoards of these
pitiful earthbound souls haunting clearing houses, counting houses and
money markets and trade centers of all sorts. Also we see the souls of
the morally weak and depraved in drinking joints and low places.
While you are still living your physical existence, realize that
money is important to you merely for body-comfort needs. This is
temporary, so don’t feed your soul to it. In the next plane you see no
“business as usual” sign. It is then that your artistic attainments may be
enjoyed and you will receive instruction for far more noble service than
money grubbing.
So, my advice is to be prepared—to prepare while still living here.
Cultivate your soul side. Learn to love and serve your fellow man. If it
is not easy for you to love people, it can be an impersonal kind of love
until you become a more loving creature. Cut down on the criticisms of
others and magnify their desirable qualities. I mean just to yourself, as
they start to “irritate” you when you think of them. The way they walk
or talk or some little fault—forget that and refuse to see it. The Hindu,
when he passes another human soul, mutters “pronom”, meaning, “The
God in me salutes the God (part) of you”.
I am not being sentimental. I am giving you the key to the situation
of living, more fully, both here and now and afterward! Let us live with
our thought upon God and with this attitude of mind we shall be living
the right way—and then surely we will “die” the right way.

191
 About the Author

As a teenager, George Meek began a study of the world’s great reli-

gions. Being of a scientific bent, he began early to follow the Biblical
admonition “to seek, to knock and to ask”. He sought to get answers to
questions about God, man’s relationship to God, heaven and hell, the
purpose of life and the possibility of life after death.
His professional career was largely devoted to industrial research
and development in the United States and Europe, to which he made
more than forty trips for this purpose. This work was paralleled with
extra-curricular reading in the fields of medicine, psychiatry and psy-
chology.
At age 55, he decided to get into a position to terminate his profes-
sional career at age 60 and spend the remainder of his life on self-
financed research into the basic nature of man. To make this possible,
he utilized his knowledge of the mind to turn on his own creativity. In
the next five years he made a series of inventions which his clients
patented in 13 countries.
At age 60, he embarked on an intensive full-time library and litera-
ture research program and worldwide travel to locate like-minded
researchers. He developed working contacts with several dozen medi-
cal doctors, psychiatrists, psychologists and scientists in many dis-
ciplines in twenty countries. He organized and led teams of these
colleagues to travel to various countries for research purposes.
The first fruit of this collaboration was the book Healers and the
Healing Process, co-authored with fourteen of his colleagues living in six
countries. This book is recommended by the World Health Organization
as must reading for health professionals in all emerging countries.
Now, almost sixty years after em-
barking on his search for answers to
life’s greatest mystery and after sixteen
years of full-time worldwide research,
he is happy to share the findings in this
expanded edition of After We Die, What
Then?
In order that he and the younger
researchers who follow him can push
further into human dimensions
research, Meek has organized and man-
ages Metascience Foundation. This
activity is permitting still deeper ex-
ploration of man’s energy fields and
interpenetrating space-time systems.

192
 Bibliography

The libraries of the world contain thousands of books that relate to

life after death. The following listing is representative only.
For the convenience of the reader who may want to pursue seri-
ously a particular aspect of the subject, this sampling of books has been
listed under these headings:
1. Apparitions, Hallucinations and Ghosts
2. Communications through Mediums
3. Deathbed Experiences
4. Direct Voice
5. Electronic Communication with the Dead
6. General
7. Materializations (solid ghosts)
8. Out-of-body Experiences
9. Obsession and Possession
10. Philosophic Speculations Regarding Life after Death
11. Reincarnation
12. Spirit Photography
13. Light
14. Spirit Descriptions of After-Life Experiences

193
 1.. Apparitions, Hallucinations and Ghos
Assorted Authors. Ghosts and Things. Berkley, 1962.
Bayless, Raymond. Apparitions and Survival of Death. University Books, 1973.
Fodor, Nandor. Encyclopedia of Psychic Science. University Books, 1966.
Fuller, Elizabeth. My Search for the Ghost of Flight 401. Berkley, 1978.
――――――. Poor Elizabeth’s Almanac. Berkley, 1980.
Fuller, John G. The Airmen Who Would Not Die. Transworld, 1979.
Green, C. and McCreery, C. Apparitions. Hamish Hamilton, 1975.
Holzer, Hans. Yankee Ghosts. Ace, 1966.
MacKenzie, A. Apparitions and Ghosts: A Modern Study. Barker, 1971.
Roberts, Nancy. An Illustrated Guide to Ghosts. McNally and Loftin, 1982.
Tyrell, G.N.M. Apparitions. MacMillan, 1962.
――――――. “Six Theories About Apparitions”, Proceedings of the Society for Psychical
Research, Vol. 50, 1953-1956, pp. 153-239.
West, D.J. “A Mass Observation Questionnaire on Hallucinations”, Journal of the Society
for Psychical Research, Vol. 34, 1948, pp. 187-196.
West, L.J., ed. Hallucinations. Grune and Stratton, 1962.

2.. Communications through Mediu

Borgia, Anthony. Life in the World Unseen. Corgi Books, 1975.
Brandon, Wilfred. Incarnation, A Plea from the Masters. C. & R. Anthony, 1958.
――――――. Open the Door! C. & R. Anthony, 1935.
――――――. We Knew These Men. Alfred A. Knopf, 1942.
――――――. Love in the Afterlife. C. & R. Anthony, 1956.
Burke, Jane Revere. The One Way. E.P. Dutton, 1922.
――――――. The Bundle of Life. E.P. Dutton, 1934.
――――――. The Immutable Law. E.P. Dutton, 1936.
Cooke, Ivan, ed. The Return of Arthur Conan Doyle. White Eagle, 1968.
――――――. Thy Kingdom Come. Wright & Brown.
Cummins, G. Swan on a Black Sea. Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1965.
Darby & Joan. Our Unseen Guest. Borden, 1947.
Duguid, David. Hafed, Prince of Persia. W. Foulsham, 1935.
Ebon, Martin, ed. True Experiences in Communicating with the Dead. New American
Library, 1968.
Edwards, Harry. The Mediumship of Arnold Clare. The Psychic Book Club, 1942.
――――――. The Mediumship of Jack Webber. Healer Publishing, 1962.
Findlay, Arthur. Looking Back. Psychic Press, 1961.
――――――. On the Edge of the Etheric. Psychic Press, 1945.
――――――. The Way of Life. Psychic Press, 1962.
――――――. Where Two Worlds Meet. Psychic Press, 1951.
Ford, Arthur. The Life Beyond Death. G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 1971.
Greber, Johannes. Communication with the Spirit World of God. Johannes Greber
Memorial Foundation, 1970.
Hapgood, Charles H. Voices of Spirit through the Psychic Experience of Elwood Babbitt.
Delacorte, 1975.
Hayes, Patricia and Smith, Marshall. Extension of Life: Arthur Ford Speaks. Dimen-
sional Brotherhood, 1986.
Hilarion. Nations. Marcus Books, 1980.
――――――. The Nature of Reality. Marcus Books, 1979.
――――――. Seasons of the Spirit. Marcus Books, 1980.
――――――. Symbols. Marcus Books, 1979.
Homewood, Harry. Travis is Here. Fawcett, 1978.
Kardec, Allan. The Medium’s Book. Psychic Press, 1971.
――――――. The Spirits’ Book. Allan Kardec Editora Ltda. (São Paulo, Brazil).

194
Lees, Robert James. Through the Mists. Philip Wellby, 1906.
Leichtman, Dr. Robert R. From Heaven to Earth. Ariel Press, 1978-1982. A collection of
24 books of mediumistic interviews: Edgar Cayce Returns, Shakespeare Returns,
Cheiro Returns, Jung & Freud Return, Leadbeater Returns, Sir Oliver Lodge
Returns, Thomas Jefferson Returns, Arthur Ford Returns, H.P. Blavatsky Returns,
Nikola Tesla Returns, Eileen Garrett Returns, Stewart White Returns, Schweitzer
Returns, Rembrandt Returns, Churchill Returns, Yogananda Returns, Mark Twain
Returns, Einstein Returns, Franklin Returns, Carnegie Returns, Wagner Returns,
Burbank Returns, Lincoln Returns and The Destiny of America.
Litvag, Irving. Singer in the Shadows. Macmillan, 1972.
Lombroso, Cesare. After Death—What? Small, Maynard, 1909.
Magus. The Magian Gospel of Brother Yehshua. Magian Press, 1979.
Mandel, Henry A. Banners of Light. Vantage Press, 1973.
Meek, George W. As We See It From Here. Metascience, 1980.
Montgomery, Ruth. Threshold to Tomorrow. G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 1982.
Moore, Usborne. The Voices. Watts & Co., 1913.
Peebles, J.M. Seers of the Ages. Progressive Thinker, 1903.
Ramala Centre. The Revelation of Ramala. Neville Spearman, 1978.
Roberts, Jane. The Unknown Reality. Prentice Hall, 1977.
Roberts, Ursula. Mary Baker Eddy, Her Communications from Beyond the Grave. Max
Parrish, 1964.
Smith, Suzy. Life is Forever. Dell, 1974.
――――――. The Mediumship of Mrs. Leonard. University Books, 1964.
――――――. The Book of James. G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 1974.
Wetzl, Joseph. The Bridge Over the River. Anthroposophic Press, 1974.
White, Ruth and Swainson, Mary. Gildas Communicates. Neville Spearman, 1971.
White, Stewart Edward. Across the Unknown. Ariel Press, 1987.
――――――. The Betty Book. Ariel Press, 1987.
――――――. The Gaelic Manuscripts. Pantheon Press, 1977.
――――――. The Unobstructed Universe. Ariel Press, 1988.
Wickland, Carl A. Thirty Years Among the Dead. Newcastle, 1974.

3. Deathbed Experiences
Barrett, W.F. Deathbed Visions. Methuen, 1926.
DeVita, Diana. Be Not Afraid of Death. DeVita Institute, 1982.
Hunter, R.C. “On the Experience of Nearly Dying”, American Journal of Psychiatry. July
1967, p. 124.
Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death: The Final Stage of Growth. Prentice Hall, 1975.
――――――. On Death and Dying. Macmillan, 1969.
――――――. Questions and Answers on Death and Dying. Macmillan, 1974.
Matson, Archie. Afterlife. Harper & Row, 1975.
Moody, Raymond A., Jr. Life After Life. Bantam Books, 1976.
Osis, Karlis and Haraldsson, Erlendur. At the Hour of Death. Avon, 1977.
Osis, Karlis. Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses. Parapsychology Founda-
tion, 1961.
――――――. “Deathbed Observations by Physicians and Nurses: A Cross Cultural Sur-
vey”, Journal of American Society for Psychical Research. Vol. 71, 1977, pp. 237-259.
Pattison, E. Mansell. The Experience of Dying. Prentice Hall, 1977.
Ring, Kenneth. Life at Death: A Scientific Investigation of the Near-Death Experience.
Coward, McCann & Geoghegan, 1980.
Rogo, D. Scott. Nad, A Study of Some Unusual ‘Other World’ Experiences. University
Books, 1970.

195
 4.. Direct Voi
Flint, Leslie. Voices in the Dark. Macmillan, 1971.
Randall, Edward C. The Dead Have Never Died. George Allen & Unwin, 1918.
Webster, J.H. Through Clouds of Doubt. Psychic Book Club, 1939.
――――――. No Finality. Psychic Book Club, 1951.
――――――. Voices of the “Passed”. Psychic Book Club, 1948.

5.. Electronic Communications with the De

Bander, Peter. Carrying on Talking. Colin Smythe, 1972.
Ellis, DJ. The Mediumship of the Tape Recorder. 1978.
Fuller, John G. The Ghost of 29 Megacycles. Signet, 1986.
Jurgenson, Friedrich. “Voice of Phenomena”, Esoteric. Oct.-Dec. 1975 (West Germany).
Raudive, Konstantin. Breakthrough. Colin Smythe, 1971.
Rogo, D. Scott and Bayless, Raymond. Phone Calls from the Dead. Prentice Hall, 1979.
Rudolph, Theodor, “Electronics in Parapsychology”, presented in Calderola, Italy, 1974.
Sheargold, Richard K. Hints on Receiving the Voice Phenomenon. Van Duren Press, 1973.
Seidl, Franz. The Psychofon. Austria, 1971.
Welch, William Addams. Talks with the Dead. Pinnacle Books, 1975,

6.. Gener
Barbanell, Maurice. This is Spiritualism. Spiritualist Press, 1959.
Budge, E.A. Wallis. The Egyptian Book of the Dead. Dover, 1967.
Burr, Harold Saxton. Blueprint for Immortality. Neville Spearman, 1972.
Carrington, Hereward and Meader, John. Death, Its Causes and Phenomena. Rider, 1911.
Chapman, George. Extraordinary Encounters. Lang, 1973.
Cohen, S. The Beyond Within. Atheneum, 1964.
Crookall, Robert. Intimations of Immortality. James Clarke, 1965.
――――――. The Supreme Adventure. James Clarke, 1961.
――――――. What Happens When You Die? Colin Smythe, 1978.
Ducasse, C.J. A Critical Examination of the Belief in a Life After Death. Charles C. Tho-
mas, 1961.
Evans-Wentz, W.Y. The Tibetan Book of the Dead. Oxford University Press, 1960.
Glasewski, Canon Andrew. The Pattern of Telepathic Communications. The Radionics
Association, 1973.
Hampton, Charles. The Transition Called Death. Theosophical Press, 1964.
Heindel, Max. The Rosicrucian Mysteries. The Rosicrucian Fellowship, 1943.
Hudson, Thomas Jay. A Scientific Demonstration of the Future Life. G.P. Putnam’s Sons,
1896.
Hyslop, James. Contact with the Other World. Century, 1919.
――――――. Research and the Resurrection. Small, Maynard, 1908.
Korein, Julius, ed. “Brain Death, Interrelated Medical and Social Issues”, New York
Academy of Sciences. Vol. 315, 1978.
Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth. Death, the Final Stage of Growth. Prentice Hall, 1975.
Myers, F.W.H. Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death. University Books,
1961.
Noyes, Russell. “Dying and Mystical Consciousness”, Journal of Thanatology. Vol. 1,
Jan.-Feb. 1971.
Pearce-Higgins, Canon J.D. and Whitby, Rev. G. Stanley, eds. Life, Death and Psychical
Research. Rider, 1973.
Powell, Arthur E. The Astral Body. Theosophical Publishing House, 1978.
――――――. The Causal Body. Theosophical Publishing House, 1972.
――――――. The Mental Body. Theosophical Publishing House, 1967.
――――――. The Solar System. Theosophical Publishing House, 1971.
Roberts, Jane. Seth Speaks: The Eternal Validity of the Soul. Prentice Hall, 1972.

196
Roberts, Jane. The Nature of Personal Reality. Prentice Hall, 1974.
――――――. The Seth Material. Prentice Hall, 1970.
Roll, W.G. “A New Look at the Survival Problem”, in New Directions in Parapsychology
(J. Beloff, ed.), Elek Science, 1974.
――――――. “Survival Research: Problems and Possibilities”, in Psychic Exploration: A
Challenge for Science (E.D. Mitchell and J. White, eds). G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 1974.
Samuels, Mike M.D. and Bennett, Hal. Spirit Guides. Random House, 1974.
Sandys, Cynthia and Lehmann, Rosamund. The Awakening Letters. Neville Spearman,
1978.
Tiemeyer, T.N. Jesus Christ Super Psychic. ESPress, 1976.
Tuella. The Dynamics of Cosmic Telepathy. Guardian Action Pub., 1983.
Vasilev, L.L. Experiments in Mental Suggestion. I.S.M.I. Pub., 1962.
White, John and Krippner, Stanley. Future Science. Doubleday, 1977.
Whiteman, J.H.M. The Mystical Life. Faber and Faber, 1961.
Yes, Inc. Wellness. Yes, Inc., 1977.

7.. Materializations (Solid Ghost

Bolton, Gambier. Ghosts in Solid Form. Psychic Book Club, 1957.
Crawford, W.J. Reality of Psychic Phenomena. Watkins, 1916.
――――――. Experiments in Psychical Science. Watkins, 1919.
――――――. Psychic Structures at the Goligher Circle. Watkins, 1921.
Crookes, William. Researches in the Phenomena of Spiritualism. James Burns, 1874.
――――――. Crookes and the Spirit World (M.R. Barrington, ed.) Souvenir Press, 1972.
D’Esperance, E.O. Shadowland. Redway, 1897.
Dingwall, E.J. Some Human Oddities. Hoore and Van Tha, 1847.
Edwards, Harry. The Mediumship of Arnold Clare. Rider, 1940.
――――――. The Mediumship of Jack Webber. Healer Publishing, 1962.
Fielding, Everard. Sittings with Eusapia Palladino and Other Studies. University Books,
1963.
Geley, Gustave. Clairvoyance and Materialization. Bern, 1927.
Gray, Isa. From Materializations to Healing. Regency Press, 1972.
Hack, Gwendolyn Kelly. Modern Psychic Mysteries. Rider, 1929.
――――――. Venetian Voices. Rider, 1937.
Hamilton, T. Glen. Intention and Survival. Regency Press, 1977.
Holms, A. Campbell. The Facts of Psychic Science and Philosophy. Kegan Paul, 1925.
Neilsenn, Einer. Solid Proofs of Survival. Spiritualist Press, 1950.
Price, Harry. Rudi Schneider: A Scientific Examination of His Mediumship. Methuen, 1930.
――――――. Stella C: An Account of Some Original Experiments in Psychical Research.
Hurst & Blackett, 1925.
Rizzini, Jorge. Otila e a Materlizacion de Uberaba. Editora Cultural Esperita (Brazil).
Sudre, Rene. Treatise on Parapsychology. 1961.

8.. Out-of-Body Experienc

Battersby, H.F. Prevost. Man Outside Himself: The Methods of Astral Projection. Univer-
sity Books, 1969.
Box, Oliver. Astral Projection: A Record of Out-of-the-Body Experiences. University
Books, 1962.
Crookall, Robert. The Mechanisms of Astral Projection. Darshana International, 1968.
――――――. More Astral Projections. Aquarian Press, 1964.
――――――. Casebook of Astral Projection. University Books, 1972.
――――――. The Supreme Adventure. James Clarke, 1961.
――――――. The Study and Practice of Astral Projection. Aquarian Press, 1961.
Davis, Black. Ekstacy: Out-of-the-Body Experiences. Bobbs-Merrill, 1975.
Green, Celia. Out-of-the-Body Experiences. Hamish Hamilton, 1968.

197
 Monroe, Robert A. Far Journeys. Doubleday, 1985.
――――――. Journeys Out of the Body. Anchor Press, 1973.
Smith, Suzy. The Enigma of Out-of-Body Travel. New American Library, 1965.
Tart, Charles. “Out-of-the-Body Experiences”, in Psychic Exploration: A Challenge for
Science (E.D. Mitchell and J. White, eds). G.P. Putnam’s Sons, 1974.

9.. Obsessions and Possessio

Wickland, Carl A., M.D. Thirty Years Among the Dead. Newcastle, 1974.

10.
0. Philosophic Speculations Regarding Life After De
Bailey, Alice A. Death, The Great Adventure. Lucis, 1985.
Beard, Paul. Living On. George Allen & Unwin, 1980.
Cannon, Alexander, M.D. The Invisible Influence. Aquarian Press, 1969.
Croissant, Kay and Dees, Catherine. Continuum: The Immortality Principle. Continuum
Foundation, 1982.
Fortune, Dion. Through the Gates of Death. Aquarian Press, 1968.
Fulton, Robert, et. al. Death and Dying. Addison Wesley, 1978.
Grof, Stanislav; Cayce, Hugh Lynn; and Johnson, Raynor C. The Dimensions of Dying
and Rebirth. A.R.E. Press, 1976.
Grof, Stanislav and Halifax, Joan. The Human Encounter with Death. E.P. Dutton, 1975.
Hamilton, Margaret Lillian. Is Survival A Fact? Psychic Press, 1969.
Harlow, S. Ralph. A Life After Death. McFadden-Bartell, 1968.
Hick, John H. Death and Eternal Life. Harper and Row, 1976.
Hyslop, James H. Life After Death. E.P. Dutton, 1918.
Koestenbaum, Peter. Is There an Answer to Death? Prentice Hall, 1976.
Leichtman, Dr. Robert R. and Japikse, Carl. “The Role Death Plays in Life” in The Life of
Spirit. Ariel Press, 1983.
Mitford, Jessica. The American Way of Death. Simon and Schuster, 1963.
Moody, Raymond A., Jr. Life After Life. Bantam, 1976.
Ring, Kenneth. Life at Death. Quill, 1980.
Rogo, D. Scott. Life After Death: The Case for Survival of Bodily Death. Aquarian Press,
1986.
――――――. Man Does Survive Death. Citadel Press, 1973.
Shneidman, Edwin S., ed. Death: Current Perspectives. Mayfield Publishing, 1976.
Toynbee, A., et. al. Man’s Concern with Death. McGraw Hill, 1968.
Weatherhead, Leslie D. Life Begins at Death. Abingdon Press, 1969.
White, John. A Practical Guide to Death and Dying. Theosophical Publishing House, 1980.

11.
1. Reincarnat
Cerminara, Gina. Many Lives, Many Loves. Wm. Sloane, 1963.
――――――. Many Mansions. New American Library, 1950.
Challoner, H.K. The Wheels of Rebirth. Theosophical Publishing House, 1969.
Ellis, Edith. Incarnation; A Plea From the Masters. C. & R. Anthony, 1936.
Endemann, Carl T. Voyage Into the Past. Alta Napa Press, 1981.
Head, Joseph and Cranston, S.L. Reincarnation: The Phoenix Fire Mystery. Julian Press,
1977.
Kelsey, Denys and Grant, Joan. Many Lifetimes. Pocket Books, 1968.
Leek, Sybil. Reincarnation, The Second Change. Bantam, 1975.
Montgomery, Ruth. Here and Hereafter. Fawcett, 1968.
Russell, Lao. The Continuity of Life—Why You Cannot Die! University of Science and
Philosophy, 1972.
Shelley, Violet M., Reincarnation Unnecessary. A.R.E. Press, 1979.
Smith, Suzy. Reincarnation for the Millions. Dell, 1967.
Stearn, Jess. The Search for the Girl with the Blue Eyes. Doubleday, 1968.

198
Stevenson, Ian. Twenty Cases Suggestive of Reincarnation. University Press of Virginia,
1974.
――――――. Xenoglossy: A Review and Report of a Case. University Press of Virginia, 1974.
Steiger, Brad. You Will Live Again. Dell, 1978.
Wambach, Helen. Reliving Past Lives. Harper & Row, 1978.
Woodward, Mary Ellen. Scars of the Soul. Brindabella Books, 1985.

12.
2. Spirit Photogra
Barbanell, Maurice. He Walks in Two Worlds. Herbert Jenkins, 1964.
Holzer, Hans. Psychic Photography. McGraw Hill, 1969.

13.
3. Li
Leon, Dorothy. Reality of the Light. Anchor of Golden Light, 1984.
Ott, John N. Health and Light. Pocketbooks, 1974.
Russell, Walter. Light. University of Science and Philosophy, 1950.
Tibbs, Hardwin. The Future of Light. Watkins Pub., 1981.

14.
4. Spirit Descriptions of Afterlife Experien
Borgia, Anthony. Life in the World Unseen. Transworld.
Brandon, Wilfred. Love in the Afterlife. C. & R. Anthony, 1956.
――――――. Open the Door! C. & R. Anthony, 1935.
――――――. We Knew These Men. Alfred A. Knopf, 1942.
Burke, Jane R. The Immutable Law. E.P. Dutton, 1936.
Conacher, Douglas and Eira. There is Life After Death. Howard Baker, 1978.
Cooke, Ivan. Thy Kingdom Come. Wright and Brown.
――――――. The Return of Arthur Conan Doyle. White Eagle, 1963.
Crookall, Robert. The Supreme Adventure: Analyses of Psychic Communications. James
Clarke, 1961.
Darby and Joan. Our Unseen Guest. Borden, 1943.
Findlay, Arthur. On the Edge of the Etheric. Psychic Press, 1962.
――――――. Where Two Worlds Meet. Psychic Press.
Hayes, Patricia and Smith, Marshall. Extension of Life: Arthur Ford Speaks. Dimensional
Brotherhood Publishing House, 1986.
Homewood, Harry. Thavis is Here. Fawcett, 1978.
Leichtman, Dr. Robert R. From Heaven to Earth. Ariel Press, 1978-82.
Mandel, Henry A. Banners of Light. Vantage Press, 1973.
Randall, Edward C. The Dead Have Never Died. George Allen & Unwin, 1927.
Richelieu, Peter. A Soul’s Journey. Turnstone Press, 1972.
Wetzl, Joseph. The Bridge Over the River. Anthroposophic Press, 1974.
White, Stewart Edward. Across the Unknown. Ariel Press, 1987.
――――――. The Betty Book. Ariel Press, 1987.

199
 INDEXES

BY NAME

Andrade, Hernani, 73, 99 De Freitas, José P., 55

Anthony, Saint, 37 De Forest, Lee, 179
Arigó, 55-57 De Gaulle, Charles, 58, 84
Aristotle, 37 Dixon, Bernard, 126
Doc Nick, 57, 151-153, 156, 170,
Bailey, Alice, 139, 144 176
Baird, John L., 176 Doyle, Lady Conan, 59
Bander, Peter, 149 Doyle, Sir Arthur Conan, 38, 61-
Baraduc, Hyppolite, 38 62, 143
Barbanell, Maurice, 136
Battista della Porta, Giovanni, 145 Eddy, Mary Baker, 54
Bayless, Raymond, 147 Edison, Thomas A., 10, 145, 150,
Bell, Alexander Graham, 145, 170, 152
176,179 Edwards, Harry, 63
Bentov, Itzhak, 23, 133-134 Elijah, 63, 81
Bolton, Gambier, 45 Ellis, Edith, 140, 143
Bosch, Hieronymous, 101 Euripides, 37
Bozzano, Ernest, 99
Brandon, Wilfred, 140, 143 Faraday, Michael, 179
Buddha, 95, 108-109, 139 Felix, Minucius, 50
Burr, Harold Saxton, 18 Ferguson, Marilyn, 24
Bush, Rev. Sophia, 62-63, 69 Fiske, John, 37
Bushbeck, Hanna, 148 Flammarion, Camille, 38
Flint, Leslie, 121
Campbell, R.J., 38 Ford, Arthur, 114
Carrington, Hereward, 14, 38 Fox, Joyce M., 5
Cayce, Edgar, 132-133, 135 Franco, G.G., 38
Churchill, Sir Winston, 58, 83-84 Franklin, Benjamin, 99, 179
Cicero, 37 Freud, Sigmund, 26, 54
Clark, James Freeman, 74 Fritz, Dr., 55-57
Colley, Thomas, 38 Fuller, John G., 150, 165
Confucius, 37 Funk, I.K., 38
Cooke, Grace, 61, 143
Cooke, Ivan, 61, 143 Gambill, Joe, 45
Crandon, Mina S., 69 Ganymed de Souza, 64-65
Cranston, S.L., 137 George VI, King, 58, 84
Crookall, Robert, 39-40, 123 Glazewski, Andrew, 13
Crookes, 39, 45, 63, 73, 99 Graham, Billy, 110
Curie, Pierre and Marie, 178 Gran, Sarah, 111

200
Goddard, Robert H., 167 Lodge, Sir Oliver, 38
Guirdham, Arthur, 73-74 Lombroso, Cesare, 38
Longfellow, Henry W., 38
Hamilton, T. Glen, 99
Haraldsson, Erlendur, 40 MacCrae, Alexander, 149
Harmening, Minnie, 51-53 Mandel, Henry, 53
Harriman, W. Averell, 84 Marconi, Guglielmo, 143, 145,
Harris, Bertha, 51-53, 58-61, 84 147, 150, 170
Hawthorne, Julian, 50 Maximus of Tyre, 37
Head, Joseph, 137 McDougall, William, 14
Herodotus, 37 Milner, Dennis, 19
Hertzberg, H.T.E., 133 Milton, John, 38, 89
Homer, 49 Mirabelli, Carlos, 63-65
Hope, Billy, 59-61 Mohammed, 108-109
Horace, 37 Monroe, Robert, 42-43
Hoyle, Fred, 7 Moody, Raymond, 39, 123
Hudson, Thomson J., 38 Morse, Samuel, 145, 170, 176
Hyslop, James H., 38-39 Moses, 63, 81
Moses, Stainton, 144
Ingstrom, Fred, 156-157 Motoyama, Hiroshi, 7-8, 22-23,
73, 79, 93
James, St., 63 Mueller, George Jeffries, 151-165,
James, William, 38 167-170, 176, 178-179
Janet, Pierre, 38
Jesus, 20, 50, 63, 70, 72, 76, 89, Nathaniel, 159, 170
91-92, 95-96, 105, 108-109, 117, Nellie, Pere, 74
139 Newton, J.R., 38
John, St., 63, 82, 84, 104 Nixon, Richard, 127
Johnson, David Kendrick, 135 Northrop, F.C.S., 18-19
Johnson, Raynor, 73
Johnson, Samuel, 37 Oakes, Titus, 105
Joseph, 71 O’Neil, William, 53, 56-57, 151-
Josephus, 37, 49 165, 167-170, 178
Jurgenson, Friederich, 147-148 Origen, 37
Osis, Karlis, 40, 73, 123
Kelsey, Denys, 73 Owen, G. Eustace, 34
Khul, Djwal, 144
Kluski, Franek, 63, 69 Paul, St., 85, 90, 117, 153
Konig, Hans Otto, 169 Pavlowski, F.W., 63
Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, 39, 99, Penfield, Wilder, 15
23 Permutt, Cyril, 62
Pribram, K., 24
Langone, John, 14 Plato, 37, 49
Leichtman, Robert, 57, 80-81, 120 Plutarch, 37, 49
135, 184-185 Puharich, Andrija, 56

201
Raudive, Konstantin, 148 Sophocles, 37
Raupert, Godfrey, 50 Stead, W.T., 38
Raymond, R.W., 175 Steiner, Rudolf, 138
Richet, Charles, 39, 99, 121 Stevenson, Ian, 73
Roberts, Silas, 82 Sutley, Melvin, 111-114, 180
Roll, Michael, 76 Swainson, Mary, 121
Rowland, Mabel, 187-191 Swann, William F.G., 112-114,
Royster, Vermont, 127 133, 150, 180-183
Rudolph, Theodore, 148 Swedenborg, Emanuel, 37
Russell, George W. (A.E.), 133
Tennyson, Alfred, 38
Savage, M.J., 38-39 Tertullian, 37, 50
Schmid, Leo, 148 Tiller, William, 99, 139
Schneider, Alex, 148
Schrenck-Notzing, Baron, 63, 99 Uphoff, Walter & Norman, 153
Searle, George M., 38
Seidl, Franz, 148 Viana, Octavio, 64-65
Shakespeare, William, 38 Virgil, 37
Sheldrake, Rupert, 19 Von Braun, Werhner, 79
Shelley, Violet M., 132 Von Szalay, Attila, 147
Shultz, Shirley, 71
Sisson, Josefina, 22 Wallace, Alfred, 38
Smart, Edward, 19 White, Ruth, 121
Smythe, Colin, 148 Wickland, Carl, 37, 51, 99, 108
Socrates, 37, 49 Worrall, Olga, 124, 138

BY SUBJECTS

Acupuncture, 20-23, 25, 32 Bioplasmic (see etheric body)

Alcoholics, 94, 106-107 Brain/mind, difference between,
Angels, 110, 188 15-16, 24, 27, 126
Apparitions, 40, 44, 85
Archangels, 110 Cathars, 74
Astral body, 27, 32, 90, 93, 106 Cause and effect, law of, 95, 130-
Astral travel, 29, 123 131
Astral worlds, 30, 48, 106, 130, Celestial planes, 95, 110, 131
182 Chakras, 23-25, 32, 47
Attraction, law of, 189 Creator (see Universal Godhead)
Aura, magnetic, 94 Cremation, 105-106

Baraka, 23 Deathbed experiences, 39-40, 85

Biblical references, 17, 37, 63, Demons, 49, 85
72, 82, 95, 117, 190 Devas, 110

202
 Devil, 49, 101 Low astral plane, 94, 104-105,
Dimensions, 75, 182 107, 120
Dowsing, 46
Drug addicts, 94, 107 • Male/female duality, 116
Marriage in astral world, 115
Earthbound spirits, 49, 191 Materialization, 63-71, 85
Ectoplasm, 69, 144, 188 Matter as energy, 78
Electronic communication with Meditation, 123, 173-174
spirits, 143-171 Mediumship, 54, 64-71, 80-84,
Electronic voice phenomenon 119-121, 134, 143
(EVP), 147-148, 150, 169 Mental and causal planes, 95,
Elementals, 49 121, 123-124, 131
Energy, subtle, 11, 186 Mental body, 95, 121
Energy fields, 17-20, 47, 91, 107 Mind, 7, 27
Eternal life, 96, 175
Etheric body, 25, 31-32, 93, 100 Near-death experiences, 39, 40-
106 42, 85
Neutrinos, 76
Final rebirth, 131 Nonhuman astral beings, 94, 103

Ghosts, 44-46, 85, 100-101 Obsession, 48-54, 85, 94, 107

God (see Universal Godhead) Odic force, 23
Golden rule, 173 Out-of-body experiences, 29, 40,
Guardian angel, 110 42-43, 85
Guides, spirit, 119, 169 Outer darkness, 48, 94

Hauntings, 44, 85, 101 Past life readings, 134, 138-139

Healing, 11, 55-57 Personality, 7, 89, 184
Heaven, 94, 108 Pets, after death, 135-136
Hell, 3, 94, 101-104 Photography—
Helpers, spirit, 110 of fraudulent mediums, 69
Hierarchy, spiritual, 110 of human energy fields, 22
Highest astral plane, 94 of invisible life forms, 9
of spirits, 58-62, 64, 66-
Imaginary playmates, 123 70, 144
Immortality, 96 of ghosts, 46
Intermediate astral plane, 94, 120 Physical plane, 93
Intuition, 95 Planes, 91-96
Plasma, 78
Judgment day, 3, 108, 189 Possession, 48-54, 80, 85, 108
Prana, 23
Karma, 136-138, 184 Prayers for the dead, 118, 120
Ki, 23 Prayer for self-development, 174
Kirlian photography, 18-19 Protectors, spirit, 119
Knowledge, explosion of, 127 Psychic development, 174

203
Psychical research, 38, 80, 99, Spirit, 7, 27-28
124 Spirit doctors, 55-57, 85
Psychosomatic illness, 124, 126 Spiritualism, 38, 61, 81, 119, 143
Purgatory, 3, 94, 101 Spirit photography, 58-62, 64,
66-70, 85
Quantum mechanics, 76 Suicide, 7, 51-52, 105, 170, 175
Summerland, 94, 182
Real “I”, 28
Reincarnation, 72-74, 86, 125- Telepathy, 57, 82-84, 86, 143
138, 184-185 Third heaven, 95
Time, 118, 163, 181-183
Second death, 94
Senility, 117, 123 Universal Godhead, 3, 28, 96,
Sex in the astral worlds, 115 124, 174, 190
Silver cord, 17, 29-30, 40, 188
Sitters, 99 Vidicom, 157-158
Soul, 7, 13, 23, 27-28, 89, 184 Voice box, 121
Soul mates, 138-139
Space-time systems, 75-77, 86 Weight loss at death, 13-14
Spiricom, 157-158, 162, 170 Wheel of birth and rebirth, 131

204